LHM 280 - 141128 - Op

Operating manual EN
Type:
LHM 280
Serial number:
141128
ORIGINAL 001 - 20.11.2012 / lwnkia0

HARBOUR MOBILE CRANE
LHM 280
LOAD CAPACITY ON THE ROPES
MAX. ALLOWED WINDSPEED 24m/s = 86km/h
RADIUS LOAD CURVE 75% NL MOTOR GRAB

[m] [t] [t]
10 84,0 52,0
11 84,0 52,0
12 84,0 52,0
13 84,0 52,0
14 84,0 52,0
15 84,0 52,0
16 81,8 52,0
17 76,5 52,0
18 72,8 51,7
19 68,3 48,5
20 65,1 46,3
21 62,2 44,2
22 58,6 41,7
23 55,0 39,1
24 51,4 36,5
25 48,5 34,5
26 45,6 32,4
27 43,2 30,7
28 40,7 29,0
29 38,7 27,5
30 36,6 26,0
31 34,9 24,8
32 33,1 23,5
33 31,6 22,5
34 30,1 21,4
35 28,8 20,5
36 27,4 19,5
37 26,3 18,7
38 25,1 17,9
39 23,9 17,0
40 22,6 16,1
ITEM CODE: 11227514

REVISION: 00
HARBOUR MOBILE CRANE
LHM 280
TRAVELLING IN UPRIGHT POSITION
MAX. ALLOWED WINDSPEED 20m/s = 72km/h
MIN. RADIUS MAX. RADIUS

[t] (m) (m)
20 10,0 13,0
19 10,0 13,7
18 10,0 14,5
17 10,0 15,2
16 10,0 15,9
15 10,0 16,8
14 10,0 17,7
13 10,0 18,6
12 10,0 19,7
11 10,0 20,8
10 10,0 22,0
9 10,0 23,4
8 10,0 24,9
7 10,0 26,6
6 10,0 28,4
5 10,0 30,5
4 10,0 32,8
3 10,0 35,5
2 10,0 38,7
1 10,0 40,0
0 10,0 40,0
SLEW ANGLE 0° JIB OVER FRONT PART OF UNDERCARRIAGE
MIN. RADIUS MAX. RADIUS

[t] (m) (m)
20 11,0 13,0
19 12,2 14,9
18 12,4 16,0
17 12,6 17,1
16 12,7 18,3
15 12,9 19,6
14 13,2 21,0
13 13,4 22,7
12 13,7 24,4
11 13,9 26,5
10 14,2 28,7
9 14,6 31,4
8 14,9 34,8
7 15,3 40,0
6 15,7 40,0
5 16,1 40,0
4 16,7 40,0
3 17,2 40,0
2 17,8 40,0
1 18,5 40,0
0 18,5 40,0
SLEW ANGLE 180° JIB OVER REAR PART OF UNDERCARRIAGE
LOAD CHART FOR TRAVELLING EQUIPMENT LIKE SPREADER, GRAB

ETC.(WITHOUT ANY CARGO)
ITEM CODE: 11227514

REVISION: 00
User Guide
This operation manual has been written for the machine operator. It contains
all the information necessary to operate, control and carry out simple mainte
nance on the machine.
The operation manual must be read with care and obeyed by everyone who:
` works with the machine.
` is instructed to carry out work on the machine.
Work with or on the machine includes:

` Commissioning, operation, including the changing of slinging tackle
` Maintenance, servicing, inspection and repair, dealing with supplies and
auxiliary materials
The operation manual and the relevant load chart belong with the ma
chine and must therefore be ready to hand in every operators cabin.
Compliance with the operation manual by maintenance personnel:

` increases reliability while in use.
` increases the service life of the machine.
` reduces repair costs and downtime.
Contact Liebherr after sales service for all other questions (also if you sell
the machine or purchase it from a previous owner).
Latest version of the documentation
To ensure the documentation is always complete and up to date:

` Do not remove individual documents.
` Replace any missing or unreadable pages by reprinting them from the
CD-ROM or request them from Liebherr after sales service.
` Insert immediately new documents supplied as a result of modifications.
` Replace amended documents and destroy the old version (particularly in
the case of load charts).
` Always replace the CD-ROM by a new version, e.g. from revision docu
ments.
` Update all languages to the latest version in the case of multilingual do
cumentation.
Storage of documentation
` Always keep the operation manual ready to hand in every cabin.
` The spare parts catalogue and technical information must be available to
maintenance and service personnel if required.
LHM 120-280_002 1
141128
Structure and content of the documentation:
The operation manual contains:

` “Product description
` “Safety
` "Operating elements"
` “Operation
` “Maintenance
The technical information contains:

` General diagrams
` Hydraulic diagrams
` Electrical diagrams
The documentation accompanying the product contains documentation re

garding any:
` Attachments, e.g. cable drums, air conditioning systems, etc.
` Rigging material, e.g. rotators, spreaders, grabs, etc.
The spare parts catalogue provides information about:

` All the spare parts used in the machine
` Spare part procurement
The CD-ROM contains all the machine documentation in digital form.
NOTE
All images in this operation manual are symbolic and may differ from the
delivery state.
System requirements for use of the CD
Hardware (minimum)
` Intel® Pentium II® PC 500MHz, 128 MB RAM, CD-ROM drive,
minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, high-colour depth
Software
` Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Internet Explorer 5.5, Adobe
Acrobat Reader 7.0
NOTE
Ensure that popup blockers are not activated when using Liebherr Parts.
This functionality is included in certain web browsers and in firewalls.
Permit Active Scripting if requested.
2 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Symbols, danger symbols and signal words:
An optional retrofit kit (NRS - NachRüstSatz (retrofit kit)) is indicated by an *.
* Each description marked with an * does not have to correspond to the delivery
state of the machine. The optional retrofit kit actually fitted to the machine is
shown in the machine licence (see Product description).
` List entry
S List sub-entry
u active handling instruction
w Consequence of the handling instruction
DANGER
High-risk situation that will result in death or serious injury.
Refers to action to be taken to reduce or prevent the danger.
WARNING
Medium-risk situation that can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Low-risk situation that could result in minor or slight injuries or material
damage.
CAUTION
Low-risk situation resulting in material damage.
NOTE
Useful note.
Indicates a note in the crane operation manual.
Disposal
Avoid the risk of environmental damage!
Dispose of all hazardous materials, such as: waste oil, cooling liquid,
contaminated filter elements, etc., in accordance with national or regional
regulations.
FIRST AID
LHM 120-280_002 3
141128
Warranty claims arising from improper operation, inadequate maintenance,
use of non-approved supplies or non-compliance with safety regulations will not
be admitted.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the machine as against
the descriptions and illustrations in this document.
This documentation is protected by copyright. The information and images in

this manual are not to be duplicated, reproduced, translated, converted for the
purposes of storing and processing in DP systems or used for competitive pur
poses either in whole or in part. The copying and duplication of load charts in
connection with work planning and the use of this machine is expressly per
mitted. All legal rights embodied in copyright law are expressly reserved.
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing Gmbh

P.O. Box 10
Dr. Hans Liebherr Strasse 1
6710 Nenzing
AUSTRIA / EUROPE
Telephone: +43 50809 41-0

Fax: +43 50809 41-500
e-mail: [email protected]
website: www.liebherr.com
4 LHM 120-280_002
141128
1. Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2 operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3 Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3.1 Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3.2 State-of-the-art technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3.3 Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4 Appropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.5 Inappropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.6 Technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.6.1 Overall machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.6.2 Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.6.3 Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.6.4 Slewing platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6.5 Slewing platform - machinery house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.6.6 Slewing platform - machinery house electric motor / diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.6.7 Slewing platform - winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.6.8 Tower cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.7.1 Supporting base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.7.2 Eye level tower cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.7.3 Outreach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7.4 Lifting height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.7.5 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.7.6 Hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.7.7 Diesel engine (450KW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.7.8 Diesel engine (670 KW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.7.9 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.7.10 Noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.7.11 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.7.12 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.7.13 Wheel sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.7.14 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.8 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

1.8.1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.2 Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.3 Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LHM 120-280_002 5
141128
1.8.4 Litronic control system, monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.5 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.6 Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.7 Fire detection and extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8.8 Escape package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8.9 Acoustic signal transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8.10 Operation manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8.11 Video monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.8.12 Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.8.13 Battery main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.8.14 Location of the emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.9 Litronic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.10 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.1 Areas of responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.2 Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.3 Machine operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.4 Rigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.5 Banksman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.6 Maintenance personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2 Requirements to personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.2.1 Machine operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.2.2 Rigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.2.3 Banksman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.2.4 Maintenance personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.3 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5 Danger zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.6 Safety signs on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.7 Safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.7.1 Meaning of the safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.8 Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.8.1 Mechanical action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6 LHM 120-280_002
141128
2.8.2 Hydraulic energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.8.3 Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.8.4 Chemical burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.8.5 Snow and ice loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.8.6 Lightning strike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.8.7 Danger of fire and explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.8.8 Poisoning and suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.8.9 Environmental hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.8.10 Electromagnetic influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.8.11 Exposure to wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.9 Danger from electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.9.1 Overhead power lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.9.2 Underground lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.9.3 Resistance area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.10 How to respond in the event of a current transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.10.1 Leaving the machine after an accident with a low voltage line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.10.2 Leaving the machine after an accident with a high voltage line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.11 How to respond in the event of a fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

2.11.1 Firefighting using a fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.11.2 Firefighting using the fire detection and extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.11.3 Leaving the machine in the event of a fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.12 Hand signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

2.12.1 General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.12.2 Special hand signals for lifting device
operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.12.3 Hand signals for lifting device operations in accordance with ASME/ANSI B30.5 . . . 101
3. Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

3.1 Control station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.2 Left master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

3.2.1 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.2.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.3 Right master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

3.3.1 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.3.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.4 Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

3.4.1 Control panel X25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.4.2 Control panel X26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
LHM 120-280_002 7
141128
3.4.3 Litronic service desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.4.4 Fire detection and extinguishing system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.5 Switch cabinet X1, X32 (switch cabinet room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.5 Litronic monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

3.5.1 Monitor overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.5.2 Start symbol (from monitor 5 onwards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.5.3 Status indicator - operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.5.4 Status indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.5.5 Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.5.6 Crane operation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.5.7 Crane operation screen (functional enhancement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.5.8 Electric motor crane operation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.5.9 Crane operation screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.5.10 Travel operation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.5.11 Travel operation screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3.5.12 Wheel set screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.5.13 Automatic support screen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3.5.14 Information screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3.5.15 Information screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.5.16 Error screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.5.17 Error page symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.5.18 Service hour meter screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.5.19 Service hour meter screen symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.5.20 Winch synchronisation screen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3.5.21 Winch synchronisation screen symbols* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.5.22 Data recorder screen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.5.23 Data recorder screen symbols* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.5.24 Cycoptronic teach-in screen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.5.25 Cycoptronic/teach-in - automatic screen - symbols* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.5.26 Hook position screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.5.27 Sycratronic screen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.5.28 Sycratronic screen symbols* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.5.29 Litronic service panel (show) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.1 Inspections before daily commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.1.1 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.1.2 Daily inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.2 Commissioning the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

4.2.1 Start with diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.2.2 Electric motor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.2.3 Starting with electric motor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8 LHM 120-280_002
141128
4.2.4 Shutting down the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.4 Travelling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

4.4.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.4.2 Normal travel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4.4.3 Crab mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.4.4 Steering synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.4.5 Steering examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.5 Supporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

4.5.1 Supporting the machine manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.5.2 Supporting the machine automatically * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.5.3 Support cylinder pressure information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.5.4 Choose additional supporting base* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.5.5 Support pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.6 Crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

4.6.1 Crane movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.6.2 Stop crane movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.7 Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.8 Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.9 Boom cable drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

4.9.1 Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.9.2 Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.10 Cable retainer*, cable duct* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

4.10.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.11 Auxiliary supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4.12 Correcting rope twist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.13 Rope length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.14 Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

4.14.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.15 Rotator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

4.15.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.15.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
LHM 120-280_002 9
141128
4.16 Spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.16.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.16.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.17 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

4.17.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.18 Man riding* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

4.18.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.18.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4.18.3 Load curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4.19 Synchronise winches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

4.19.1 Automatic synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.19.2 Manual synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4.19.3 Set reference point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.20 Four-rope grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

4.20.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.20.2 Set four-rope grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.20.3 Reduction of crane movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.20.4 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.20.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.20.6 Pump switch-over - four-rope grab* working speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4.20.7 Wheel loader - bobcat loading operation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.21 Log grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

4.21.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
4.21.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.22 Motor grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

4.22.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.22.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.23 Coil tong* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

4.23.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.23.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.24 Pipe grab* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

4.24.1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.24.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.25 Magnet* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

4.25.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.25.2 Battery test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
10 LHM 120-280_002
141128
4.25.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.26 Laying down the boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.27 Vertical Line Finder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

4.27.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.27.2 Symbol description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4.27.3 Examples of diagonal pull display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.28 Sycratronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

4.28.1 Vertical line finder (diagonal pull display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4.28.2 CAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
4.28.3 CAN connection interrupted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
4.28.4 Set teach-in points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
4.28.5 Automatic deletion of teach-in points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
4.28.6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
4.28.7 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
4.28.8 Crane movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
4.28.9 Rotate crossbar (about traverse centre point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
4.28.10 Rotate crossbar (about leader crane hook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.28.11 Correction mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
4.28.12 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.28.13 Deselect Sycratronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
4.29 Cycoptronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

4.29.1 Conditions for Cycoptronic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4.29.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.29.3 Advanced Container Control*
.......................................................................... 356
4.30 Cycoptronic teach-in* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

4.30.1 Conditions for Cycoptronic teach-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.30.2 Set destination points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.30.3 Setting the destination points using master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.30.4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.30.5 Changing sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
4.31 Anti-collision system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

4.31.1 Teach-in points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.31.2 Side wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4.31.3 Slewing gear limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.31.4 Luffing gear limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.31.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.32 Land- Sea side* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
LHM 120-280_002 11
141128
4.33 Fire alarm and fire extinguishing system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.33.1 Warning sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
4.33.2 Extinguishing sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4.33.3 Operating and control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4.33.4 Warning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.33.5 Monitoring cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.33.6 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.33.7 Extinguishing generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.33.8 Hydraulic oil supply shut-off flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.34 Video monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

4.34.1 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
4.34.2 Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.34.3 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.34.4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
4.35 PIN Code* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

4.35.1 Input PIN code / Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.35.2 Change to PIN code home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.35.3 Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.36 Data recorder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

4.36.1 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.36.2 Trigger points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
4.36.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
4.36.4 Selecting hatch cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.36.5 Memory card (flash card)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.36.6 Printer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.37 Litronic testing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

4.37.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.37.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
4.37.3 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.37.4 Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.37.5 INPUT/OUTPUT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.37.6 MEMORY page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.37.7 SELECT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
4.37.8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
4.38 Operator`s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

4.38.1 Adjusting the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.39 Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
12 LHM 120-280_002
141128
4.40 Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
4.40.1 Telephone sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
4.40.2 Handset operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.40.3 Headset and control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
4.40.4 Change batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
4.41 Setting the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
4.42 PA amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

4.42.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
4.42.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4.43 Undercarriage bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.44 Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

4.44.1 Emergency exit from the tower cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
4.45 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

4.45.1 Parked position at wind speeds less than 50 m/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.45.2 Short work interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.45.3 Long work interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
4.46 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
4.47 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

4.47.1 Lower load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
4.47.2 turning the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.47.3 Charge accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.47.4 After emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
5. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
5.1 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
5.2 Lubrication and oiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
5.3 Filling capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
5.4 Lubrication chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

5.4.1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
5.5 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

5.5.1 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
5.5.2 Topping up the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
5.5.3 Draining the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
LHM 120-280_002 13
141128
5.5.4 Changing the oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
5.5.5 Changing the oil separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
5.6 Diesel engine fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

5.6.1 Fuel specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
5.6.2 Sulfur content in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
5.6.3 Fuel at low temperatures (winter operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
5.6.4 Biodiesel FAME (vegetable oil methyl ester PME / RME)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
5.7 Fuel system Liebherr D9508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

5.7.1 Draining condensate in the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
5.7.2 Fuel hand pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
5.8 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

5.8.1 Diesel engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
5.8.2 Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
5.8.3 Draining coolant MAN D2842 LE103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
5.8.4 Checking the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
5.8.5 Top up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
5.8.6 Changing the cap of the compensation tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
5.8.7 Cleaning the water and charge air cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
5.9 Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

5.9.1 Checking air filter and intake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
5.9.2 Emptying the dust extraction valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
5.9.3 Emptying the dust reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
5.9.4 Changing the filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
5.10 Air filter Liebherr D9508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

5.10.1 Checking air filter and intake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
5.10.2 Emptying the dust extraction valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
5.10.3 Emptying the dust reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
5.10.4 Changing the filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
5.11 Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
5.12 Distributor gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

5.12.1 Check oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
5.12.2 Topping up the gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
5.12.3 Draining gearbox oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
5.13 Slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

5.13.1 Check the slewing gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
5.13.2 Topping up slewing gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
5.13.3 Draining the slewing gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
14 LHM 120-280_002
141128
5.13.4 Grease the toothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
5.13.5 Lubricate the stud bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
5.13.6 Checking bearing lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
5.14 Hoisting gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

5.14.1 Checking hoisting gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
5.14.2 Topping up hoisting gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
5.14.3 Draining the hoisting gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
5.15 Travelling gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

5.15.1 Checking the wheel set gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
5.15.2 Topping up the wheel set gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
5.15.3 Draining the wheel set gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
5.15.4 Checking the wheel set suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
5.15.5 Adjusting the wheel set suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
5.15.6 Manual greasing of wheel set drive units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
5.15.7 Lubricating wheel set axles and links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
5.15.8 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
5.15.9 Tyres, tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
5.15.10 Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
5.16 Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

5.16.1 Initial filling of hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
5.16.2 Mixing hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
5.16.3 Checking the hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
5.16.4 Topping up with hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
5.16.5 Draining the hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
5.16.6 Hydraulic oil return filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
5.16.7 Hydraulic oil pressure filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
5.16.8 Testing the pressure accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
5.16.9 Change pressure accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
5.16.10 Hydraulic cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
5.16.11 Hydraulic hoses and hose lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
5.16.12 Oil diagnosis system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
5.17 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

5.17.1 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
5.17.2 Switch cabinets and termination boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
5.17.3 Replacing the generator air filter mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
5.17.4 Replace fuses and lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
5.17.5 Check the emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
5.17.6 Checking the hoisting limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.17.7 Check the undercarriage flap (centre ladder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.17.8 Cleaning the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.17.9 Replacing the cable of the boom cable drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
LHM 120-280_002 15
141128
5.17.10 Cleaning the undercarriage slip ring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
5.18 Fire detection and extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

5.18.1 Testing the hydraulic oil supply stop valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
5.19 Emergency devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

5.19.1 Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
5.19.2 Abseil rescue equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
5.19.3 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
5.20 Steel structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
5.21 Central lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

5.21.1 Topping up grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
5.22 Ropes and pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

5.22.1 Checking ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
5.22.2 Rope discard criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
5.22.3 Checking the rope diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
5.22.4 Rope deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
5.22.5 Checking for corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
5.22.6 Checking for rope abrasion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
5.22.7 Checking for heat damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
5.22.8 Checking the number of permitted wire breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
5.22.9 Storing ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.22.10 Transporting ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.22.11 Winding ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
5.22.12 Checking the rope drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
5.22.13 Wear of steel pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
5.22.14 Wear of plastic pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
5.22.15 Checking pulleys for damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
5.22.16 Lubricating pulley bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.22.17 Cleaning plastic pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.22.18 Luffing ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
5.22.19 Lubricate ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
5.23 Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

5.23.1 Check the oil level of the boom cable drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
5.23.2 Topping up boom cable drum oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
5.23.3 Draining the boom cable drum oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
5.24 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
5.25 Slewing platform filter mats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

5.25.1 Replacing slewing platform filter mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
16 LHM 120-280_002
141128
5.26 Checking the Nemag shackle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
5.27 Ventilation, heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
5.28 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

5.28.1 Climatic zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
5.28.2 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
5.28.3 Recommended conservative agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
5.28.4 Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
5.28.5 Recommended coating materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
LHM 120-280_002 17
141128
18 LHM 120-280_002
141128
1
141128
1
141128
Product description
1. Product description
This operation manual describes the design, control elements, functions and
maintenance for LHM (Liebherr Hafen Mobil) cranes of the following sizes:
` LHM 120
` LHM 180
` LHM 280
1.1 General
This chapter provides information on
` The capabilities of the machine
` The equipment and additional equipment of the machine
` Assembly of the main components
` Main technical data
` Importance and arrangement of safety devices on the machine
1.2 operations
NOTE
Essentially, the machine may only be used for the operations listed and
described in this operation manual.
Prerequisites for the safe operation of the machine:

` Resting on solid ground
` Operation within the permitted load curve
` Adherence to the directions and instructions in the operation manual
Applications of the machine:

` Loading and unloading of ships using load lifting devices approved by the
machine manufacturer (e.g.: spreader operation for container handling)
` Cargo - grab operation
` Heavy lift operation
LHM 120-280_002 19
141128
Product description
1.3 Conformity
1.3.1 Declaration of conformity
NOTE
In the case of machines with the CE marking, the EU declaration of
conformity as stipulated by the Directive (2006/42/EU) immediately
follows the cover sheet. The EU declaration of conformity is applicable in
its attached form and language in every country of the European Union,
and also in countries that recognize the Directive 2006/42/EU. Additional
documents required for prototype testing or national approval testing may
also be enclosed.
1.3.2 State-of-the-art technology
The machine as delivered complies with the complex of rules defining the state
of the art cited in the EU declaration of conformity. The operating instructions
and all safety and warning notices in this operation manual must be rigorously
observed and implemented, otherwise the machine may pose a risk.
1.3.3 Type plate

The type plate is mounted at the entrance to the slewing platform on the inside
to the left. The details on the type plate are useful when ordering spare parts.
Figure 1 Type plate LHM 120-280
20 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.4 Appropriate use
DANGER
Inappropriate use can lead to life-threatening injuries, severe material
damage and invalidation of the guarantee.
Only use the machine to carry out the operations listed and described in
this operating manual.
NOTE
The capabilities of the machine depend on the supplied equipment, which
is documented in the machine licence.
Any other use that is not described shall be regarded as inappropriate
use.
Appropriate use of the machine relies:

` on observance of the relevant instructions for the operation modes de
scribed in the operation manual.
` on adherence to the applicable national and international safety regu
lations.
` on observance of all safety regulations in this operation manual.
` on all the necessary safety devices being present and in good working
order.
` on the operating conditions defined in this operation manual being adhe
red to.
` on all maintenance and inspection work being carried out using the speci
fied fuels and lubricants.
LHM 120-280_002 21
141128
Product description
1.5 Inappropriate use
DANGER
Inappropriate use can lead to life-threatening injuries, severe material
damage and invalidation of the guarantee.
Only use the machine to carry out the operations listed and described in
this operating manual.
NOTE
The capabilities of the machine depend on the supplied equipment, which
is documented in the machine licence.
Any other use that is not described shall be regarded as inappropriate
use.
Use of the machine is regarded as inappropriate where:

` the machine is started up without an acceptance test, if one is stipulated
by national legislation.
` the machine is started up by persons who are not authorised by the ope
rating company.
` the machine is started up without the requisite training and knowledge of
the operation manual.
` the machine is started up without the prescribed safety devices.
` the machine is started up without a valid load chart and travelling window.
` the machine is started up when the operation manual is incomplete or
unreadable.
` structural modifications have been carried out which affect operational
safety or have been carried out without the written consent of the manu
facturer.
` work is carried out in any way which endangers operational safety.
` persons are transported without using a specially authorised operation
mode.
` fastened loads are pulled loose using slack rope or by operating the sle
wing gear or luffing gear.
` a load is dragged on the ground.
` spare parts or consumables are fitted or used which are not original Lieb
herr products or approved by the manufacturer.
` the machine is subjected to overload, particularly beyond the tilting limit.
` the machine is started and operated in locations subject to explosion ha
zards (including locations where the atmosphere is only rarely or briefly
subject to explosion hazards).
` the machine is used in assembly mode (e.g. when laying down the
boom).
` attached loads are moved outside the travelling window.
` the load curve or the factory-fitted safety device are bypassed or modi
fied.
` work is carried out or loads are moved with a modified counterweight.
22 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
` the machine is driven on soft, yielding ground, or on ground that is unable

to support the prevailing axle loads.
` the machine is driven on rough, uneven ground (terrain).
` the machine is used as a towing vehicle.
` the machine is manoeuvred without a banksman.
` the prescribed maintenance and inspection operations are not adhered
to.
LHM 120-280_002 23
141128
Product description
1.6 Technical description
1.6.1 Overall machine
Figure 2 Main components
1 Tower cabin
2 Luffing cylinder
3 Undercarriage
4 Slewing platform
5 Tower
6 Boom
24 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.6.2 Undercarriage
Figure 3 Undercarriage
1 Support pad
2 Outrigger
3 Access
4 Fuel filler neck
5 Manhole
6 Wheel set
7 Additional wheel set*
8 Hydraulic/electrical rotary connection
9 Rear steps*
10 Switch cabinet X5
LHM 120-280_002 25
141128
Product description
1.6.3 Boom
Figure 4 Boom
1 Boom inspection platform

2 Boom walkway
3 Rope rest device
4 Boom cable drum*
5 Boom support
6 Boom pulleys
26 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.6.4 Slewing platform
Figure 5 Overview of slewing platform
1 Access
2 Switch cabinet room ventilation filter
3 Hydraulic oil cooler
4 Counterweight
5 Exhaust system
6 Sleewing platform air inlet
7 Water air cooler
8 Cooling water expansion tank
9 Slewing platform entrance
LHM 120-280_002 27
141128
Product description
1.6.5 Slewing platform - machinery house
Figure 6 Slewing platform - machinery house
1 Battery compartment
2 Diesel engine
3 Return hydraulic system
4 Hydraulic system suction
5 Air filter
6 Hydraulic tank
28 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.6.6 Slewing platform - machinery house electric motor /

diesel engine
Figure 7 Slewing platform - machinery house electric motor / diesel engine
1 Battery
2 Diesel engine
3 Return hydraulic system
4 Hydraulic system suction
5 Air filter
6 Hydraulic tank
7 Electric motor
LHM 120-280_002 29
141128
Product description
1.6.7 Slewing platform - winches
Figure 8 Slewing platform winches
1 Pressure accumulator
2 Holding winch
3 Closing winch*
4 Drive unit
30 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.6.8 Tower cabin
Figure 9 Tower cabin

1 Control panel X25 / X26
2 Operator's seat
3 Folding seat
4 Safety lever
5 Windscreen wiper
6 Windscreen wiper
7 Video monitoring screen
8 Litronic monitor
9 Right master switch
10 Left master switch
11 Wiper cleaning agent filler neck
12 Fire detection and extinguishing control unit
13 Video monitoring control unit
14 Spirit level
15 Abseil rescue equipment
16 First aid cabinet
17 Fire protection hood
18 Emergency descent eyelet
19 Air conditioning*
LHM 120-280_002 31
141128
Product description
1.7 Technical data
Refer to the Technical Specification for all detailed customer-specific adapta

tions.
1.7.1 Supporting base
Figure 10 Supporting base
LHM 120 180 280

Supporting base A X B 9m x 9m 10m x 10m 11m x 11m
Additional supporting base* Dimensions are given in the Technical Data.
1.7.2 Eye level tower cabin
Figure 11 Eye level tower cabin
LHM 120 180 280

Eye level tower cabin C 15.2m 17.6m 20.8m
32 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.7.3 Outreach
Figure 12 Maximum / minimum outreach
LHM 120 180 280

Maximum outreach D 30m 35m 40m
Minimum outreach E 8m 9m 10m
LHM 120-280_002 33
141128
Product description
1.7.4 Lifting height
Figure 13 Lifting heights
LHM 120 180 280

Max. lifting height at max. outreach F 14.7m 19m 33m
Lifting height under quay G 13m 11.5 - 13m** 11.5 - 13m**
Max. lifting height at min. outreach H 34m 37 - 48m** 37 - 48m**
** depending on the winch configuration
34 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.7.5 Fuel tank
LHM 120 180 280

Max. diesel tank capacity undercarriage 5,600l 5,600l 6,000l
1.7.6 Hydraulic tank
LHM 120 180 280

Max. hydraulic oil tank capacity 1,150l 1,150l 1,150l
1.7.7 Diesel engine (450KW)
Engine type Liebherr D9508 A7

Number of cylinders 8
Cubic capacity 16160 cm3³
Power 450 kW
1.7.8 Diesel engine (670 KW)
Engine type MAN D2842 LE103

Number of cylinders 12
Cubic capacity 21930ccm³
Power 670kW
NOTE
All other information can be found in the supplied engine manual.
1.7.9 Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature -20 / +45°C

Ambient temperature Russia -25 / +45°C
Low temperature package* -30 / +45°C
Relative humidity 97%
Max. lateral inclination in travelling mode without load 2%
Max. incline in travelling mode without load 5%
Max. wind speed when machine not in use 42m/s
Max. wind speed in use See load chart
Max. wind speed in travelling mode See load chart
LHM 120-280_002 35
141128
Product description
1.7.10 Noise emissions
LHM 120 180 280

Guaranteed sound power level LWA 109 db(A) 108 db(A) 111 db(A)
Guaranteed sound pressure level in cabin LPA 65.3 db(A) 65.9db(A) 67.5 db(A)
1.7.11 Vibrations
Vibrations affecting the operator's upper limbs <2.5m/s²

Vibrations affecting the operator's entire body <0.5m/s²
1.7.12 Electrical system
Generator with 4-rope grab and spreader with motor grab, load magnet device, etc.
Voltage 230 / 400V 230 / 400V
Nominal output 65KVA** 200KVA**
Frequency 50 / 60Hz 50 / 60Hz
Phases 3 + N + PE 3 + N + PE
Batteries
Voltage 24V
Battery voltage 12V
Battery capacity 170Ah
Auxiliary supply Supply Crane-internal

Voltage 208 / 415 / 480 +/-20V 230 / 400V
Nominal output 25KVA / 37KVA** 25KVA / 37KVA**
Frequency 50 / 60Hz 50 / 60Hz
Phases 3 + PE 3 + N + PE
Main power supply* LHM 120 - 280

Voltage 400 / 440V
Frequency 50 / 60Hz
Phases 3 + PE
** Customer-specific adaptation
36 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.7.13 Wheel sets
Figure 14 Driven and non-driven wheel set
1 Tyre
2 Rim
3 Hydraulic motor
1.7.14 Tyres
Manufacturer Continental
Type 285/70 R19.5
Air pressure 10bar
Number per wheel set 4
Weight each including rim 80kg
Weight each including rim (foamed*) 165kg
NOTE
Foamed tyres* are identified with a yellow sign.
LHM 120-280_002 37
141128
Product description
1.8 Safety equipment
In both standard and optional configurations, the safety devices include:

` Lighting
` Emergency lighting
` Emergency stop
` Limit switches
` Litronic control system, monitor
` Safety lever
` Fire extinguishers
` Fire detection and extinguishing system
` Escape package
` Acoustic signal transmitters
` Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms
` Operation manual
` Video monitoring
` Battery main switch
` Abseil rescue equipment
` First aid cabinet
1.8.1 Lighting
The machine lighting includes:

` Interior lighting
` Exterior lighting
S Work floodlights
S Position lights
S Floodlights
S Heli-lights*
S Signal lights
` Vehicle lighting*
1.8.2 Emergency lighting
NOTE
The emergency lighting remains active for 10 minutes after the machine is
turned off.
38 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.8.3 Limit switches
To avoid exceeding the permitted outreach or lifting height/depth, limit switches

stop movement.
u Raise the hoisting gear until movement is stopped automatically.

w Hoisting gear turns off.
w The hoisting gear can no longer be raised.
w The hoisting gear can only be lowered.
u Raise/lower the luffing gear until movement is stopped automatically.

w Luffing gear turns off.
w The luffing gear can no longer be raised/lowered.
w Move the luffing gear in the opposite direction.
1.8.4 Litronic control system, monitor
The Litronic control system is, or can be, equipped with the following safety-en
hancing operation modes which are displayed on the monitor where appro
priate.
` Electronic load moment limiter
` Wind speed
` Diagonal pull indicator*
` Anti-collision system*
` DACS (Dynamic Anti Collision System)*
` Cycoptronic*
` Inclination display (automatic support)*
See also chapter: Operation (operation modes) and the chapter: Controls,
Monitor for more information.
1.8.5 Safety lever
See chapter: Operation, Safety lever
1.8.6 Fire extinguishers
Three fire extinguishers are provided in the machine as standard.

(See chapter: Safety, Procedure in the event of fire, Firefighting with the fire
extinguisher)
` Slewing platform front
` Slewing platform middle section
` Tower cabin
NOTE
Fire extinguishers are subject to national regulations and must be
replaced by the operating company periodically or when necessary.
LHM 120-280_002 39
141128
Product description
1.8.7 Fire detection and extinguishing system
See chapter: Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing system
1.8.8 Escape package
The escape package is usually located in the tower cabin. Regarding the posi
tion of the escape package, refer to the chapter: Product description, Technical
description, Tower cabin .
NOTE
Information on use of the fire escape hood can be found in the additional
documentation supplied.
1.8.9 Acoustic signal transmitters
The acoustic signalling devices include:

` Hooter on the undercarriage to signal travelling mode
` Standard hooter on the tower (activated via master switch)
` Fire alarm siren on the tower
` PA loudspeaker on the tower
1.8.10 Operation manual
This operation manual contains important information about safety and what to
do in dangerous situations (see User Guide and chapter: Safety).
NOTE
A complete copy of the operation manual must always be kept ready to
hand in every cabin of the machine.
1.8.11 Video monitoring
The following cameras are attached for monitoring:

` Boom head camera
` Slewing platform camera*
` Switch cabinet room camera*
` Reversing camera*
40 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.8.12 Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms
In the interest of safety, hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms are mounted on
the undercarriage, the tower and slewing platform.
Figure 15 Hand rails and anti-fold mechanisms
LHM 120-280_002 41
141128
Product description
1.8.13 Battery main switch

In every LHM machine there is a battery main switch.
Figure 16 Battery main switch LHM120-280
Figure 17 Battery main switch with electric motor LHM 120-280
42 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.8.14 Location of the emergency stop button

Emergency stop
Figure 18 Emergency stop slewing platform
Figure 19 Emergency stop switch cabinet room
LHM 120-280_002 43
141128
Product description
Figure 20 Emergency stop slewing platform down
Figure 21 Emergency stop undercarriage
44 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Product description
1.9 Litronic control
The Litronic control system in the machine permits electrohydraulic proportional

control, which in turn means that several main movements can be carried out.
This control system has been designed to provide effective and economical
operation.
The central unit of the Litronic control system is located in the switch cabinet
room of the machine and is connected via the CAN bus to the engine control
unit, and all the sensors, transmitters and limit switches.
Litronic control system I/O devices in the cab:

` monitor
S is in the form of a touch screen and enables a function to be selected
by touching the symbols with the finger.
S shows the current mode screens, machine setups, load charts and
error protocols.
` Control lever for operating hoisting gear, slewing gear and luffing gear.
` Control panel and the Litronic service panel.
` Safety lever
` Process data recording (PDE) combined with an external PCMCIA drive
and a printer.
` Machine Data Acquisition (MDE)
The central unit of the Litronic control system includes two drives for PCMCIA
storage media and interfaces. The switch cabinet contains the modem used for
data transmission.
Litronic control system I/O devices outside of the cab:

` Load pins, sensors, limit switches and transmitters that are situated at
various locations on the machine
` Acoustic warning signal
` Load moment limiter
` Various warning lights
The Litronic control system receives the latest data from the load pins, sensors,
sensors, limit switches and encoders, compares them, performs some calcu
lations and outputs the results.
Some machine data are collected by the system. Liebherr uses the stored data
to improve operation and reliability.
LHM 120-280_002 45
141128
Product description
1.10 Modem
A modem is connected to the Litronic control system.
The switch cabinet contains the modem. This enables the latest operating data
and machine data to be transmitted to Liebherr after sales service.
Subject to certain conditions, Liebherr after sales service can use a diagnostic
system to determine the reasons behind faults, to prepare accordingly for en
gineers to attend and to organize the supply of spare parts quickly and effi
ciently.
46 LHM 120-280_002
141128
2
141128
2
141128
Safety
2. Safety
Your safety as machine operator or maintenance personnel is of utmost priority.
Many situations, problems or malfunctions occurring on the machine can pose a
serious safety risk.
u Familiarise yourself with measures to prevent and protect against the

resulting hazards.
This chapter provides information on

` Meaning and location of symbols and icons used on the machine and in
this operation manual
` Requisite protective equipment for operating and maintenance personnel
` Demands placed upon the operating and maintenance personnel
` Dangers and risks posed to operating and maintenance personnel
NOTE
Special handling and situation-specific notes on safety are specified
where relevant in the following chapters of this operation manual and in
further sections of the documentation.
LHM 120-280_002 47
141128
Safety
2.1 Areas of responsibility
2.1.1 Manufacturer
The manufacturer:
` is responsible for the technically safe condition of the machine supplied,
together with accessories and documentation.
` is aware of its duty to monitor the product and document all maintenance
and repair work carried out by Liebherr personnel.
` ensures that the machine is kept in an operational state by a worldwide
maintenance and repair service.
` runs a training centre and provides training for the owner's operating and
maintenance personnel as a service.
2.1.2 Owner
The owner
` ensures that the machine is operated and maintained by qualified per
sonnel only.
` checks that all individuals who come into contact with the machine are
fully qualified, and authorises them to work.
` specifies the skills and responsibilities of all those working with or near
the machine.
` provides all necessary protective equipment to individuals working with or
near the machine.
` regularly checks that personnel carry out their work in a safety-conscious
manner.
` is responsible for ensuring the safe condition of the machine.
` ensures no flammable fluids are stored except in tanks provided for this
purpose.
` ensures that contaminants or deposits are removed from flammable
fluids.
` completely removes the machine from use upon the discovery of any
faults that may affect safety.
` performs inspections on the machine based on national regulations in
addition to the inspections stipulated by Liebherr.
` informs the manufacturer of any accident involving the machine leading
to serious injury or major material damage.
` allows Liebherr personnel unlimited access to the machine in order that
they may fulfil their duty to monitor the product.
` carefully and conscientiously carries out work planning for the machine.
` will not carry out any alterations on the machine without first consulting
the manufacturer.
` use only original Liebherr spare parts.
` train and test machine operators and maintenance personnel with evi
dence thereof at regular interval regarding conduct in dangerous situa
tions (e.g.: fire).
48 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.1.3 Machine operator
The machine operator

` have read and understood the operation manual.
` operates the machine for the purposes intended, within the limit values
specified in the load chart and in accordance with the setup and the ope
ration manual.
` wear protective clothing.
` reports to the owner any alteration to the machine that affects safety.
` halts operation immediately if safe operation is no longer possible.
the manufacturer.
` has been instructed on the safety features and can provide evidence that
he has participated in practical training.
2.1.4 Rigger
The rigger:
` is responsible for the correct selection and fitting/removal of the lifting
device on the load or rigging material.
` gives the approval to move and/or accompany the load.
2.1.5 Banksman
The banksman:
` conveys signals from the rigger to the machine operator.
` gives signals to the machine operator if he is the only person responsible.
2.1.6 Maintenance personnel
Maintenance personnel:
` maintain the machine to ensure that it remains in a safe and reliable con
dition.
` have read and understood the operation manual.
` perform all specified maintenance work.
the manufacturer.
LHM 120-280_002 49
141128
Safety
2.2 Requirements to personnel
2.2.1 Machine operator
The machine operator:

` are of the statutory minimum age.
` is physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions) of
safely operating the machine.
` is authorised to operate the machine.
` is capable of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances.
` is trained: for this type of machine, in rigging and assisting, in using fire
extinguishing devices.
` is aware of the escape routes in the event of an emergency.
` do not suffer from any physical or psychological ailments that lower any
of the specified requirements.
` are not under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
2.2.2 Rigger
The rigger:
` is physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions) of
safely using/moving lifting devices.
` is authorised to rig loads.
` is capable:
S of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances
S of accurately estimating mass and load distribution
S of operating walkie-talkies and using them to give clear instructions
S of guiding the load and ensuring the safe movement of the load and
the machine.
` is trained:
S in attaching lifting devices
S in signalling and knows the signal signs
S in selecting the correct lifting device
S in securing against unexpected detachment
S in preventing damage to lifting devices
50 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.2.3 Banksman
The banksman:
` are physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions).
` is authorised to give signal signs.
` is capable:
S of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances
S of operating walkie-talkies and using them to give clear instructions
S of guiding the load and ensuring the safe movement of the load and
the machine
` is trained in signalling and knows the signal signs.
2.2.4 Maintenance personnel
Maintenance personnel:
` are physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions).
` are familiar with the machine and the hazards.
` are familiar with all maintenance procedures and measures.
` are trained to perform maintenance duties, including on specialist equip
ment.
LHM 120-280_002 51
141128
Safety
2.3 Personal protective equipment
Always wear tight-fitting protective clothing when operating, maintaining or com

missioning the machine, as well as the correct personal protective equipment
for the task in question.
WARNING
Loose clothing, scarf, open jackets or shirts with undone sleeves, jewellery
(e.g. rings, bracelets, chains, earrings, etc.)!
Getting stuck in, caught up in or pulled into moving machine parts.
Loose clothing, scarf, open jackets or shirts with undone sleeves,
jewellery (e.g. rings, bracelets, chains, earrings, etc.)!
The personal protective equipment may comprise:
Safety helmet, if head injuries can be expected due to:

` collision
` swinging, falling, toppling or flying objects
` long, loose hair
Safety goggles, if eye injuries are possible due to:

` corrosive or pressurised fluids
` loose flying parts
Ear protectors, if the sound level is liable to exceed 90 dB(A)
Breathing mask, in the event of health-threatening gases, steam, vapours or

accumulations of dust in the working environment
Protective gloves, if hand injuries are possible due to:

` Burns
` pointed or sharp objects
` corrosive or pressurised fluids
Safety shoes, if foot injuries are possible due to:

` collision or trapping
` stepping on pointed or sharp objects
` falling, toppling or rolling objects
Reflective coating, (reflective or signal coloured), if prompt recognition by

other personnel is important
Special protective clothing, where there is danger of burns, hypothermia,

chemical burns, stabbing or cutting injuries to the body
NOTE
You are responsible for wearing the necessary personal protective
equipment, ensuring it is regularly maintained, and also replacing
damaged and unsuitable pieces of protective equipment!
52 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.4 Work area
In accordance with the EU Machinery Directive, the following guidelines have

been laid down for the operation of the machine:
Required operating personnel: one machine operator
Prescribed work area: slewing platform cabin* or tower cabin
Guiding personnel: one additional person
While the machine is in operation

` no one other than the machine operator may be on the machine.
` the machine operator must remain in the operator's cab at all times when
a load is attached to the ropes.
NOTE
Operate controls exclusively from the operator`s seat.
Operating any controls through the open cab doors is expressly
prohibited!
Prerequisites for a safe working area:

` Keep the operator's cab clean and tidy (empty ashtray regularly, place
drinks exclusively in holders provided, etc.)
` Do not place newspapers or other objects on the control panels.
` Do not keep tools in the operators cab.
` Articles of clothing, items of protective equipment or personnel effects
must not hinder access to the cab or the operation of the machine.
` Do not store flammable fluid except in tanks provided for this purpose.
` Remove contaminants or deposits from flammable fluids.
` Keep the entrance to the operator's cab clean and free from snow and
ice and any other obstructions.
` Keep all screens and rear view mirrors of the machine clean and free of
condensation and ice.
LHM 120-280_002 53
141128
Safety
2.5 Danger zone

The danger zone is the area surrounding the machine, in which people can pos
sibly be injured by:
` working movements of the machine
` a swinging or falling load
` optional equipment on the machine
Figure 22 LHM 120 - 280 danger zone
I Working area at maximum outreach (metres)

II Safety area (metres)
Area LHM 120 LHM 180 LHM 280

I 30 35 40
II 40 45 50
WARNING
Entering the danger zone during crane operation!
Life-threatening safety risk.
Erect warning signs outside the danger zone.
Inform machine operator before entering the danger zone.
Passing below a suspended load is forbidden.
NOTE
Persons must not be present in the danger zone during crane operation.
Persons in the operators cabin are excepted from this.
54 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.6 Safety signs on the machine
WARNING
Noncompliance with the safety signs on the machine!
High safety risk for all persons involved.
Constantly check safety signs to ensure they are complete and legible.
Immediately replace missing or illegible safety signs with new, original
ones.
Observe safety notes and information.
NOTE
Safety signs in the relevant national language must be present, otherwise
they must be ordered from LIEBHERR.
Figure 23 Overview of machine safety signs
LHM 120-280_002 55
141128
Safety
Figure 24 Overview of slewing platform safety signs
Figure 25 Battery and slip ring unit safety signs
56 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.7 Safety signs
Important safety signs are fitted to the machine. If they are not observed, death
or serious injury can result.
WARNING
Missing, damaged or illegible safety signs!
Severe injury and death.
Constantly check safety signs to ensure they are complete and legible.
Immediately replace missing or illegible safety signs with new, original
ones.
When using the machine in a different country, safety signs in the
appropriate language must be requested from the manufacturer.
2.7.1 Meaning of the safety signs
The safety signs are divided into three main groups of different shapes and co
lours:
Fire protection signs:

` are square and have red as the signal colour.
` draw attention to equipment and information needed in case of fire.
Fire extinguishers
Fire detector
LHM 120-280_002 57
141128
Safety
Prohibition signs:
` are circular and have a red signal colour
` are located wherever a potentially dangerous action is prohibited
No fire, naked flames or smoking
No access for unauthorised personnel
Pedestrians forbidden
No persons with pacemakers
Do not switch
58 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Warning signs:
` are triangular and have yellow as the signal colour
` draw attention to equipment and circumstances in order to warn of po
tential injury and/or danger to life.
Danger area
Dangerous electrical voltage
Danger: suspended load
Dangerous drive units
Danger of being drawn in
Danger: hot surface
LHM 120-280_002 59
141128
Safety
Danger: slippery surface
Danger of falling
Danger of stumbling
Danger of crushing
Danger of crushing
Danger of being drawn in (hands)
Danger from batteries
60 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Danger from non-ionising electromagnetic radiation
Danger of rolling over
Danger from ropes
Danger of crushing (feet)
Danger from pressure reservoir
Danger of sepsis
LHM 120-280_002 61
141128
Safety
Mandatory signs:
` are round and have blue as the signal colour
` relate to protective equipment that must be worn to prevent physical in
jury
General mandatory signs
Wear helmet
Wear ear protection
Wear face protection
Wear hand protection
Wear foot protection
Use safety harness
62 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Machine-specific safety signs:

` do not belong to the three main safety sign groups
` vary in shape and colour
` contain particular information for the machine operator and other associa
ted personnel
Pressure indication for the wheel set tyres
Rescue equipment for one person only
Escape route
Maintenance door
Additional sign; keep distance
` This sign is used in combination with another safety hazard.
Additional sign; see operation manual
` This sign is used in combination with another safety hazard.
Example:
` Keep distance from hot surfaces
LHM 120-280_002 63
141128
Safety
USA LHM special signs:

` do not belong to the three main safety sign groups
` vary in shape and colour
` contain both symbols and text and are self-explanatory
` are only affixed to machines destined for the USA
` contain particular information for the machine operator and other associa
ted personnel
Examples of LHM signs in the USA:
Danger from moving parts
Danger from high pressure lines and hoses
Danger from hot surfaces
Do not climb on or enter machine
Danger from swinging load
64 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.8 Hazards
2.8.1 Mechanical action
WARNING
Mechanical actions from moving machine parts when machine is in use!
Observe handling and situation-specific safety notes.
NOTE
Observe the following safety notes:
Wear requisite personal protective equipment.
Only work on non-moving parts.
Examples of mechanical actions:
Standing under a suspended load.
Danger of being drawn in by moving drive units or machine parts.
Danger of falling when working without safety gear.
Danger of crushing due to unsecured components such as doors or sliding ele

ments.
FIRST AID
u Protection/personal safety
` Identify - what is the nature of the emergency?
` Think - what are the dangers for the injured party or the helper?
` Act - make the situation safe.
u Emergency call
u Emergency life-saving measures

` Recovery position
` Cardiac massage, artificial respiration and defibrillation
` Staunch bleeding, shock prevention
u Additional first aid
LHM 120-280_002 65
141128
Safety
2.8.2 Hydraulic energy
WARNING
Escaping hydraulic oil under high pressure!
Injuries to skin, destruction of tissue and sepsis.
NOTE
Repairs to hydraulic systems must exclusively be carried out by qualified
technicians with specialised knowledge and experience of hydraulics.
Before starting work ensure that the whole system is depressurised.
Never attempt to locate the leakage point with your hand or other part of
the body.
Replace damaged hydraulic components immediately with original
Liebherr spare parts.
Examples of hydraulic energy:
Tissue damage from leaks.
Sepsis from hydraulic oil entering bloodstream.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position

` Gently cover injured area(s) with a sterile anti-bacterial dressing
.
` Rinse eyes with pure drinking water.
66 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.8.3 Burns
CAUTION
Contact with hot surfaces and consumables!
Burns or scalding.
NOTE
Always wear suitable protective gloves when working on hot components.
Only carry out work on the machine when it is cool and stopped.
Examples of burns and scalding:

Burns from contact with the entire drive system.
Scalding from steam exiting from the cooling system or hydraulic oil from the
drive system.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call
` Recovery position
With first-degree burns (redness of the skin):

` Cool the affected body part by rinsing with cold fresh water.
` Gently cover injured area(s) with a sterile anti-bacterial dressing.
With second-degree burns (blisters on the skin):

` Cool the affected body part by rinsing with cold fresh water.
With third-degree burns (charring of the skin and tissue):

LHM 120-280_002 67
141128
Safety
2.8.4 Chemical burns
CAUTION
Contact with corrosive consumables!
Acids and bases cause chemical burns to skin and tissue, and blindness if they
come in contact with the eye.
NOTE
When working with acid always wear suitable safety goggles or face
protection, protective clothing and gloves.
Acids and bases will damage clothing.
Examples of chemical burns:
Chemical burns from handling acidic consumables.
Chemical burns from leaking battery acid.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position

` Removing clothing from injured body parts.
` Rinse injured areas with drinking water.
` Gently cover the area with a sterile anti-bacterial dressing.
68 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.8.5 Snow and ice loads
DANGER
Snow or ice on the machine!
Structural breakdown.
WARNING
Falling chunks of snow and ice!
Do not operate if boom is covered in snow or ice.
NOTE
Place boom in parked position and carefully remove large deposits of
snow and ice.
Remove snow and ice from all sensitive parts such as limit switches,
guides, etc.
Snow and ice loads increase the boom weight and the area exposed to
the wind.
LHM 120-280_002 69
141128
Safety
2.8.6 Lightning strike
WARNING
Electric shock from lightning!
Coming into contact with a direct or indirect current flow caused by a voltage
flashover or step voltage can be fatal.
Fall hazard when working at heights.
It can also cause a total failure of the control system, mechanical damage,
damage to the electronics or to local welding spots on supports.
NOTE
Liebherr recommends:
When the machine is the following locations, lay down the boom before
formation of a thunderstorm:
Vicinity of banks
Exposed, open locations
The closed machine operator's cab acts as a Faraday cage. The charge is
channeled through the machine and into the ground.
In heavy thunderstorms with lightning:
u Set crane operation.
u Lay down boom (see section 'Operation, Laying down the boom').
u Remain outside of the danger zone of the machine and keep away from
large metallic objects.
Measures to take after a lightning strike on the machine has been obser
ved or is suspected:
u Thoroughly inspect the machine paying particular attention to any damaged

cables, hoses and ropes.
u Check the operational capability of the control system.
u Slowly move the slewing gear and listen for any unusual noises.
u Inspect the boom for damage.
u Contact Liebherr service department.
70 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position

` (For further information see 'Safety, How to respond in the event of a cur
rent transfer')
LHM 120-280_002 71
141128
Safety
2.8.7 Danger of fire and explosion
DANGER
Highly flammable consumables, resulting gas mixture and electric
charge/discharge!
Danger of fire and explosion.
General safety notes to prevent danger of fire and explosion:

` Do not use any flammable fluids to clean the machine.
` Do not carry any flammable fluids on the machine other than in the tanks
provided for this purpose.
` Only store small amounts of fuel or highly flammable or self-igniting ma
terial at the site where the machine is being used.
` Do not store cleaning cloths in the area of the central power unit and re
gularly remove flammable deposits such as puddles of oil, ash and waste
paper.
` Regularly check that protective covers, cable and hose guides are com
plete and in working order. Secure loose cables and ducts and protect
them from fraying.
` Check all lines, hoses and screw fittings of the hydraulic and fuel sys
tems regularly for leaks and possible damage. Repair leaks immediately
and replace any damaged components with original LIEBHERR spare
parts.
Safety notes on batteries and electrics:

` Smoking, naked flames and using electrical devices near batteries are
forbidden.
` An explosive detonating gas is produced when charging or discharging,
which burns explosively on contact with fire!
` Disconnect and remove all power supplies (batteries, auxiliary supply,
main power supply, etc.) when preserving the machine.
` Check the electrical system regularly for faults and damage (loose clam
ping connections, scorched or frayed cables, etc).
Safety notes on handling fuel:

` Switch off engine before fuelling.
` Smoking and using a naked flame are forbidden.
` Ensure that no one is inside the cab during the fuelling procedure.
` Refuel the machine exclusively in a well ventilated area.
` Electrostatic discharges may occur between the machine and the fuelling
unit in the diesel tank filler neck. Where possible, connect the machine to
the fuelling unit earthing.
` Position the fuelling unit hose to prevent fuel from leaking out.
` Only restart the machine when the tank cover is securely fitted and
locked, all passage doors are locked and no personnel are on the ma
chine.
72 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.8.8 Poisoning and suffocation
CAUTION
Inadequate ventilation or fresh air!
Poisoning or suffocation.
Ensure adequate ventilation in the cabin.
Use breathing apparatus when working with hazardous materials.
Examples of poisoning and dangers of asphyxiation:
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide and other hazardous gases.
If the machine is used in areas where hazardous materials are present, contact
with hazardous gases is a possibility.
The refrigerant from the air conditioning system circuit displaces the oxygen in
the air.
FIRST AID
u Emergency call

` Recovery position
LHM 120-280_002 73
141128
Safety
2.8.9 Environmental hazard
CAUTION
Uncontrolled discharge of fuel, oils, cleaning agents, coolant, etc.!
Contamination of soil and water. Considerable environmental damage.
If the machine leaks, immediately collect the escaping consumable and
seal the leak.
Bind any spilled consumable with binding agent or neutralise it with
suitable agents.
When draining or catching fluids use suitable containers (filling capacity
and resistant to chemicals).
Carry out cleaning work on firm well-drained ground.
Observe the national and international environmental protection
regulations for the disposal of fuels or waste.
Notify the emergency services and authorities if large amounts of
substances that are harmful to the environment escape.
Examples of environmental hazards:
Leakages
Refilling consumables incorrectly
74 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.8.10 Electromagnetic influence
WARNING
Electromagnetic influence when the machine is deployed near transmitting
stations, radar stations or directional radio systems!
Malfunctions or failure of electronic implants (pacemakers).
Malfunction or failure of the control system.
If electromagnetic interference with the control system is suspected, set
crane operation.
Examples of electromagnetic influence:
Malfunction or failure of the control system if operating the machine near trans
mitters, directional radio systems or radar stations.
Environmental influence through the use of electromagnetic rigging material or

integrated radio devices.
LHM 120-280_002 75
141128
Safety
2.8.11 Exposure to wind
DANGER
Non-compliance with permitted wind speeds during crane operation!
Danger of tilting, personal injury and material damage.
The machine operator must be aware of the permitted wind speed (load
chart).
Stop work as soon as possible if the maximum permitted wind speed is
exceeded (higher than the load chart specification).
Lay down and secure the load and place the machine in the parked
position.
NOTE
Exposure to wind (from the front, from the rear and from the side):
acts like an additional load on the hook.
increases the danger of tilting.
may cause the load to become unstable resulting in damage or
destruction of the boom.
reduces the stability of the machine.
increases the swing radius.
generates additional diagonal pull.
NOTE
An anemometer on the boom head provides an accurate indication on the
monitor of the wind speed at this height. (height of boom head)
Figure 26 Exposure to wind from the front
76 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Figure 27 Exposure to wind from the rear
Figure 28 Exposure to wind from the side
LHM 120-280_002 77
141128
Safety
Parked position at wind speeds up to 50 m/s
u Place machine parallel to the undercarriage (0° or 180°).
u Detach rigged load and lay down and secure lifting device on the ground.
u Place the boom in the following position:
Type Minimum radius (m) Maximum radius (m)

LHM 120 16 20
LHM 180 17 21
LHM 280 14 22
NOTE
Lay the boom on the ground or in a suitable location in wind speeds
exceeding 42 m/s (see section 'Operation/Laying down the boom').
DANGER
In wind speeds exceeding 50 m/s!
Toppling of machine.
Lay the boom on the ground or in a suitable location (see section
'Operation/Laying down the boom).
Secure machine against slipping/sliding.
78 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
If machine is not in use, it is possible to estimate the wind force and wind speed
on both land and sea using the following tables:
Wind force Wind speed Description of the conditions at sea

Beau Designa Knots Wave
fort tion height
(m)
0 Calm 0 0 Mirror-smooth sea.
1 Light air 2 0,1 Small flaky-looking ripples without white crests.
2 Light 5 0,2 Small, short waves. Glassy, non-breaking crests.
breeze
3 Gentle 9 0,6 Small, short waves. Crests begin to break. Mostly transparent
breeze foam. Occasional small, white foam heads.
4 Moderate 13 1 Small, longer waves. Many have white crests.
breeze
5 Fresh 19 2 Moderate longer waves. Widespread white crests. Isolated froth.
breeze
6 Strong 24 3 Large waves. Crests break and leave large white areas of foam.
breeze Some froth.
7 Near gale 30 4 Sea heaps up. White foam begins to streak in wind direction.
8 Gale 37 5,5 Moderately high waves with considerably long crests. Crest edges
begin to froth. Foam covers the surface in pronounced streaks in
the wind direction.
9 Severe 44 7 High waves. Thick strips of foam in the wind direction. Wave crests
gale roll over one another. See begins to 'roll'. Froth can affect visibility.
10 Storm 52 9 Very high waves with long breaking crests. The resulting foam lies
on the surface in thick white streaks in the wind direction. Sea is
white from foam. Strong intermittent 'rolling' of the sea. Visibility af
fected by froth.
11 Violent 60 11,5 Exceptionally high waves (small and medium-sized ships are mo
storm mentarily hidden from view behind the waves). Sea is completely
white from foam, which streaks in the wind direction. Edges of the
wave crests turn to froth. Visibility limited by froth.
12 Hurricane <64 <14 Air filled with foam and froth. Sea completely white with froth. Visib
ility is extremely limited.
LHM 120-280_002 79
141128
Safety
Wind force Wind speed Effects of the wind on land

Beau Designa m/s km/h mph
fort tion
0 Calm 0 - 0,2 1 <1 Smoke rises vertically.
1 Light air 0,3 - 1,5 1-5 1-3 Wind direction shown by smoke drift but not yet by wind
vanes.
2 Light 1,6 - 3,3 6 - 11 4-7 Wind felt on face; leaves rustle; vanes moved by wind.
breeze
3 Gentle 3,4 - 5,4 12 - 19 8 - 12 Leaves and small twigs in constant motion; wind ex
breeze tends light flag.
4 Moderate 5,5 - 7,9 20 - 28 13 - 18 Raises dust and loose paper; moves twigs and small
breeze branches.
5 Fresh 8 - 10,7 29 - 38 19 - 24 Small broadleaf trees begin to sway; white crests form
breeze on inland waters.
6 Strong 10,8 - 13,8 39 - 49 25 - 31 Large branches in motion; whistling heard in overhead
breeze power lines, umbrellas blown inside out.
7 Near gale 13,9 - 17,1 50 - 61 32 - 38 Trees in motion.
8 Gale 17,2 - 10,7 62 - 74 39 - 46 Wind breaks twigs off trees. Progress in the open is
severely impeded.
9 Severe 20,8 - 24,4 75 - 88 47 - 54 Slight structural damage (roof tiles and chimney covers,
gale etc. blown off)
10 Storm 24,5 - 28,4 89 - 102 55 - 63 Trees uprooted. Considerable structural damage occurs.
11 Violent 28,5 - 32,6 103 - 117 64 - 73 Widespread storm losses.
storm
12 Hurricane 32,7 - 36,9 118 - 133 >74 Severe devastation.
NOTE
As machine operator, keep up to date with the weather situation.
Take machine out of operation in unacceptably high wind speeds.
Take protective measures against storm losses (see section 'Operation,
Parked position).
80 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.9 Danger from electrical energy
WARNING
Electrical energy!
Severe injury, death.
Inform all personnel on the site where the machine is to be used about
the dangers of electrical voltage.
2.9.1 Overhead power lines
WARNING
Contact with a live overhead power line!
Electric shock, serious damage to property and personal injury.
Maintain safe distances. If safe distances can not be maintained,
overhead power line must be switched off by qualified personnel.
Maintain a safe distance as specified in national guidelines or by a
representative from the power supply company. If a safe distance cannot
be consistently maintained, do not make any changes to the conductor
routing yourself!
Inform the power supply company. The power supply company will then
take additional action to ensure work can continue safely (e.g. switch off
the line, re-route the conductor, etc.). The power supply company
representative will issue written approval for the safe operation of the
machine.
Pay attention to floor unevenness or wind that can reduce the distance to
the line.
Assign a banksman to observe the machine and the line, monitor the safe
distance and maintain continuous contact with the machine operator.
LHM 120-280_002 81
141128
Safety
Figure 29 Overhead line tower
The safe distance depends on the nominal voltage of the overhead power line.
The table below lists the basic safe distances (in accordance with EN 50110,
Part 1, 2004).
w Familiarise yourself with national and local guidelines.
Safe distances (according to EN 50110, Part 1, 2004)
Nominal line voltage (kV) Safe distance X (mm)

<1 300
3 1120
6 1120
10 1150
15 1160
20 1220
30 1320
36 1380
45 1480
60 1630
70 1750
110 2000
132 3000
150 3000
220 3000
275 4000
380 4000
480 6100
700 8400
82 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
NOTE
Only the power supply company can provide exact information about the
nominal line voltage.
Dangerous situations with overhead power lines:
u Direct contact with a low voltage overhead power line (up to 1 kV)
w Current transfer to the machine.
w A dangerous voltage is applied to the machine.
w An earth leakage and resistance area (see section 'Safety, resistance
area') form around the machine.
u Direct contact with a high voltage overhead power line (from 1 kV upwards)
w An arc forms if the safe distance is not adhered to.
w A resistance area and earth leakage form around the machine.
NOTE
When a flashover with arcing occurs, it is possible that combustible
materials (e.g. weight load) will ignite.
u Direct contact with two different overhead power lines

w A short-circuit will occur.
w An arc forms (above 1 kW) if the safe distance is not adhered to.
u Overhead power line falls to the ground

NOTE
The protective devices of different national electricity grids react differently
in the event of a fault.
After a short circuit or an earth leakage never assume that an automatic
and permanent shut down will occur.
The machine or a torn-down overhead power line may therefore carry a
dangerous voltage and form a resistance area.
LHM 120-280_002 83
141128
Safety
2.9.2 Underground lines
DANGER
Contact with a live underground line!
Electric shock, serious damage to property and personal injury.
Maintain a minimum safe distance of 1 m. If safe distances can not be
maintained, underground line must be switched off by qualified personnel.
NOTE
Live underground lines are insulated several times depending on their
voltage. The nominal line voltage cannot be easily determined.
Only the power supply company can provide exact information about the
nominal line voltage.
Immediately notify the power supply company of even the slightest
damage to the external shield.
Dangerous situations with underground lines:
u Damage to the insulation and/or contact with one or several underground

lines
w Strong arcing.
NOTE
The protective devices of different national electricity grids react differently
in the event of a fault.
After a short circuit or an earth leakage never assume that an automatic
and permanent shut down will occur.
The machine or a ripped-up underground line may therefore carry a
dangerous voltage and form a resistance area.
84 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.9.3 Resistance area
Figure 30 Resistance area
In the event of a current transfer to the machine, the current is distributed from
the point of ingress in the ground. The voltage decreases according to a funnel-
shaped curve - a resistance area is formed.
The extent of the resistance area depends on:

` Voltage
` Current
` Ground resistance
Step voltage in the resistance area:
If a person moves within the resistance area, a difference of potential, known as

the step voltage, forms between his feet.
The step voltage increases:

` the closer the person is to the place of power ingress.
` the greater the step length.
WARNING
Step voltage!
Depending on the insulating properties of his footwear, an electric shock is
created above a certain step voltage!
If the person falls to the ground, a potential drop immediately forms along his
body surpassing that of the step voltage - a life threatening current flows throug
his body!
See section 'Safety, How to respond in the event of a current transfer'.
Observe safety notes and information!
LHM 120-280_002 85
141128
Safety
2.10 How to respond in the event of a current

transfer
WARNING
Incorrect procedure in event of current transfer to the machine!
Electric shock, serious injury, death.
Procedure in event of current transfer to the machine:
u Remain calm.
u Do no leave the cabin.

w Remaining in the cabin is relatively safe.
w Only leave the cabin in the event of immediate danger! (see section
'Safety, Leaving the machine in the event of a current transfer' and 'Lea
ving the machine in the event of fire')
u In the event of fire, alert the emergency services and the power supply com
pany. (see section 'Safety, How to respond in the event of a fire')
u If the Litronic control system is still functioning:

w Immediately move the machine out of the danger zone.
w Stop the machine as soon as a safe distance has been reached and any
arcing has stopped.
u Prevent anyone from entering the resistance area by establishing a sufficient

radius.
WARNING
Remaining in the resistance area!
Electric shock, serious injury, death.
86 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.10.1 Leaving the machine after an accident with a low

voltage line
NOTE
The nature of the accident (whether low or high voltage) determines the
manner in which the emergency exit from the machine is carried out as
well as the rescue and first aid procedures for affected individuals. If in
doubt, always assume that a high voltage accident has occurred!
u Never touch live parts of the machine (rope, load, support pads, etc) if you
are in contact with the ground.
u Jump in a direction that avoids any contact with live parts.
u Jump to a safe distance from the machine and land on both feet at the same
time.
u Never hold on to the machine or any live parts.
u When leaving the danger area, avoid any contact with metal objects.
FIRST AID
Rescuing a person from the danger zone (low voltage):
u Alert the emergency services and the relevant power supply company.
` Report an electrical accident.
` Request that the supply be shut off.
` State the scene of the accident.
` Describe the course of accident.
` State the number of injured persons.
` Give a name and telephone number (personnel data).
u Secure the scene of the accident, do not allow access to any unauthorised
persons.
` Avoid direct contact with the injured person.
` Only after contact with the live object has been broken is it safe to touch
the injured person and to move him/her out of the danger zone.
u Administer first aid (see also FIRST AID for burn injuries)
` In the event of apnoea, cardiac arrest or shock, immediately administer
artificial respiration, cardiac massage or shock prevention treatment.
` Alert the emergency services, or seek medical advice as quickly as pos
sible.
LHM 120-280_002 87
141128
Safety
2.10.2 Leaving the machine after an accident with a high

voltage line
NOTE
The nature of the accident (whether low or high voltage) determines the
manner in which the emergency exit from the machine is carried out as
well as the rescue and first aid procedures for affected individuals. If in
doubt, always assume that a high voltage accident has occurred!
u Never touch live parts of the machine (rope, load, support pads, etc) if you
are in contact with the ground.
u Jump in a direction that avoids any contact with live parts.
u Jump to a safe distance from the machine and land on both feet at the same
time.
u Land on both feet at the same time with legs closed (do not straddle).
u Never hold on to the machine or any live parts.
u Leave the resistance area (see section 'Safety, Danger from electrical
energy'): Hop on both feet with both legs pressed together until the required
safe distance is reached.
u While hopping away, keep well clear of any live parts.
NOTE
Instead of hopping, you can also leave the resistance area by shuffling
with knees pressed together and the shoes rubbing against each other. It
is very important to maintain constant contact between the shoes and the
ground.
Never lift your shoes off the ground!
FIRST AID
Rescuing a person from the danger zone (high voltage):
u Alert the emergency services and the relevant power supply company.
` Report an electrical accident.
` Request that the supply be shut off.
` State the scene of the accident.
` Describe the course of accident.
` State the number of injured persons.
` Give a name and telephone number (personnel data).
u Secure a sufficiently wide area around the scene of the accident, do not al
low access to any unauthorised persons.
88 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
u Be aware of the resistance area.
u Rescue injured person from the danger zone:

` Only enter the danger zone after the shut-down of the line has been con
firmed by the power supply company.
` if possible only enter danger zone under the supervision of trained per
sonnel from the relevant power supply company.
u Administer first aid (see also FIRST AID for burn injuries)
` In the event of apnoea, cardiac arrest or shock, immediately administer
artificial respiration, cardiac massage or shock prevention treatment.
` Alert the emergency services, or seek medical advice as quickly as pos
sible.
NOTE
Always seek medical attention after electrical accidents. It is possible that
symptoms of an irregular heartbeat may be experienced some time after
the accident!
LHM 120-280_002 89
141128
Safety
2.11 How to respond in the event of a fire
DANGER
Incorrect use of fire extinguishers and non-compliance with safety
instructions!
NOTE
Intimately familiarise yourself with the fire extinguishing systems (fire
extinguishers, fire detection and extinguishing systems), their locations
and the number of systems.
Regularly inspect and service the systems referred to above.
Keep all doors closed during operation to prevent chimney effect.
NOTE
Check infrastructure for presence and effectiveness of firefighting and
rescue measures as well as what to do in the event of a fire.
Procedure in the event of fire:
u Switch off engine
u If a fire is detected automatically by a fire detection and extinguishing sys

tem, all prime movers are automatically shut down after 20 seconds, see
section 'Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing system'.
u If the machine operator is made aware of a fire by a warning on the monitor

or through any other means, he must manually trigger the fire extinguishing
system manually! (see section 'Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing
system)
u Request assistance via the PA system and alert the emergency services
(machines with combustion engines are equipped with the fire detection and
extinguishing system as standard, a warning hooter is activated automati
cally if any of the large number of sensors in the fire detection and extinguis
hing system detect a fire and an acoustic warning signal sounds on the
outside of the machine)
u Use escape package.
u If the situation permits, leave machine via conventional route or central de
scent path on undercarriage. Otherwise, perform an emergency abseil from
the abseil hooks or abseil gibbet using the abseil rescue equipment.
u If the situation does not permit emergency abseiling or conventional exit of

the machine, remain in operator's cab with doors and windows closed and
90 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
air conditioning and ventilation systems switched off until emergency ser
vices reach the operator's cab or the situation changes.
u Evacuate individuals from the danger zone and administer first aid if needed
(see 'Burn injuries' and 'Danger of fire and explosion')
u Only if there is no risk to your personal safety should you start to fight the
fire (fire extinguisher).
u If the fire detection and extinguishing system* extinguishes the fire, the area
can only be investigated once no escaping air sounds can be heard from the
generators.
u All doors to the affected area must remain closed after the fire is extinguis
hed.
u The area may only be entered after it is deemed safe by authorised firefigh
ters.
DANGER
Escaping fuel or oils in contact with hot parts.
Risk of fire restarting!
Observe safety notes.
LHM 120-280_002 91
141128
Safety
2.11.1 Firefighting using a fire extinguisher
NOTE
Owner must organise, replace and check fire extinguishers in accordance
with national regulations.
u To fight the fire, remove the fire extinguisher from its mount on the machine
and prepare it for use. See section 'Product description, Safety devices, Fire
extinguishers' as well as 'Safety, Safety signs on the machine'.
u Locate the source of the fire and fight the fire with several short, targeted
bursts from the fire extinguisher. Spray the appropriate extinguishing agent
for the type of fire at the source of the fire. Maintain a safe distance!
u While fighting the fire, employees must alert the fire brigade and help to fight
the fire using extra fire extinguishers and suitable extinguishing agents.
NOTE
Burning hydraulic oil:
can only be successfully put out using the fire extinguisher at the very
start of the fire.
leads after a short time to a fully-fledged fire and to the total loss of the
machine.
Fire classes
Fire class A: Fires involving solid materials which leave a residue when burnt
(includes cable fires)
Fire class B: Fires involving fluids and liquefying materials (e.g. paraffin, diesel,
oils, etc.)
Fire class C: Fires involving gases (e.g. methane, butane, natural gas, etc.)
Fire class D: Fires involving metals
Incorrect Correct
92 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Fight the fire with the wind behind

you
Extinguish the fire from the front to

the back and from the bottom to the
top
But: Extinguish dropping and liquid

fires from the top to the bottom
Do not use extinguishers in succes

sion but use several extinguishers at
the same time
Make sure that the fire does not re

ignite - always extinguish glowing
embers with water
Incorrect Correct
Do not put fire extinguishers back in

place after use - refill them
LHM 120-280_002 93
141128
Safety
FIRST AID
See FIRST AID in case of burns.
2.11.2 Firefighting using the fire detection and extinguishing

system
See section 'Operation, Fire detection and extinguishing system'.
2.11.3 Leaving the machine in the event of a fire
See section 'Operation, Emergency exit'.
94 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.12 Hand signals
Hand signals:
` are used for communication purposes when there is visual contact bet
ween machine operator and banksman or other personnel.
` are clearly defined in national and international standards.
NOTE
All persons involved must decide among themselves which hand signals
are to be used.
The following overview comprises:

` Hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 (Germany)
` Hand signals in accordance with ASME/ANSI B30.5 (USA)
2.12.1 General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8
Caution, Start, Attention

` Hold right arm stretched vertically upwards. Palm of the hand faces for
wards.
Stop, Interruption
` Do not continue movement. Stretch out both arms to the side horizon
tally. Palms of the hands face forward.
LHM 120-280_002 95
141128
Safety
Stop - Danger
` First stretch out both arms horizontally to the sides. Palms of the hands
face forward. Bend in and stretch out the arms alternately.
Lift
ward and makes a slow circling motion.
Lower
` Hold right arm downwards. Palm of the hand faces inwards and makes a
slow circling motion.
Slowly
` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Palm of the hand faces down and is
moved slowly up and down.
Depart
wards. Move the arm from side to side.
96 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Approach
` Bend both arms. Palms of the hands face inwards. Wave in with the fore
arms.
Remove
` Bend both arms. Palms of the hands face outwards. Wave away with the
forearms.
Travel right (from the banksman's viewpoint)

` Lightly bend right arm while holding it out horizontally and move back and
forth sideways.
Travel left (from the banksman's viewpoint)

` Lightly bend left arm while holding it out horizontally and move back and
forth sideways.
Indicate distance reduction

` Hold both palms parallel and move them toward each other to indicate
the distance.
LHM 120-280_002 97
141128
Safety
2.12.2 Special hand signals for lifting device

operations
Lift load slowly

` Bend right arm and hold upwards. Extended index finger points upwards.
Right hand makes small, circular movements. Stretch out the left hand
and hold it over the right hand.
Lower load slowly

` Hold right arm downwards. Extended index finger points downwards.
Hand makes small, circular movements. Hold left hand below it. Hand
surface faces upwards.
Lift boom section slowly

` Bend right arm. Thumb points upwards. Hold left hand above it.
Lower boom section slowly

` Bend right arm. Thumb points downwards. Hold left hand below it. Back
of the hand faces upwards.
98 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Lift boom section and hold load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points upwards. Left hand makes a fist under the
right hand.
Lower boom section and hold load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points downwards. Left hand makes a fist under
the right hand.
Raise boom section and lower load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points upwards. Stretch out left arm. Index finger
points downwards. Hold left hand under right hand and rotate.
Lower boom section and lift load

` Bend right arm. Thumb points downwards. Bend left arm. Index finger
points upwards. Hold left hand under right hand and rotate.
Swing uppercarriage to the right

` Bend left arm and hold it up. Thumb points outwards in the direction of
rotation. Stretch out right arm downwards. Index finger points down
wards. Hand makes small, circular movements.
LHM 120-280_002 99
141128
Safety
Swing uppercarriage to the left

` Bend right arm and hold it up. Thumb points outwards in the direction of
rotation. Stretch out left arm downwards. Index finger points downwards.
Hand makes small, circular movements.
Open grab
` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Hold hand downwards with fingers half-
open.
Close grab
` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Close hand into a fist.
100 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
2.12.3 Hand signals for lifting device operations in accord

ance with ASME/ANSI B30.5
Lift load
` Bend right arm and hold upwards. Outstretched index finger points up
wards. Right hand makes small, circular movements.
Lower load
` Hold right arm downwards. Outstretched index finger points downwards.
Right hand makes small, circular movements.
Use main winch

` Tap safety helmet with fist. Then give further hand signals.
Use auxiliary winch

` Bend right arm and hold upwards. Tap underside of elbow with left hand.
Then give further hand signals.
LHM 120-280_002 101

141128
Safety
Lift boom section

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points upwards. Remaining
fingers are closed.
Lower boom section

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points downwards. Remaining
fingers are closed.
Move slowly
` Give the hand signal for the desired movement with one hand. Hold the
other hand above/below. (e.g.: Lift load)
Raise boom section and lower load

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points upwards. Stretch and
bend the remaining fingers alternately for as long the load has to be lo
wered.
102 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Lower boom section and lift load

` Stretch out right arm horizontally. Thumb points downwards. Stretch and
bend the remaining fingers alternately for as long the load has to be lo
wered.
Swing
` Stretch out right/left arm horizontally. Palm of the hand faces down,
extended fingers point in the direction of rotation.
Stop
` Stretch out one arm horizontally. Palm of the hand faces downwards.
Swing arm back and forth horizontally.
Emergency stop
` Stretch out both arms horizontally. Palm of the hands facing downwards.
Swing both arms back and forth horizontally.
LHM 120-280_002 103

141128
Safety
Drive
` Stretch one arm out in front. Palm of the hand faces forwards and is
slightly raised. Make a movement in the direction of travel with the open
hand.
Shut down and secure machine

` Hook hands in front of body.
Drive with both crawler chains (when using a machine with crawler chains)
` Hold both fists in front of body. Indicate direction of travel with circular
motions (forwards or backwards).
Drive with one crawler chain (when using a machine with crawler chains)
` Bend arm with fist raised on the side of the stopped crawler chain. Bend
other arm in front of body. Indicate direction of travel via circular move
ments with fist (forwards or backwards).
104 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Safety
Extend boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` Hold both fists in front of body. Thumbs facing outwards.
Retract boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` Hold both fists in front of body. Thumbs point towards each other.
Retract boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` One-handed signal: Hold one fist in front of chest. Thumb points to chest.
Extend boom (machines with telescopic arm)

` One-handed signal: Hold one fist in front of chest. Thumb facing out
wards.
LHM 120-280_002 105

141128
Safety
106 LHM 120-280_002
141128
3
141128
3
141128
Operating elements
3. Operating elements
This section
` provides information on the configuration of the operating elements
` specifies the designation of each element
LHM 120-280_002 107

141128
Operating elements
3.1 Control station
The LHM is equipped with the tower cabin and just one control station as stan
dard. Included with the optional slewing platform cabin is another control station
in either standard or reduced layout (with just one master switch and control
panel X25 exclusively).
Figure 31 Tower cabin control station
1 Litronic screen
2 Video monitoring
3 Control panel X26
4 Right control lever
5 Control panel X25
6 Operator`s seat
7 Left control lever
8 Safety lever
9 Ventilation control
10 PA amplifier
11 Radio
12 Video camera control unit
13 XLR bush for microphone
14 Spirit level
15 Ashtray
108 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.2 Left master switch
3.2.1 Directions
A Preselection Function
Crane operation Lift boom
B
D
Travelling mode Reverse
Travelling mode Automatic supporting UP

C
A
B Preselection Function
Crane operation Lower boom
Travelling mode Drive forwards
Travelling mode Automatic supporting DOWN
C Preselection Function
Crane operation Swing to the right
D Preselection Function
Crane operation Swing to the left
LHM 120-280_002 109

141128
Operating elements
3.2.2 Buttons
3 1
2
4
8
5
6
9
Figure 32 Left master switch
1 Preselection Function
Rotator Turn rotator counter-clockwise
Spreader / Pipe grab Balance spreader to black flip
per / pipe grab to black hook
Magnet (two-hand operation) Switch off magnet
Coil tong (two-hand operation) Extend coil tong
Rotator Turn rotator clockwise
110 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Spreader / Pipe grab Balance spreader to white flip
per / pipe grab to white hook
Spreader Bypass spreader
four-rope grab Grab bulk cargo
Coil tong Bypass light barrier
Cycoptronic, teach-in Change sectors
Pipe grab Pipe grab Bypass
Cycoptronic, teach-in Set left destination point
Pipe grab (two-hand operation) Enable to open
- Horn
Rotator Rotator free-wheel
Crane operation, Cycoptronic Close slewing gear brake, en
able Cycoptronic
Crane operation, travelling Enable functions

mode
LHM 120-280_002 111

141128
Operating elements
3.3 Right master switch
3.3.1 Directions
A Preselection Function
Crane operation Lift load
Manual cable drum Lift cable

B C
B Preselection Function
Crane operation Lower load
D A
Manual cable drum Lower cable
C Preselection Function
Spreader Open twistlocks
Spreader + Shift Extend spreader
Four-rope grab / motor grab Open grab
Travelling mode Steer right
Coil tong Fold out coil lugs
D Preselection Function
Spreader Close twistlocks
Spreader + Shift Retract spreader
Four-rope grab / motor grab Close grab
Travelling mode Steer left
Coil tong Fold in coil lugs
112 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.3.2 Buttons
3 1
4
2
7
8
9
Figure 33 Right master switch
Spreader Lower/raise red flipper
Pipe grab Retract hook pair 1
Spreader Lower/raise black flipper
Magnet Switch on magnet
Coil tong Retract coil tong

Pipe grab Retract hook pair 2
LHM 120-280_002 113

141128
Operating elements
Spreader Lower/raise white flipper
Pipe grab Extend hook pair 1
Spreader Lower/raise green flipper
Magnet (two-hand operation) Switch off magnet
Coil tong (two-hand operation) Extend coil tong

Pipe grab Extend hook pair 2
SHIFT button Enable additional functions
Spreader Raise all flippers
Magnet Magnet fade out
- PA system on
Crane operation Slewing free-wheel
Cycoptronic, teach-in Set right destination point
Crane operation Close slewing gear brake
Cycoptronic Enable Cycoptronic
Crane operation, travelling Enable functions

mode
114 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.4 Control units

Every push button on the X25 and X26 control panels are fitted with an LED.
This indicates the respective function.
1 Push buttons
1 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
` LED on:
w Function active
` LED off:
w Function inactive
Key switch
1
1 Key
2 Light Emitting Diode (LED)
2
3 Button
` LED on:
3
w Function active
` LED off:
w Function inactive
NOTE
The functions of each button are explained in the 'Operation' section.
LHM 120-280_002 115

141128
Operating elements
3.4.1 Control panel X25
0 I I 0 II 0 I 0 I
Figure 34 Control panel X25
116 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Emergency stop
0 I
Engine Start/Stop
1
1 Ignition On/Off
` Position 0: Off
` Position I: On
2
2 Engine Start/Stop
E
I 0 II
Winch service operation mode
1
1 winch selection
` Position I: Closing winch
` Position 0: Deactivates or bypasses top-limit switch
2
` Position II: Holding winch
2 Activation
0 I
Slack rope bypass
1
1 Slack rope bypass

` Position 0: Off
` Position I: On
2
2 Activation
LHM 120-280_002 117

141128
Operating elements
0 I
Load moment limitation (LML) bypass
1
1 LML bypass
` Position 0: Off
` Position I: On
2 2 Activation
NOTE
Software version
The LML bypass is no longer included from software 993390314 - 032
onwards.
See section 'Operation, Litronic to call up current software version'.
Hook operation mode (NL)
Heavy load additional mode (HL)*
Synchronise winches*
Rotator free-wheel additional mode*
Rotator operation mode*
118 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Sycratronic*
Motor grab operation mode*
Four-rope grab operation mode*
Bulk - spreader operation mode*
Spreader operation mode*
Retract spreader*
Extend spreader*
LHM 120-280_002 119

141128
Operating elements
Normal travel operation
Crab mode
Laying down the boom
Manual boom cable drum
Cable retainer*
Maximum engine speed*
Twinlift spreader bypass*
Twinlift spreader*
120 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Coil tong operation mode*
Magnet operation mode*
Magnet - battery test*
Coil tong - light barrier bypass*
Wheel loader - bobcat loading operation*
Man riding*
Manual cable drum main power supply*
LHM 120-280_002 121

141128
Operating elements
Automatic cable drum main power supply*
Access lighting*
Tower floodlights*
Boom floodlights*
122 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.4.2 Control panel X26
1/2
Figure 35 Control panel X26
LHM 120-280_002 123

141128
Operating elements
Retract boom supports
Extend boom supports
Front/rear left support
Front/rear right support
Retract supporting cylinder
Extend supporting cylinder
Automatic supporting*
124 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Printout of last load cycle*
Printout of current load cycle*
Printout of load cycles in reverse order*
Start/Stop data recorder*
Pause data recorder*
Camera change-over*
Land- Sea side*
LHM 120-280_002 125

141128
Operating elements
Windscreen wiper interval On/Off
Windscreen wiper On/Off
Windscreen wash system On/Off
Slewing gear working speed*
Luffing gear working speed*
Four-rope grab working speed*
Log grab operation mode*
Rotation around the leader crane hook (Sycratronic)*
126 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Left sector point*
Left sector point* (LHM delivered before 2010)
Right sector point*
Right sector point* (LHM delivered before 2010)
Left slewing gear sector point*
Left slewing gear sector point* (LHM delivered before 2010)
Right slewing gear sector point*
Right slewing gear sector point* (LHM delivered before 2010)
LHM 120-280_002 127

141128
Operating elements
Maximum luffing gear outreach sector point*
Minimum luffing gear outreach sector point*
Anti-collision On/Off*
Undercarriage travelling light*
Left indicator*
Right indicator*
Hazard lights*
Undercarriage additional light*
128 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Cycoptronic*
Rotator Cycoptronic operation mode*
Cycoptronic teach-in*
Rotator direction change*
Rotator direction change (LHM delivered before 2010)
LHM 120-280_002 129

141128
Operating elements
3.4.3 Litronic service desk
NOTE
Machines supplied from 2009 onwards have the Litronic service desk in
the form of a touchscreen field on the screen and this can be faded in and
out (see Control units/screen).
Figure 36 Litronic service desk
Numbers
Decimal point
130 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Unused
Inverse
Exponent
LCD monitor brightness
Warning buzzer quieter
Warning buzzer louder
Correction values
Crane operation
Test system
Enter
Navigation
Navigation
Key switch
LHM 120-280_002 131

141128
Operating elements
3.4.4 Fire detection and extinguishing system*
Figure 37 Tower cabin fire detection and extinguishing control unit
Figure 38 Slewing platform fire detection and extinguishing control unit
132 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
MH manual activation
SSR manual activation*
Reset
Switch-over between automatic activation deactivated and automatic activation
Key switch On / Off
Acknowledge horn
SSR manual triggering device*
LHM 120-280_002 133

141128
Operating elements
3.4.5 Switch cabinet X1, X32 (switch cabinet room)
Figure 39 Switch cabinet X1 LHM 120 - 280
1 NRS lights*
2 Radio remote control key switch*
3 Radio remote control indication lamp*
4 Operating hour meter
Figure 40 Switch cabinet X32 LHM 120 - 280*
1 Power supply
2 Electric motor operating hour meter
134 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5 Litronic monitor
3.5.1 Monitor overview
5 4
Figure 41 Monitor overview
1 Status indicator
2 Status display
3 Function keys
4 Green LED: 24 V power supply OK
5 Red LED: Monitor self test
NOTE
Items 4 and 5 are omitted from monitor 5 onwards.
LHM 120-280_002 135

141128
Operating elements
3.5.2 Start symbol (from monitor 5 onwards)
These symbols appear on the start screen as soon as the machine is switched
on. No actions are possible as long as the following symbols are displayed:
Connecting (incremented up to 3)
Connected
Receiving data
Visualising
Downloading
3.5.3 Status indicator - operation modes
Displays the currently selected operation mode. The symbols have a thick
border and occupy the first position.
Normal load hook operation
Heavy load hook operation
136 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Rotator normal load operation mode
Rotator heavy load operation mode
Spreader operation
Four-rope grab operation
Motor grab operation
Magnet operation
Coil tong operation
Timber grab mode
Boom down mode
Normal travelling mode
Crab mode
Man riding
LHM 120-280_002 137

141128
Operating elements
3.5.4 Status indicator
Displays the current status of the selected operation mode. The symbols are
thin (in contrast to the operation mode) and are positioned next to the selected
operation mode.
Slewing gear stop
Slewing gear left stop*
Slewing gear right stop*
Hoisting gear lift-lower stop
Hoisting gear lift stop
Hoisting gear lower stop
Luffing gear raise-lower stop
Luffing gear raise stop
Luffing gear lower stop
Diesel engine preheat
Diesel engine ready to start
Travelling gear synchronous 0° / 180
138 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Crab mode direction
Top support pads
Pendant winch key switch selection
Closing winch key switch selection
Winches not synchronised
Slack rope
Winch 1 slack rope
Winch 2 slack rope
Winches 1 and 2 slack rope
Spreader landed
Spreader twistlocks opened
Spreader twistlocks closed
LHM 120-280_002 139

141128
Operating elements
Grab closed
Grab opened
Grab "cargo"
Pipe grab position undefined
Pipe grab Heavy Load
Pipe grab retracted
Pipe grab extended
Pipe grab without load / load on hook pair 1 or hook pair 2
Motor grab current display
Magnet landed
Magnet active
Coil lugs folded in
Coil lugs folded in and hit cut-off bar
Coil lugs folded out
140 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Coil lugs folded out and hit cut-off bar
Coil tong landed
Coil tong landed and hit cut-off bar
Coil tong light barrier free
Coil tong light barrier blocked
Coil tong light barrier bypass
Main power supply connected
Vertical line finder (diagonal pull display)
Cycoptronic
Hourglass
LHM 120-280_002 141

141128
Operating elements
3.5.5 Function keys

Function keys have thick borders are are displayed in the lower area of the
screen (see 'Monitor overview').
Crane operation
Travelling mode
Information screen
Error page (always takes precedence!)
Operating hours screen
Functional enhancement
Data recorder*
Acknowledge
Set hoisting height display to zero
Load taring
Synchronisation
142 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Wheel sets
Automatic supporting*
Cycoptronic, teach-in*
Set time (service hour meter screen)
Speed selection (winch synchronisation screen)
Reset (winch synchronisation screen)
Sycratronic*
Testing the hydraulic oil supply stop valve
LHM 120-280_002 143

141128
Operating elements
3.5.6 Crane operation screen
Figure 42 Power operation screen LHM180-280
Figure 43 Power operation screen LHM 120
144 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.7 Crane operation screen (functional enhancement)
Figure 44 Power operation screen (functional enhancement) LHM180-280
Figure 45 Power operation screen (functional enhancement) LHM 120
LHM 120-280_002 145

141128
Operating elements
3.5.8 Electric motor crane operation screen
Figure 46 Electric motor power operation screen
Figure 47 Power operation screen for electric motor without main power sup
ply connected
146 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.9 Crane operation screen symbols

Crane operation symbols have thin borders are are displayed in the middle area
of the screen (see 'Monitor overview').
Figure 48 Crane operation status
1 Current boom angle

2 Luffing gear speed setting
3 Utilisation level
4 Maximum permitted load on rope
5 Current load on rope
6 Tared load on rope
7 Boom direction of movement
8 Current outreach
9 Relative hook position
Winch - lift
Winch - stopped
Winch - lower
LHM 120-280_002 147

141128
Operating elements
Tank capacity, diesel engine speed (LHM 120-280)
Tank capacity, electric motor speed
Tank capacity, main power supply with or without cable drum connected
Main power supply with or without cable drum connected symbol flashes if there
is no main power supply for the electric motor.
Clock
148 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Diesel engine cooling water temperature (LHM 120-280)
Current electric motor utilisation
Stop
Current load chart
Current wind speed
Current slewing platform position
LHM 120-280_002 149

141128
Operating elements
3.5.10 Travel operation screen
Figure 49 Travel screen LHM 180-280
Figure 50 Travel screen LHM 120
150 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.11 Travel operation screen symbols

Travel operation symbols have thin borders are are displayed in the middle area
of the screen (see 'Monitor overview').
Figure 51 Travel operation status
1 Current boom angle

2 Luffing gear speed setting
3 Maximum permitted load on rope
4 Minimum permitted outreach for travelling mode
5 Maximum permitted outreach for travelling mode
6 Travelling mode ideal position
7 Current outreach
8 Boom direction of movement
9 Tared load on rope
I, II Permitted range
II Ideal range
LHM 120-280_002 151

141128
Operating elements
Supporting
The supporting symbols are always arranged in the same way. The upper two
represent the front left and right, and the lower two represent the rear left and
right supports.
The status of each selected support is shown on the corresponding symbol.
NOTE
Many variations of the individual symbol display is possible. One or all
four symbols change depending on what has been selected.
Support pads up, outriggers folded out
Support pads up, outriggers folded in
Support pads down, outriggers folded out
Support pads down, outriggers folded in
152 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Upper support pads, additional supporting base*
Lower support pads, additional supporting base*
Wheel sets up
Wheel sets down
LHM 120-280_002 153

141128
Operating elements
3.5.12 Wheel set screen
This screen displays information relating to the individual wheel sets. The num
bering as well as the current angular deflection.
Figure 52 Wheel set screen
Wheel set position
154 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.13 Automatic support screen*
Figure 53 Automatic support screen
Automatic support (levelling)
LHM 120-280_002 155

141128
Operating elements
3.5.14 Information screen symbols
Figure 54 Information screen
156 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.15 Information screen symbols
These symbols show the values for the current status of the machine. They
have no function are for information purposes only.
Oil pressure LHM120-280
Engine boost pressure LHM 120-280
Generator
LHM 120-280_002 157

141128
Operating elements
Hydraulic oil tank capacity
Winch 1/2 working pressure
Left slewing gear working pressure
Right slewing gear working pressure
Luffing gear working pressure
Diesel engine disengaged LHM 120-280*
Diesel engine engaged LHM 120-280*
158 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Electric motor 1 engaged LHM 120-280*
Electric motor 1 disengaged LHM 120-280*
Electric motor 2 engaged LHM 120-280*
Electric motor 2 disengaged LHM 120-280*
Battery voltage LHM 120-280
Hydraulic oil temperature LHM 120-280
undercarriage access
Outside temperature*
LHM 120-280_002 159

141128
Operating elements
3.5.16 Error screen
Figure 55 Error screen
3.5.17 Error page symbols
Previous error message
Next error message
Previous error page
Next error page
Acknowledge error message
160 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.18 Service hour meter screen
Figure 56 Service hour meter screen LHM120-280
LHM 120-280_002 161

141128
Operating elements
3.5.19 Service hour meter screen symbols
Engine operating hours LHM 120-280
Hoisting gear 1 operating hours (pendant winch) normal duty
Hoisting gear 1 operating hours (pendant winch) heavy duty
Hoisting gear 2 operating hours (closing winch) normal duty
Hoisting gear 2 operating hours (closing winch) heavy duty
Luffing gear operating hours
Slewing gear operating hours
162 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Travelling gear operating hours
Boom cable drum operating hours*
Electric motor operating hours LHM 120-280*
Cycoptronic operating hours*
Spreader operating hours*
Motor grab operating hours*
Magnet operating hours*
LHM 120-280_002 163

141128
Operating elements
Coil tong operating hours*
Log grab operating hours*
Clock
3.5.20 Winch synchronisation screen*
Figure 57 Winch synchronisation screen LHM 120-280
164 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.21 Winch synchronisation screen symbols*
Current load on rope
Lowering speed
Current rope length difference
Saved rope length difference for hook operation
Saved rope length difference for open grab
LHM 120-280_002 165

141128
Operating elements
Saved rope length difference for closed grab
3.5.22 Data recorder screen*
Figure 58 Data recorder screen
3.5.23 Data recorder screen symbols*
Data recorder status - stop
Hatch (hatch cover) not active
Hatch active
166 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Load on rope (incl. lifting device)
Load cycles
Tared load
Total load
Current slewing platform position
Free flashcard memory*
Change active hatch
Trigger points
LHM 120-280_002 167

141128
Operating elements
3.5.24 Cycoptronic teach-in screen*
Figure 59 Cycoptronic/teach-in - automatic page
3.5.25 Cycoptronic/teach-in - automatic screen - symbols*
Automatic screen
Current position display
Status display
Crane boom position
+ set destination point
168 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Direction information
Set destination points
3.5.26 Hook position screen
Figure 60 Hook position screen
Hook position
LHM 120-280_002 169

141128
Operating elements
Pendulum length
3.5.27 Sycratronic screen*
Figure 61 Sycratronic screen
3.5.28 Sycratronic screen symbols*
Leader crane
Follower crane
Sycratronic selection
170 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
Movement by leader crane
Hoisting gear stop (follower crane)
Hoisting gear lift stop (follower crane)
Hoisting gear lower stop (follower crane)
Luffing gear stop (follower crane)
Luffing gear lift stop (follower crane)
Luffing gear lower stop (follower crane)
Slewing gear stop (follower crane)
Slewing gear left stop (follower crane)
Slewing gear right stop (follower crane)
NOTE
STOP symbols
The STOP symbols for the leader crane are not combined with the
Sycratronic symbol. (See section 'Control elements, Monitor, Status
indicator)
LHM 120-280_002 171

141128
Operating elements
Point display
1 Boom position of own crane

2 Teach-in point
1 2
Utilisation
1 Own crane
2 Other crane
1 2
Teach-in point not set
Teach-in point set
Leader crane display
Follower crane display
Caution
172 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operating elements
3.5.29 Litronic service panel (show)
NOTE
See section 'Control elements/Control units/Litronic service panel'.
Figure 62 Litronic service panel (hidden)
Figure 63 Litronic service panel (shown)
LHM 120-280_002 173

141128
Operating elements
174 LHM 120-280_002
141128
4
141128
4
141128
Operation
4. Operation
4.1 Inspections before daily commissioning
DANGER
Non-compliance with safety regulations!
Safety risk.
Never start the machine when there is visible damage.
Report all defects and errors to the relevant supervisor and to the
Liebherr service department.
When there is a change of machine operator, inform the new operator of
all defects and errors that have been noted.
NOTE
The general safety notes in the 'Safety' section apply to the daily checks!
Refer to 'Maintenance' section for information on lubricants, fuels and fill
capacities.
Ensure that the following conditions are satisfied:

` All maintenance and inspection work has been regularly carried out.
` The operation manual has been read and understood.
` The operation manual is ready to hand in the cab.
` All doors are closed during operation:
S Machinery house
S Switch cabinet room
S Tower
S Maintenance hatch on tower head
LHM 120-280_002 175

141128
Operation
4.1.1 Daily inspection
Before daily commissioning of the machine, perform the following visual inspec
tions:
` Leak check (hydraulic, engine and gear oil, coolant, diesel fuel)
` No damage.
` No contamination.
` Safety devices (see 'Product description, safety devices' section) present
and functional.
` Check for wear to rope and pulleys.
` Safety signs present.
` No obstacles in the working area.
` Slewing platform can turn without restriction.
` Keep a safe distance away from overhead power lines.
` Fire extinguisher present.
` Remove snow and ice.
` Unobstructed view from the cabins (clean windows, rear-view mirror
clean and correctly adjusted).
4.1.2 Daily inspection work
NOTE
Fill level monitoring and refilling of lubricants and fuels is described in
Chapter 5 "Maintenance".
All the necessary safety precautions are in the "Safety" chapter.
` Fill windscreen wash container with non flammable windscreen wash fluid
(use fluid that contains antifreeze in the winter!)
` Check engine oil level.
` Check coolant level.
` Check hydraulic oil level.
` Check distributor gearbox oil level.
` Check diesel level (monitor).
` Check diesel engine, electric motor*, fan and radiator for possible
damage.
` Empty the water separator of the fuel system.
` Check battery main switch.
` Disconnect main power supply*, auxiliary supply* (if travelling mode is
required).
` Ensure that the load chart and operation manual needed for deployment
are present in the cabins.
` Perform daily lubrication according to maintenance schedule (Chapter 5,
Maintenance, Maintenance Schedule).
176 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
` Check stop valve on hydraulic tank (open completely if required)
Figure 64 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve (closed position)

1 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve manual
2 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve automatic (from 2009 with fire detec
tion and fire extinguishing system, see section 'Operation/fire detec
tion and extinguishing system/hydraulic oil supply stop valve')
` Check stop valve on undercarriage fuel tank (open completely if required)
Figure 65 Stop valve on undercarriage fuel tank (open position)
LHM 120-280_002 177

141128
Operation
4.2 Commissioning the machine
CAUTION
Improper procedure in start-up process of machine.
Material damage to the machine.
Ensure that the inspections have been carried out before commissioning.
Ensure that no error messages are indicated.
Ensure that the operation manual has been read and understood.
Follow all safety notes.
In diesel engine operation ensure that the main power supply cable has
been unplugged and wound up, and with older LHM models, even with
switch cabinet X2, power supply has been switched to generator. (With
newer LHM models power supply is switched automatically to generator).
NOTE
Start symbols
For further information see section Operating elements, Litronic monitor,
Start symbols.
4.2.1 Start with diesel engine

0 I
1
u Turn on ignition by turning ignition key (1) to position "I".
w Boot the software.
w Start screen appears.
178 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 66 Start screen preheat
Diesel engine preheat
w After a short time symbol changes to diesel engine ready to start.
Diesel engine ready to start
u Whilst this symbol is displayed, start diesel engine using Engine Start/Stop
button (2) near ignition.
w Diesel engine runs.
w Engine Start/Stop button flashes until machine is ready.
NOTE
Starting is possible exclusively while Diesel Engine Ready to Start is
indicated.
If this symbol goes out, switch off ignition using ignition key (turn to
position "0") then switch on again so that symbol Diesel Engine Ready to
Start appears again.
CAUTION
Non-compliance with warming precautions after starting diesel engines!
Damage to diesel engines!
Allow coolant temperature to increase to 75°C before crane movements
are performed!
LHM 120-280_002 179

141128
Operation
4.2.2 Electric motor*

Take the following precautions to run the machine with electric motors:
Main power supply

CAUTION
The electrical supply (main power supply) can consist of 2 parallel lines. If
only one plug is connected it is possible that the pins of the second plug are
also live.
Electric shock!
Lock power source (provided by customer) with the pilot contacts of the
plugs.
Observe safety notes!
CAUTION
Large current voltage!
Personal injury and material damage.
In travelling mode bring in additional personnel to monitor the travel
movements.
Main power supply must be connected exclusively by trained electricians.
Regularly check cables and plugs on the main power supply for damage
(insulation)
Do not connect or disconnect main power supply under voltage. Ensure
that power source has been switched off.
Switch on main power supply exclusively when both plugs are securely
connected.
CAUTION
Wrong cable duct!
Serious damage to cable and cable drum.
Always route cable drum cable parallel to the undercarriage.
Do not allow the cable drum cable to drag on the ground.
Do not allow the cable plugs to drag on the ground.
Figure 67 Cable drum rope guide
180 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 68 Main power supply without cable drum
Figure 69 Main power supply, cable drum at the back
1 Control unit*
2 Unwind cable drum
3 Wind up cable drum
4 Emergency off switch
LHM 120-280_002 181

141128
Operation
u Connect main power supply under the conditions listed above.

w Symbol appears on the monitor.
Figure 70 Main power supply connected
u To activate the control unit on the cable drum (in order wind up or unwind the
cable drum in travelling mode) manually press the main power supply cable
drum button.
w LED in the button lights up.
w Control unit on the cable drum is activated.
u To deactivate the control unit, press button again.

w The button LED goes out.
w Control unit on the cable drum is deactivated.
NOTE
Ensure that additional personnel are operating the control unit and
monitoring movements.
Additional personnel are linked with the machine operator.
Adjust travel speed!
182 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
CAUTION
Incorrect handling of cable drum!
Damage to cable drum and cable.
When winding up and unwinding the cable on the cable drum pay
attention to how much has already been wound up or unwound. Make
sure that there is a minimum of 2 safety windings wound on it. Otherwise
there is a danger of the cable being pulled out of the threaded cable
connection.
u Press button for automatic cable drum* (exclusively with LPS).

w Cable drum follows automatically.
w No additional personnel required. (With LPS curves are not possible in
travelling mode, and thus the danger of damage is slight.)
Couplings on the distribution gear box
CAUTION
Commissioning is unauthorised until the engines are correctly coupled!
Serious material damage.
Place load on ground.
Emergency off switch on.
u Connect main power supply.

0 I
1
u Turn on ignition by turning ignition key (1) to position "I".
w Warning lights on monitor light up (green and red LEDs).
w Boot the software.
w Start screen appears.
2
LHM 120-280_002 183

141128
Operation
Figure 71 Start screen
u Open information screen by clicking symbol.

w Information screen opens.
Figure 72 Information screen LHM 120-280
184 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
w Current status of coupled engines is indicated.
Example for running electric motor LHM 120-280:
Diesel engine disengaged LHM 120-280
Electric motor 1 engaged LHM 120-280
Electric motor 2 engaged LHM 120-280
NOTE
All variations of the coupling variants LHM 120-280 are listed in section
Controls, Monitor.
Symbols for the coupled engines flash until the engines have been
coupled correctly.
LHM 120-280_002 185

141128
Operation
Figure 73 Electric motorLHM 280 (670KW)
1 Coupling lever for diesel engine

2 Starter button
3 Coupling lever for electric motor
4 Coupling lever for electric motor
Perform the following steps to couple the electric motors:
u Pull button on coupling lever (side of diesel engine) in direction B and push
lever in direction A (depending on desired position) in order to uncouple die
sel engine.
u Pull button on coupling lever (side of electric motors) in direction B and push
lever in direction A (depending on desired position) in order to couple electric
motors.
w Current status of coupled engines is indicated on the monitor.
NOTE
It is possible that the coupling cannot be completely closed because the
pinions are not engaged. When it closes a fully a faint "click" will be heard.
Press starter button (2) to turn drive shaft. The starter button (2) enables
the diesel engine to be turned without actually starting it.
Electric motors should be turned by hand.
186 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 74 Electric motorLHM 120-280 (450KW)
1 Coupling lever
Perform the following steps to couple the electric motors:
u Pull button on coupling lever in direction A and push lever in direction B

w The button of the coupling lever will latch into the new position.
w Diesel engine disengaged.
w Current status of coupled engines is indicated on the monitor.
u To detach electric motors, carry out the above steps in the reverse order.
NOTE
It is possible that the coupling cannot be completely closed because the
pinions are not engaged. When it closes a fully a faint "click" will be heard.
Turn electric motors by hand if they do not engage straight away.
LHM 120-280_002 187

141128
Operation
4.2.3 Starting with electric motor*
CAUTION
Improper operation!
Material damage.
Ensure that all precautions listed above for electric motor operation have
been taken.
Ensure that all safety notes have been read and understood.
0 I
1
u Press button (2) to start electric motors.
w Electric motors run.
NOTE
No warming precautions are necessary for operating with an electric
motor.
4.2.4 Shutting down the machine
NOTE
Only use the emergency stop switches for emergency cut-off, never for
routinely shutting the machine down (see section Product description,
Emergency stop).
Diesel engine
NOTE
After machine has finished working let it run on for a few more minutes
unloaded and idling.
Electric motor*
NOTE
Switch machine off as soon as load has been put down.
188 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.3 Safety lever
The safety lever serves as a safety device against uncontrolled or unwanted

operation of the machine.
u Lower the safety lever.

w Enable operation.
Figure 75 Safety lever
ASafety lever in raised position

` disables the master switch
` all crane or driving movements are stopped.
BSafety lever in lowered position

` is a condition for the operation of the crane
WARNING
If the safety lever is raised during operation, both master switches are
inactive and the crane is brought to a standstill after a few seconds!
Uncontrolled load movements!
Put safety lever in position B to control the machine.
WARNING
Unintentional touching of operating elements with safety lever in lowered
position B.
Uncontrolled machine movements!
Do not leave safe seating position.
Do not put objects on operating elements.
Raise safety lever during breaks (position A).
LHM 120-280_002 189

141128
Operation
4.4 Travelling mode

The travelling mode is operated from the control station in the slewing platform
cabin, or optionally also from the tower cabin. Activation is via master switches.
DANGER
Serious personal injury and material damage, danger of tilting.
The maximum permissible gradient in travelling mode is 5% in the
longitudinal direction and 2% in transverse direction.
Drive exclusively with empty lifting device! Ensure that the load on the
rope does not fall below or exceed the minimum and maximum values
respectively quoted in the load chart for the selected radius.
Travelling mode with attached load is exclusively permissible after written
permission from the manufacturer(LIEBHERR)!
Stop travelling mode at wind speeds above the value quoted in the load
chart.
Check the route to be used for solid and level ground.
Check tyre pressure at 10 bar (not applicable for foamed tyres*).
Do not run over any obstacles higher than 10 cm ((crane rails, etc.).
Consult a banksman every time travelling mode is used! (Specify hand
signals!)
In the absence of visual contact with instructor, stop travelling mode!
Take particular care in narrow passages! (drive slowly)
Ensure that support pads are fully retracted and thus do not touch the
ground during travelling mode.
Ensure that the working area (route) is adequately illuminated at twilight
and when it is dark.
After extended use of travelling mode (2 - 3 km) check tyre temperature
with an appropriate measuring device. Avoid tyre temperatures above 70 -
80°C! To reduce the tyre temperature, support crane to relieve pressure
on tyres.
NOTE
Potholes and road-surface irregularities jeopardise the stability of the
crane!
NOTE
In both travelling mode types the travelling speed with outriggers retracted
is reduced to 30%.
190 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.4.1 Operation
The following conditions apply for normal travel operation and crab mode.
u Ensure that the outreach is in the ideal range.
u Start machine (see section 'Operation, Commissioning the machine').
u Press travelling mode function key on monitor.

w Travel screen appears on monitor.
u Position slewing platform to 0° or 180

w Slewing platform position symbol not flashing.
u Ensure that the tared load on the rope is less than the maximum permissible
load. (See section Travelling mode screen symbols)
u Ensure that the outreach is in the permissible range and in the ideal position
(See section Travelling mode screen symbols).
w Stop symbol disappears.
NOTE
Travelling mode operation mode is exclusively possible if slewing platform
position and stop symbols are not flashing.
LHM 120-280_002 191

141128
Operation
4.4.2 Normal travel operation
u Press travelling mode button on X25 control panel.

w Travelling mode symbol appears in the status indicator of the monitor.
w Warning light on undercarriage lights up.
Changing between normal travel operation and crab mode:
C u Move wheel sets into supported state by moving right-hand master switch
0° or 180° (straight on).
w Travelling gear synchronous 0° / 180° symbol appears on the monitor.
192 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 78 Travel screen LHM 120 with straight wheel sets
NOTE
Travelling gear synchronous symbol flashes when wheel sets not
synchronous. (See section Operation, travelling mode, steering
synchronisation)
CAUTION
Non-synchronous wheel sets in travelling mode!
Severe damage to travelling gear.
Support machine.
Synchronise wheel sets.
LHM 120-280_002 193

141128
Operation
u Retract support pads fully. (see section Operation, support)

w Monitor display changes.
Figure 79 Travel screen LHM 180-280 with straight wheel sets
CAUTION
Support pads not fully retracted!
Damage to surface, material damage to the machine.
Support pads at least 20 cm away from ground.
NOTE
For optimal safety fully extend outriggers and support pads in parallel to
undercarriage.
If necessary, retract outriggers to the mechanical stop (see section
Operation, support bases) and secure support pads against turning using
the adjusting device to avoid damage to wheel sets.
In the event of lack of space, remove support pads, adjusting device,
mechanical stops (see Section operation, support) and fully fold in
outriggers. Keep the lower balls of the supporting cylinder at least 20 cm
from the ground.
NOTE
only travel at 25% of the maximum travel speed when the support pads
are dismantled.
only fold in outriggers to the mechanical stop and do not remove support
pads.
194 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
NOTE
Only accelerate and brake machine slowly and gently due to its high
mass.
Acoustic warning signal sounds when driving the machine.
During travelling mode it is not possible to adjust the outriggers.
u Move left-hand master switch in direction B.

w Machine travels forwards.
B u Move left-hand master switch in direction A.
w Machine travels backwards.
u Move right-hand master switch in direction D.

w Machine steers left.
C u Move right-hand master switch in direction C.
w Machine steers right.
NOTE
The steering is blocked when the machine is not supported and not
travelling!
Two options to enable the steering:
Machine supported and travelling mode active.
Machine standing on the wheel sets, travelling mode active and travelling
speed greater than 0.5 km/h.
NOTE
Master switches jump back automatically into neutral position when
released. The steering angle nevertheless remains in the position it was
previously put in. To bring the wheel sets back to 0° or 180°, steer in the
opposite direction.
LHM 120-280_002 195

141128
Operation
4.4.3 Crab mode
DANGER
Failure to comply with safety notes!
All conditions for travelling mode are fulfilled (see section Operation,
travelling mode, operation).
Particular care called for in crab mode. Greater danger of tilting!
NOTE
Position wheel sets at 0° or 180° to select crab mode.
u Press crab mode button on X25 control panel.

w Crab mode symbol and direction indication for wheel sets appear in the
status indicator of the monitor.
w Warning light on undercarriage lights up.
196 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
The direction indication in the status indicator on the monitor changes depen
ding upon the direction of the wheel sets.
B
w The direction indication changes depending upon the orientation of the
wheel sets.
Examples:
Direction indication left
Direction indication straight on
Direction indication right
DANGER
Failure to adhere to conditions for crab mode!
Danger of tilting, severe damage to travelling gear.
Synchronous wheel sets (See section Operation, travelling mode, normal
travel operation)
Retract the support pads.
Only accelerate and brake machine slowly and gently (particularly in crab
mode) due to its high mass.
NOTE
Acoustic warning signal sounds when driving the machine.
During travelling mode it is not possible to adjust the outriggers.
LHM 120-280_002 197

141128
Operation

w Machine travels forwards.
B u Move left-hand master switch in direction A.
w Machine travels backwards.
u Move right-hand master switch in direction D.

w Wheel sets turn to the left.
C u Move right-hand master switch in direction C.
w Wheel sets turn to the right.
NOTE
The steering is blocked when the machine is not supported and not
travelling!
2 options to enable the steering:
Machine supported and travelling mode active.
Machine standing on the wheel sets, travelling mode active and travelling
speed greater than 0.5 km/h.
NOTE
Master switches jump back automatically into neutral position when
released. The steering angle nevertheless remains in the position it was
previously put in. To bring the wheel sets back to 0° or 180°, steer in the
opposite direction.
198 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.4.4 Steering synchronisation
An angle sensor that displays the current position of the wheel set in question is
installed on each wheel set.
Travelling gear synchronous symbol flashes:

` if a wheel set exhibits an excessively high angular deflection in compa
rison to the others.
Travelling gear synchronous symbol is constantly lit:

` wheel sets parallel to the longitudinal axis of the undercarriage.
Figure 81 Travel screen LHM 120 with flashing symbol
NOTE
Travelling mode not possible whilst travelling gear synchronous symbol
flashing!
u Support machine (see section Operation, support)
u Turn wheel sets to the left (D) or right (C) using right-hand master switch
C until travelling gear synchronous symbol ceases to flash.
u If it is not possible to synchronise the wheel sets contact LIEBHERR service

department.
LHM 120-280_002 199

141128
Operation
u To check which wheel set lies outside the tolerance, switch to wheel set
screen.
u Press wheel set function key on the monitor.

w Wheel set screen opens.
Figure 82 Wheel set screen LHM 120-280
Wheel set position
The upper value represents the current angular deflection (flashes if outside the
permitted tolerance, in which case travelling mode no longer possible)
The lower value shows the wheel set number.
200 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.4.5 Steering examples
Figure 83 Travelling mode straight on
Figure 84 Travelling mode any desired radius, 360° rotation
LHM 120-280_002 201

141128
Operation
Figure 85 Travelling mode diagonal and sideways
202 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.5 Supporting the machine
DANGER
Improper supporting of machine!
Danger of tilting!
Outriggers are fully folded out.
Support pads are standing on secure and solid ground.
Contact surfaces of the support pads have been checked.
Machine is horizontally aligned (according to circular spirit level).
Wheel sets are relieved of load and raised from the ground.
CAUTION
Lack of attention when working with outriggers and support pads!
Severe damage to machine.
Retract support pads before outriggers are folded in!
Have outrigger movements monitored by additional personnel!
Always ensure that support pads are fully in contact with solid and level
ground!
4.5.1 Supporting the machine manually
Outriggers
The arrangement of the 4 buttons on the X26 control panel or the X25 control
panel (slewing platform cabin without monitor)* is identical to the arrangement
of the outriggers on the undercarriage. Front left / right and rear left / right.
u Press button of desired outrigger. (If required, all 4 buttons at the same time)
w LED in the button(s) light(s) up.
u Fold out outriggers

u Press button on X26 control panel or X25 control panel (slewing platform
cabin without monitor) until the desired position of the outriggers is attained.
w LED glows as long as button is pressed.
w The current status of the outriggers is displayed on the travel operation
screen.
LHM 120-280_002 203

141128
Operation
u Fold in outriggers
u Press button on X26 control panel or X25 control panel (slewing platform
cabin without monitor) until the desired position of the outriggers is attained.
w The current status of the outriggers is displayed on the travel operation
screen.
CAUTION
Folding in outriggers with support pads fitted!
Severe material damage.
Remove support pads before fully retracting outriggers.
NOTE
The speed of travelling mode is reduced to 30% with outriggers folded in.
Supporting cylinder
The arrangement of the 4 buttons on the X26 control panel or the X25 control
panel (slewing platform cabin without monitor)* is identical to the arrangement
of the supporting cylinders (support pads) of the outriggers on the undercar
riage. Front left / right and rear left / right.
u Press buttons of desired 2 supporting cylinders (support pads). (If required,

all 4 buttons at the same time or otherwise in pairs)
w LED in the button(s) light(s) up.
NOTE
Do not select supporting cylinders (support pads) individually or in
diagonally arranged pairs.
u Retract supporting cylinder.

u Press button on the X26 control panel or the X25 control panel (slewing plat
form cabin without monitor)* until the supporting cylinder is fully folded in and
wheel sets are in contact with the ground.
w The current status of the supporting cylinders (support pads) is displayed
on the travel operation screen.
204 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Extend supporting cylinder

u Press button on the X26 control panel or the X25 control panel (slewing plat
form cabin without monitor)* until the supporting cylinder is fully extended
and wheel sets have no contact with the ground.
w The current status of the supporting cylinders (support pads) is displayed
on the travel operation screen.
Figure 86 Travel operation screen with current status of outriggers
NOTE
Support symbols flash whilst a movement of the outriggers or supporting
cylinders is taking place.
Support pads up, outriggers folded out
Support pads up, outriggers not fully folded out
LHM 120-280_002 205

141128
Operation
Support pads down, outriggers folded out
Support pads down, outriggers not fully folded out
Wheel sets up
Wheel sets down
u Using the spirit level, adjust the support of the machine until the bubble of
the spirit level is central.
Figure 87 Tower cabin spirit level
206 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.5.2 Supporting the machine automatically *
Fulfil the following conditions to activate the automatic support:

` diesel engine or electric motor is running.
` boom is in travelling window.
` the position of the slewing platform is at 0° or 180°.
` outriggers are fully folded out.
` supporting cylinders are not selected.
` no crane operation mode is active (hook operation, rotator, etc.)
` crane operation mode (normal or crab mode) is selected.
` No error message for wheel set sensors or inclination angle sensors.
` lateral and longitudinal inclination is within the ±3° tolerance.
` master switch is in neutral position.
u Press travelling mode function key on monitor.

w Travel operation screen opens.
u Press automatic support function key on monitor.

w Automatic support screen opens.
Figure 88 Automatic support screen LHM 120-280
LHM 120-280_002 207

141128
Operation
u Press automatic support button on X26 control panel or X25 control panel
(slewing platform cabin without monitor).
w If the button LED flashes, ensure that all conditions are fulfilled.
u Move left-hand master switch in direction B until optimal position is attained.

w Supporting cylinders are extended.
B u Move left-hand master switch in direction A until optimal position is attained.
w Support cylinders are retracted.
1 The display of the automatic support shows the momentary horizontal position
of the machine by means of the cursor (Item 1).
If the cursor is in the middle of the display, the machine is horizontally sup
ported. The display starts to flash and an acoustic signal sounds for approx. 3
seconds.
The supporting phase ends automatically as soon as the machine is horizon
tally aligned.
NOTE
Once the machine is horizontally aligned, extension automatically
continues for a further 3 seconds. Movement then stops automatically.
To repeat the process, first put master switch in neutral position. Since the
machine is already horizontally aligned, extension again takes place
automatically for 3 seconds.
If the process is repeated too often, a supporting cylinder can become
fully extended so that only the other 3 supporting cylinders can be
extended. The machine may then be tilted.
208 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.5.3 Support cylinder pressure information
Figure 89 Support cylinder pressure information symbol
This symbol flashes on the monitor if at least one supporting cylinder has too
little pressure. This is purely for information.
NOTE
If the boom of the machine moves diagonally (via an outrigger) towards
maximum outreach, it is possible that the opposite supporting cylinder lifts
off the ground. However, there is no danger as 3-point support still exists.
LHM 120-280_002 209

141128
Operation
4.5.4 Choose additional supporting base*
To select an additional supporting base, initiate the following steps:

u Fully fold out outriggers with retracted support pads..
u Fold in supporting base intermediate piece with raised lug and secure using
lug.
u Fold in outriggers to the stop (support base intermediate piece).
Figure 90 Additional supporting base intermediate piece
210 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 91 Additional supporting base
Upper support pads, additional supporting base*
Lower support pads, additional supporting base*
CAUTION
Supporting base intermediate piece not observed!
Material damage.
When fully folding in the outriggers, ensure that the supporting base
intermediate pieces are fully in contact with the outriggers.
LHM 120-280_002 211

141128
Operation
4.5.5 Support pads
NOTE
fully fold out the outriggers to assemble or dismantle support pads.
dismantle support pads to traverse narrow passages.
only travel at 25% of the maximum travel speed when the support pads
are dismantled.
only retract outriggers to the mechanical stop anddo not dismantle
support pads.
Figure 92 Support pad
1 Support pad
2 Transport device (fork-lift truck)
3 Supporting cylinder
DANGER
Improper alignment of support pads!
Align support pads parallel to undercarriage (0° or 180°).
212 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 93 Assembly/dismantling of support pads
1 Ball joint
2 Fastening pin
3 Cotter pin
u Position support pad on the transport device using fork-lift truck.

u Lower ball joint (1) of the supporting cylinder into support pad.
u Apply fastening pin (2) and secure using cotter pin (3).
w Support pad is fitted.
NOTE
To dismantle the support pads, reverse the assembly procedure.
LHM 120-280_002 213

141128
Operation
Double support pads"
Figure 94 Double support pad
1 Support pad
2 Transport device (fork-lift truck)
3 Double support pad traverse
4 Supporting cylinder
5 Adjusting device
NOTE
The retraction speed of the double support pads is slower than that of the
standard support pads due to the additional weight.
DANGER
Improper alignment of support pads!
Align support pads parallel to undercarriage (0° or 180°).
214 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 95 Assembly/dismantling of double support pads
NOTE
To assemble/dismantle the double support pads, follow the assembly
procedure for standard support pads.
LHM 120-280_002 215

141128
Operation
4.6 Crane operation

Crane operation is controlled from control station in tower cabin. Activation is
via master switches.
NOTE
Crane can only be operated if machine is properly supported (see chapter
Operation, support) and an operation mode (Spreader, Grab, etc.) has
been selected.
Selection of operation mode is exclusively possible if master switches are
in neutral position.
An exception is support. Even without selection of an operating mode
supporting cylinders can be extended (if machine must be re-levelled
when starting up crane operation again).
DANGER
Very serious damage to equipment and personal injury or death.
Attend to failure indications on monitor.
Stop crane operation in the event of a failure of the load moment limiter.
Ensure that all outriggers are swung out, support pads are on a firm
surface, machine is horizontally aligned and all wheel sets are in the air.
(See chapter Operation, support)
Do not raise any load heavier than specified in the load chart (see section
Product description, load chart) for the relevant operation mode.
Execute crane movements smoothly and without jerking and adapt
working speed to load and outreach so that load does not swing.
Ensure that lifting device used has required capacity.
Observe the wind speed specified in the applicable load chart! Stop crane
operation if wind speed exceeds maximum permitted.
Ensure that all sensors, limit switches and angle sensors are working
properly.
Ensure that no unauthorised personnel are in working area or danger
zone of crane.
Ensure that the working area is adequately illuminated at twilight and
when it is dark.
Define hand signals (see chapter on Safety) and ensure that line of sight
between operator and banksman is clear. If a clear line of sight is not
possible, establish a radio link.
ECO operation*
All crane movements and operation modes can be fitted with economy soft
ware. Engine rpm adapts dynamically to requirements and thus consumes less
diesel fuel.
216 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.6.1 Crane movements

HOIST GEAR (raise / lower lifting device)
RIGHT-HAND master switch controls hoist gear.
B C
Direction A: raise hoisting gear
Direction B: lower hoisting gear

D A
LUFFING GEAR (raise / lower boom)
LEFT-HAND master switch controls luffing gear.
D B
Direction A: raise luffing gear
Direction B: lower luffing gear

A C
Luffing gear working speed

Press button (on control console X26) to change maximum speed of luffing
gear. Press button more than once to switch from level 1 - 3.
1 100% luffing gear speed
Selected step (1 - 3) is shown on monitor (see chapter Operation, monitor,

crane operation page symbols, item 2 in operation status figure).
NOTE
Set luffing gear speed is stored when machine is switched off and
selected again when it starts up.
LHM 120-280_002 217

141128
Operation
SLEWING GEAR (Slewing platform to LEFT / RIGHT)
LEFT-HAND master switch controls slewing gear.
D B
Direction D: slewing gear to LEFT
Direction C: slewing gear to RIGHT

A C
Slewing gear speed
Press button (on control console X26) to change maximum speed of slewing
gear. Press button more than once to switch from level 1 - 3.
1 100% swing speed

2 80% swing speed
3 50% swing speed
Selected level (1 - 3) is shown on monitor (current slewing platform position)

between arrows.
NOTE
Set swing speed is stored when machine is switched off and selected
again when it starts up.
218 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Slewing gear brake
Up to Software 993390314 - 021:

u See chapter Operation, Litronic to call up current software version.
If machine is at a standstill slewing gear brake engages after 12 seconds.
u In the event of a standstill, press button 9 on LEFT and RIGHT master swit
ches.
9 w Slewing gear brake engages prematurely.
w Key press is not stored.
u Optionally, it is possible to press button 9 on LEFT master switch when at a

standstill (slewing gear master switch at zero).
w Slewing gear brake engages immediately.
w Key press is stored.
Software 993390314 - 023 and later:

If machine is at a standstill slewing gear brake engages after 12 seconds.
u In the event of a standstill, press button 9 on LEFT or RIGHT master switch.

w Slewing gear brake engages prematurely.
9
w Key press is not stored.
u Optionally, you can press button 9 on LEFT and RIGHT joystick when at a
standstill (slewing gear joystick in neutral position).
w Slewing gear brake engages immediately.
w Key press is stored.
LHM 120-280_002 219

141128
Operation
4.6.2 Stop crane movements

Reaching the relevant stop conditions causes hoisting gear, luffing gear or sle
wing gear to stop automatically and movement in direction currently displayed is
no longer possible.
Figure 96 Location of stop symbols on screen
Hoisting gear lift-lower stop
Hoisting gear lift stop
Hoisting gear lower stop
Luffing gear raise-lower stop
Luffing gear raise stop
220 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Luffing gear lower stop
Slewing gear stop
Example:
Entering crane via undercarriage (by opening flap) triggers slewing gear stop
and slewing gear stop icon appears on screen.
Slewing gear left stop*
NOTE
Slewing gear left stop and slewing gear right stop are only exclusively
executed and displayed with anti-collision systems* and customer-specific
NRS land-sea page*.
LHM 120-280_002 221

141128
Operation
4.7 Fuelling
DANGER
Fuel spilt during refuelling!
Burns, explosion.
Wipe up spillage with a clean cloth leaving no residue.
Figure 97 Filler neck
1 Lock
2 Filler neck
u Use key to open lock.
u Remove the cover.
u Check filler screen underneath for dirt, clean if necessary and replace.
u Fill tank with fuel.
u Close tank cap once more and secure with lock.
222 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.8 Air cooling
On machines that do not have a fire alarm and extinguishing system* air circu
lation is controlled manually:
` Machinery house
` Switch cabinet room
Figure 98 Machinery house cooler fan flaps
1 Fan flap with lever

2 Fan flap with slide mechanism
u Open fan flap during operation.

w Air circulation and sufficient cooling are guaranteed.
u On machines with low temperature package* fan flap will close while ma
chine warms up.
w No energy loss due to outflow of heat.
CAUTION
Ventilation system faulty!
Overheating and deformation of various components (caused by excessively
high temperature).
Always keep fan flap open during operation.
LHM 120-280_002 223

141128
Operation
Figure 99 Switch cabinet room ventilation system.
u Open switch cabinet room ventilation system during operation.

w Air circulation and sufficient cooling are guaranteed.
u On machines with low temperature package* switch cabinet room ventilation

system will close while machine warms up.
w No energy loss due to outflow of heat.
224 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.9 Boom cable drum
During crane operation the boom cable drum supplies load lifting devices with
electrical voltage and control commands.
Boom cable drums have two operation modes:

` Manual mode
` Automatic mode
Figure 100 Boom cable drum
CAUTION
Improper operation!
The operator must make sure that no one is in the safety area of the
crane (see section 'Safety, Danger zone')
In the event of a malfunction of the cable drum, the cable drum is
switched off automatically, the brake is applied, and an error message is
displayed on the monitor.
To set the load down on the ground, slowly lower the hoisting gear. The
brake drags in its engaged state.
If the cable was pulled off against the applied brake, check the brake to
ensure that the air gap and braking torque are set correctly. Contact after
sales service!
LHM 120-280_002 225

141128
Operation
4.9.1 Manual mode
CAUTION
Improper operation of the cable drum!
Damage to the plug of the cable drum cable.
In manual mode wind and unwind boom cable drum slowly exclusively.
u Press the Boom cable drum manual mode button.

w Boom cable drum manual mode is active.
u Move the master switch in the desired direction.

w The cable drum moves in the desired direction.
B C
Direction A: raise cable drum
D Direction B: lower cable drum

A
NOTE
If the cable drum rope becomes slack during operation, tighten the cable
of the boom cable drum as described.
CAUTION
Slack cable on cable drum!
Damage to cable on cable drum.
If the cable is not required, wind it up completely and secure it or park it in
the cable garage* (see section 'Operation, Cable garage).
4.9.2 Automatic mode

Automatic mode is activated as soon as:
` machine has been started and generator is running.
` cable has been connected to the lifting device.
` crane operation has been selected.
The cable is tensioned automatically and follows the hoisting gear raise/lower
movements.
NOTE
On machines that were supplied before 2004 it is possible to actively
select automatic mode.
Boom cable drum automatic mode (LHM before 2004)

u Press the boom cable drum automatic mode button.
w Boom cable drum automatic mode is active.
226 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.10 Cable retainer*, cable duct*

To avoid damage to cable and cable plug, the cable can be secured on the ca
ble drum boom.
Figure 101 Cable retainer
Figure 102 |Cable duct
LHM 120-280_002 227

141128
Operation
4.10.1 Operation
CAUTION
Bypass limit switches!
No automatic switch-off of cable drum.
Feed the cable into the cable retainer with the utmost care.
It is the machine operator's responsibility to decide how far and how long
he can continue hoisting without damaging the cable.
u Press Manual Cable Drum Boom* button on control panel X25.

u Key in Service Winch Operation Mode key switch to position II.

I 0 II
1
1 winch selection
` Position 0: Deactivates or bypasses top-limit switch
` Position II: Pendant winch
2
2 Activation
u Press and hold down Cable Retainer button on control panel X25.
w LED in the button remains lit for as long as the button is pressed.
u Move right joystick in direction A or B.
B C Direction A: raise hoisting gear
Direction B: lower hoisting gear
D A
228 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.11 Auxiliary supply
During crane operation all power supply is via the generator. In order to main
tain lighting and heating during crane downtime, connect auxiliary supply (from
port, etc.).
NOTE
In order to prevent condensation in electrical systems and switch
cabinets, operate anti condensation heating (especially in winter).
Ensure that auxiliary supply is adapted to local conditions.
Figure 103 Auxiliary supply
1 Auxiliary supply cable drum*

2 Auxiliary supply cable drum plug*
3 Auxiliary supply socket
4 Socket (230/110V)
u Connect plug (2) to auxiliary supply socket (3).
u Connect plug for auxiliary supply cable drum (not shown) to the national
power supply provided.
NOTE
If no auxiliary supply cable drum is available (since optional), connect the
national power supply provided directly to the auxiliary supply plug.
LHM 120-280_002 229

141128
Operation
WARNING
Improper operation of the auxiliary supply!
Personal injury and material damage due to electric shock.
Never reconnect plugs when live!
Before connecting plugs, ensure that all consumers are switched off.
Fold up safety snap connector on the plug and withdraw plug.
Seal the plug and socket with the protective covers to keep out dirt and
moisture.
Fully wind up the auxiliary supply cable and remove from working area.
Figure 104 Undercarriage plug*
The undercarriage plug* shown above supplies power as long as the diesel en
gine is running and the auxiliary or main power supply is plugged in.
The undercarriage plug is adapted to the respective electrical power network of

the destination.
230 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.12 Correcting rope twist
Liebherr recommends: To extend the life of ropes, twist ropes in direction of

closing:
` on initial fitting
` after renewing the ropes
` when changing lifting device attached directly to ropes.
NOTE
Before correcting rope twist:
perform a few alternating loads to build up tension in the ropes.
Figure 105 Correct rope twist
1 Crowbar
2 Chain
3 Rope
u Set lifting device down on ground and ensure that ropes are loose.
u Remove ropes.
u Wind chain (2) around rope (3).
u Using a crowbar (1) turn rope in closing direction using approx 100-200Nm.
u Fasten turned rope to lifting device.
u Repeat steps for all ropes.

w Rope twist is now corrected and life extended.
LHM 120-280_002 231

141128
Operation
4.13 Rope length
u Press functional enhancement button.

w Functional enhancement screen page opens.
Figure 107 Power operation screen (functional enhancement) LHM 180-280
232 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Press Hook position button.

w Hook position screen opens.
Figure 108 Hook position screen
u Position hook at desired hoisting height and press hook position button.
w Hook position is zeroed.
w Use to check hook position.
On older LHM models with Cycoptronic this button was needed to determined
pendulum length.
LHM 120-280_002 233

141128
Operation
4.14 Hook
DANGER
Serious material damage and personal injury.
Attend to the failure indications on the monitor.
If load moment limiter fails, stop crane operation.
Do not raise any load heavier than specified in the load chart for the
relevant operation mode.
Ensure that no unauthorised personnel are in the working area or danger
zone of the machine.
when it is dark.
To prevent slacking of rope when changing lifting device or working in
Service Winch operation mode, ensure winches are monitored by an
additional authorised person who is in telephone contact with machine
operator!
CAUTION
Improper procedure when fitting the lifting device!
Damage to the ropes.
Before fitting ropes to the lifting device, pretension to approx. 100-200 Nm
in the direction of rotation of the rope (see section Operation, ropes).
CAUTION
Slack cable on cable drum!
Damage to cable on cable drum.
If the cable is not required, wind it up completely and secure it or park it in
the cable garage* (see section 'Operation, Cable garage).
234 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.14.1 Operation
u If necessary, suspend cable of boom cable drum from lifting device and wind
up fully.
u Select crane operation hook (NL) or crane operation (HL)* using the button
on the X25 control panel:
Crane operation hook normal load (NL)
Crane operation hook heavy load (HL)*
w Depending upon the selected operation mode (hook NL or hook HL) the
appropriate status indicator appears on the monitor.
Figure 109 Mode screen hook NL
LHM 120-280_002 235

141128
Operation
Figure 110 Mode screen hook HL
Boom cable drum manual
u Deselect boom cable drum using button on X25 control panel.

236 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.15 Rotator*
DANGER
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of rotator for damage, leakage, etc.
Ensure that all electrical connections are clean and dry.
Store rotator according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of rotator
manufacturer!
Exercise extreme caution when rotating especially long or bulky goods.
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
If using a rotator that is not part of scope of supply, ensure rotator is
suitable for this machine!
LHM 120-280_002 237

141128
Operation
Figure 111 Rotator for 4 ropes
1 Cable of boom cable drum

2 Rope
3 Strain relief
4 Cable plug of boom cable drum
5 Connector
6 Shackle
238 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 112 Rotator for 2 ropes
1 Cable of boom cable drum

2 Rope
3 Strain relief
4 Cable plug of boom cable drum
5 Connector
LHM 120-280_002 239

141128
Operation
4.15.1 Installation
u Position rotator about 15m away from crane (e.g. on a pallet).
u Connect ropes with a shackle (if 4 ropes) or without a shackle (if 2 ropes).
(See illustrations)
u Lower cable of the boom cable drum to the ground in manual mode.
u Ensure diesel engine is not running.
u Fix cable sock and strain relief.
CAUTION
No zero potential on plug!
Material damage and personal injury from electric shock.
Switch off machine before connecting/disconnecting cable.
u Connect cable of the boom cable drum and also attach to the rotator using a
chain.
u Start the machine.
CAUTION
Improper operation of the cable drum!
Damage to the plug of the cable drum cable.
In manual mode wind and unwind boom cable drum slowly exclusively.
u Tension the boom cable drum cable carefully using the joystick.
u Deselect boom cable drum manual mode.

w Machine is ready for rotator operation.
4.15.2 Operation
Rotator
u Select rotator using button on control panel X25.

w Screen display is updated according to the preselected operation mode
(NL hook or HL* hook).
Rotator operation for heavy load (HL) and normal load (NL) is determined by
the preselection. You can also select free-wheeling of the rotator.
When rotator operation is selected, normal load (NL) is preset automatically.
u Press the button on control panel X25 to select heavy load (HL) rotator ope
ration.
240 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 113 NL rotator screen display LHM 180-280
Figure 114 HL rotator screen display LHM 120
LHM 120-280_002 241

141128
Operation
u Press button 1 on the left-hand joystick.

w The rotator turns to the left (while the button is held down).

w The rotator turns to the right (while the button is held down).

w Free-wheel is activated (while the button is held down).
Rotator free-wheel additional mode

NOTE
Rotator free-wheel mode is an additional function. To select this function:
Select rotator free-wheel additional mode.
u Select rotator with free-wheel using the button on control panel X25.
w Screen display is updated according to the preselected operation mode
(NL hook or HL* hook).

w The rotator turns to the left (while the button is held down).

w The rotator turns to the right (while the button is held down).

w Free-wheel stops
242 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.16 Spreader
DANGER
Use spreader exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of spreader for damage, leakage, etc.
Store spreader according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of spreader
manufacturer!
operator!
WARNING
Containers offer large surface area susceptible to wind!
If a container (take special care with empty containers) is hoisted from the ship
hatch, the wind can catch it and thus controlled unloading is no longer
guaranteed (see chapter Safety, dangers, danger from action of wind).
Adjust spreader mode immediately if equilibration fails!
NOTE
If using a spreader that is not part of scope of supply, ensure spreader is
LHM 120-280_002 243

141128
Operation
4.16.1 Installation
Figure 115 Spreader pins
1 Cable
2 Securing pin
3 Connecting pin
NOTE
Attach spreader to already slung rotator (see chapter
Operation/rotator/assembly).
u Position spreader approx. 15m away from crane.
u Position hook of rotator above spreader opening.
u Insert connecting pin (3) in opening and secure with securing pin (2).
u Switch off machine in order to connect spreader cable (1) to rotator.
CAUTION
244 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
WARNING
Spreader malfunction!
Move all personnel out of danger zone.
Figure 116 Spreader rigged to rotator
u Start machine and raise spreader.

w Machine is ready for spreader operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect spreader mode.
u Position spreader approx. 15m away from crane.
u Switch off machine.
CAUTION
u Loosen and remove all pins.

w Spreader is disassembled
LHM 120-280_002 245

141128
Operation
4.16.2 Operation
NOTE
When changing between a motor grab, spreader and magnet the
following connectors must be disconnected (on LHM 120-280 plugs are
fitted inside the switch cabinet room):
` With spreader =DB+4B-X22.S
` With motor grab =DB+4B-X23.S
` With magnet =DB+4B-X24.S
Figure 117 Spreader overview (symbols)
1 Flippers
2 Equilibration
3 Opening
4 Twistlock
u Start rotator operation mode (see chapter Operation, rotator).
u Select spreader operation mode on control panel X25:
w LED in button lights up

w Spreader operation mode appears in status display.
246 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 118 Spreader mode screen
NOTE
Automatic selection
If machine is already running and cable from boom cable drum is already
connected to rotator, rotator operation mode is automatically selected,
Boom cable drum is automatically selected.
LHM 120-280_002 247

141128
Operation
Flippers
Spreader control is designed for a spreader with four flippers (paired flippers).
Control flippers (paired flippers) with right joystick.
NOTE
Colour coding on buttons matches flipper colours.
Fold flippers down:
u Press button 1.
w red flipper down.
u Press button 2.
w black flipper down.
u Press button 3.
w white flipper down.
u Press button 4.
w green flipper down.
Fold flippers up:
u Press button 6.
w All flippers up.
NOTE
Normally all flippers move up together exclusively.
Optionally it is also possible to move flippers back up individually with the
same button.
248 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Twistlocks
NOTE
Land spreader in order to lock twistlocks.
u Land spreader on container.

w Spreader landed symbol appears on monitor.
Figure 119 Spreader screen - spreader landed
NOTE
To prevent slack rope or possible damage, “lower hoisting gear” function
is disabled as soon as spreader has landed.
LHM 120-280_002 249

141128
Operation
Figure 120 Spreader screen - spreader landed - lower hoisting gear stop
Spreader - lower hoisting gear stop - bypass
Use right joystick to control "spreader - lower hoisting gear stop - bypass" func
tion.
u Press and hold button 5.

w Although spreader has landed, hoisting gear can be lowered.
Control twistlocks with right joystick.
u Move master switch in direction D.

B C w Lock twistlocks.
u Move master switch in direction C.
D w Unlock twistlocks.
A
250 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 121 Spreader screen - twistlocks unlocked
Figure 122 Spreader screen - twistlocks locked
LHM 120-280_002 251

141128
Operation
NOTE
When twistlocks are in locked position spreader mode cannot be selected.
Depending on spreader equipment various procedures (e.g.spreader
landed, twistlocks locked, etc.) are shown by display lamps on spreader
(see spreader documentation).
"Lift hoisting gear" function is disabled if twistlocks are not fully locked.
Equilibration
Use equilibration to balance differing weight distribution in container. Control

weight distribution with left joystick.
NOTE
The 2 colours black and white relate to the colours of the black and white
spreader flippers.
u Press button 2.
w Equilibration moves towards black flipper.
u Press button 4.
w Equilibration moves towards white flipper.
Telescopingin and out
NOTE
Telescoping in and out is possible exclusively when no load is suspended
from spreader.
There are 2 possible ways of retracting and extending the spreader.
Extendspreader using button on control panel X25:
u Press button.
w Spreaderextends to next limit switch of preset position.
252 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Retract spreader using button on control panel X25:
u Press button.
w Spreader telescopes to next limit switch of preset position.
Use right joystick to extend spreader:
u Move joystick briefly in direction C.

B C w Spreader telescopes to next limit switch of preset position.
D A
Use right joystick to retract spreader:
u Move joystick briefly in direction D.

B C w Spreader telescopes to next limit switch of preset position.
D A
LHM 120-280_002 253

141128
Operation
4.17 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)*
The Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) detects a gap between two con
tainers. It helps the machine operator to recognize the dangerous situation
where two 20-ft containers are beneath a 40-ft spreader.
DANGER
Improper locking of the twistlock!
Container falls.
Observe safety notes!
DANGER
Carry out a visual check of spreader for damage, leakage, etc.
Store spreader according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of spreader
manufacturer!
WARNING
Containers offer large surface area susceptible to wind!
If a container (take special care with empty containers) is hoisted from the ship
hatch, the wind can catch it and thus controlled unloading is no longer
guaranteed (see chapter Safety, dangers, danger from action of wind).
Adjust spreader mode immediately if equilibration fails!
NOTE
If using a spreader that is not part of scope of supply, ensure spreader is
254 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.17.1 Operation
u Start rotator operation mode (see section 'Operation, rotator').
u Position the rotator hook in the spreader opening with optional TTDS and
secure with pins.
u Connect the spreader cable to the rotator socket.
u Hoist the spreader and extend to 40 feet (see chapter Operation, spreader,
extend and retract)
NOTE
Ensure that additional personnel are available to oversee TTDS mode..
u Select spreader operation mode on control panel X25:

w Spreader operation mode appears in status display.
Figure 123 Spreader mode screen
LHM 120-280_002 255

141128
Operation
NOTE
Automatic selection
u Press Twinspreader mode button on control panel X25.

w LED lights up.
w Additional twistlocks extend.
u Land spreader on container. (see chapter Operation, spreader).
u Lock twistlocks. (see chapter Operation, spreader).
w Twistlocks locked symbol appears on monitor.
u Lift container.
u Press Twinspreader mode button on control panel X25.
w LED goes out.
w Twinspreader mode selected.
TTDS Bypass
TTDS enables detection of two 20-ft containers. The twistlocks cannot be
locked if TTDS does not detect the 2 containers. To guarantee locking of the
twistlocks in spite of this, there is a TTDS bypass function (e.g. for lifting an
open 40-ft container).
u Land spreader on container. (see chapter Operation, spreader).

u Press TTDS bypass button on control panel X25.
w LED glows for as long as spreader is lifted.
u Lock twistlocks. (see chapter Operation, spreader).
w Twistlocks locked symbol appears on monitor.
u Lift container.
Automatic selection if:

` no landed signal.
` no detection of two 20 ft containers.
` twin spreader selected.
` spreader deselected.
` TTDS bypass deselected.
NOTE
When bypass is active TTDS is only bypassed while spreader is landed.
256 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.18 Man riding*
WARNING
Non-observance of safety notes!
Personal injury
Passenger-carrying mode is permitted exclusively with working baskets
that comply with the machine guideline and are approved by the national
authorities.
A winch speed of 14m/s must be set for passenger-carrying mode.
Carry passengers exclusively with the passenger-carrying mode provided!
Never use passenger-carrying mode in a thunderstorm! Risk of being
struck by lightning!
Ensure that all limit switches have been checked before carrying
passengers!
Ensure that all personnel in the working basket are secured.
Use passenger-carrying mode exclusively with a clear line of sight
between the operator and persons in the working basket.
Use radio equipment to establish contact between the operator and
persons in the working basket.
Use a third party to establish visual contact between the operator and
persons in the working basket in emergency operation.
In emergency operation while carrying passengers slacken the NL side of
the winch exclusively (see chapter Operation, emergency operation)!
Ensure that all crane operation safety precautions have been taken and
the appropriate crane operation mode.
NOTE
Emergency operation is only for lowering the load, not raising it.
Use passenger-carrying mode exclusively above the standing area!
Do not use passenger-carrying mode for hatches, shafts and positions
below the standing area.
LHM 120-280_002 257

141128
Operation
4.18.1 Assembly
Carrying passengers with the working basket
WARNING
Working basket not correctly fitted!
Check for damage and wear of the working basket and connection points
on the working basket for chains and/or steel cables.
Check for damage and wear of suitable chains or steel cables (observe
load and safety factor).
Fit hook or rotator correctly (see chapter 5, Rotator).
Figure 124 Carrying passengers with the working basket (symbolic represent
ation)
1 Rotator
2 Chain
3 Shackle
4 Working basket
258 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Carrying passengers with the working basket and

spreader
WARNING
Working basket not correctly fitted!
Fit spreader correctly (see chapter 5, Spreader, fitting).
Check for damage and wear of the working basket twist locks.
Mechanically secure working basket at all 4 corners with suitable chains
(observe loads and safety factors) (see figure).
Figure 125 Passenger-carrying mode with spreader
1 Spreader
2 Working basket (for spreader)
3 Chain for securing
LHM 120-280_002 259

141128
Operation
4.18.2 Operation
Passenger-carrying mode can be selected exclusively in conjunction with:

` hook operation
` Rotator
` Spreader (requires working basket for spreader)
u Press button 9 on one of the two joysticks (left or right) in order to carry out
movements in passenger-carrying mode.
NOTE
Load moment limitation (LMB) cannot be bypasses using the key switch
on control panel X25!
u Select the operating mode (hook operation, rotator) as described in chapter

Operation, hook operation/rotator.
u For passenger-carrying mode with spreader, select spreader operation

mode.
u Press passenger-carrying mode button.

w Operation mode person carrying appears in the status display.
Figure 126 Passenger-carrying mode screen
260 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
w Speeds of the hoisting gear, slewing gear and luffing gear are automati
cally reduced.
NOTE
In rotator mode the rotator can turn.
In spreader mode the supply to the spreader is switched off.
Hook mode, rotator and spreader are possible operation modes. All other
modes such as: Cycoptronic, boom cable drum (manual) etc. are blocked!
u To deselect passenger-carrying mode, press the passenger carrying

button down for at least 2 seconds.
w Passenger-carrying mode is deselected.
4.18.3 Load curves
There are 2 types of passenger-carrying, differentiated by the load curves and

thus by the maximum load.
Passenger-carrying mode with low load curve

(Hook, rotator, spreader)
Applicable throughout the world and for all supporting bases:
LHM 120 180 280 320 400 500 600 (50m) 600 (58m)
Load 6.5t 7.2t 7.2t 9t 9t 9.2t 9.2t 9.6t
Passenger-carrying mode with high load curve

(spreader)
Applicable throughout the world (except USA):
LHM 120 180 280 320 400 500 600 (50m) 600 (58m)
Load 7.3t 10.2t 15.1t 19.4t 25.3t 28.1t 39.7t 31.9t
1st base
Load 5.5t 7.7t 11.3t 14.6t 19t 21.1t 29.8t 23.9t
2nd base
Applicable exclusively to USA and for the 1st supporting base:
LHM 120 180 280 320 400 500 600 (50m) 600 (58m)
Load 5.5t 7.7t 11.3t 14.6t 19t 21.1t 29.8t 23.9t
LHM 120-280_002 261

141128
Operation
4.19 Synchronise winches*
CAUTION
Winches not synchronised resulting in uneven load distribution!
Serious damage to winches and ropes.
Synchronise winches.
The positions of the two winches are automatically controlled during operation.
The length of rope can change between the closing winch and the holding
winch.
The maximum tolerance is A= ±0.3m. As soon as the ropes move out of this
tolerance the hoisting gear shuts down automatically.
Winches synchronised
Closing winch not synchronised
Holding winch not synchronised
262 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.19.1 Automatic synchronisation
u Ropes are out of tolerance:

w Hoisting gear shuts down and "hoisting gear stop" appears on screen.
w Winches not synchronised is displayed flashing on screen.
Figure 127 Winches not synchronised
u Press synchronise winches button on control panel X25 and at the same
time hoisting gear slowly raise or lower.
w LED in the button remains lit for as long as the button is pressed.
w Winches synchronise automatically.
u Observe movement of ropes.
w As soon as winches are synchronised, winches not synchronised symbol
goes out.
u Release synchronise winches button on control panel X25
w Winches are synchronised.
NOTE
As soon as winch not synchronised symbol goes out the raising or
lowering movement, depending on the joystick alignment, is executed
immediately.
LHM 120-280_002 263

141128
Operation
4.19.2 Manual synchronisation
CAUTION
During winch service mode all limit switches and safety devices are
bypassed!
Damage to the winch.
Bring in additional personnel to monitor slack rope.
I 0 II
1 u In winch service mode, select the winch concerned (Position I or II) and ac
tivate with button:
1 winch selection
` Position II: Holding winch
2
2 Activation (engages)
w LED lights up.
w Depending on position of key switch, selected winch appears on screen.
Winch selection position II pendant winch
Winch selection position I closing winch
u Slowly raise or lower hoisting gear.

w Selected winch runs raising or lowering.
u Visually check the difference in length of rope ends.
u Compare load value on synchronisation side.

w Both load values must be identical.
w Winches synchronised.
u Set reference point. (see chapter Operation, synchronise winches, set refe
rence points)
264 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.19.3 Set reference point

LHM 120-280_002 265

141128
Operation
u Press synchronisation button.

w Winch synchronisation screen opens.
Figure 129 Winch synchronisation screen LHM 120-280 vor 2008
Figure 130 Winch synchronisation screen LHM 120-280 from 2008 onwards
266 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
This function is needed for hook operation exclusively.

The displayed value is the difference in length between the pendant rope and
closing rope when a hook is suspended. When winches are synchronised the
value must be set to zero.
u Press button on screen.
w Current rope difference is adopted.
Since software version 993390314 - 002 this function is used exclusively to dis
play the current rope difference.
The displayed value is the difference in length between the pendant rope and
closing rope.
On machines before software version 993390314 - 002 it is possible to set the

current rope difference to zero by pressing the button.
NOTE
Set rope difference to zero:
Press this button also to automatically change all four-rope grab
settings and the control will no longer recognise the position (open or
closed) of the four-rope grab..
w Grab open and grab closed symbols are shown on screen at the same
time in the status display.
LHM 120-280_002 267

141128
Operation
4.20 Four-rope grab*

DANGER
Ensure that no other operation mode is active.
Observe the wind speed specified in the applicable load chart! Stop
four-rope grab operation mode if the wind speed exceeds the maximum
permitted.
Use four-rope grab exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of the four-rope grab for damage, leakage, etc.
Store four-rope grab according to the applicable guidelines of the
manufacturer.
Obey the safety instructions and operating instructions of the four-rope
grab manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
Use standard pulleys on boom as chain guide!
Damage to standard pulleys
Do not thread chains through standard pulleys on boom.
If necessary replace standard pulleys with special pulleys made for
chains.
CAUTION
NOTE
If using a four-rope grab that is not part of the scope of supply, ensure the
four-rope grab is suitable for this machine!
268 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 131 Four-rope grab with chain weights*

1 Closing ropes
2 Holding ropes
3 Shackle
4 Chain weights*
5 Nemag shackle
Figure 132 Four-rope grab

1 Closing ropes
2 Holding ropes
3 Nemag shackle
LHM 120-280_002 269

141128
Operation
4.20.1 Installation
CAUTION
No chain weights!
Ropes do not lower by their dead weight alone.
Pull and secure ropes into position, using suitable accessories if
necessary.
CAUTION
Remove chain weights!
Ropes go up.
Secure ropes.
u Position already lashed lifting device (rotator, hook crossbar, etc.)

approx. 15 m from crane.
CAUTION
Winch service operation mode!
All limit switches and displays of the slack rope are bypassed.
Use additional operators to observe the winch chamber in order to
prevent slack rope.
I 0 II
1 u In winch service operation mode select the appropriate winch (Position I or

II) and activate with the button to slacken the pendant rope and closing rope:
1 winch selection
2 ` Position II: Holding winch
2 Activation
w LED lights up.
w The ropes that have been selected are displayed on the screen depen
ding on the position of the key switch:
Winch selection position II pendant winch
Winch selection position I closing winch
.
u Slacken the pendant ropes and then the closing ropes by moving the right
joystick in direction B.
B C
u Remove lashed lifting device (hook, rotator, etc.).
u Unhook boom cable from drum, unwind fully and secure to boom head or
D park in hook fixing point*. (see chapter Boom cable drum operation)
A
270 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
NOTE
Fitting the four-rope grab
Observe lay direction of rope!
Join rope with lay direction to the right exclusively to rope with lay
direction to the right and rope with lay direction to the left exclusively to
rope with lay direction to the left!
The ropes are colour-coded as standard.
Red - red / green - green
u Sling four-rope grab.

u Remove securing ropes.
4.20.2 Set four-rope grab
Set load
Software 993390314 - 036 and later.
Is used to determine the maximum load (grab and load). The maximum load
depends on the outreach.
u press right navigation button on monitor or Litronic service panel.

w Setting possible
u Assign set value using monitor keyboard or Litronic service panel

w Set value changed
u Press enter key.

w Set value confirmed.
Set four-rope grab position
.
u In winch service operation mode, raise pendant and closing ropes in direc
tion A by moving the right joystick.
B C
w Ropes are tensioned
D A

LHM 120-280_002 271

141128
Operation
u Press synchronisation button.

w Winch synchronisation screen opens.
272 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
CAUTION
Improper adjusting of four-rope grab!
Damage to four-rope grab.
Mind the mechanical stop when opening!
Close the four-rope grab at low speed!
Prerequisite:
` Four-rope grab is on the ground in the open position.
` If four-rope grab is in closed position on the ground, first store closed po
sition in the following procedure.
u Press symbol on screen for four-rope grab in open position.

w Position of the open four-rope grab is stored.
w The difference in length between the pendant ropes and holding ropes
when the four-rope grab is open is also displayed.
u Set key switch for winch service operation mode to position 0.

w Both winches are active.
w The symbol shown for the pendant or closing winch goes out.
u Raise the four-rope grab.

w A hydraulic switch automatically causes load compensation in the ropes.
u Re-adjust the open position of the four-rope grab once again (mind the me
chanical stops) and press the screen symbol for four-rope grab in open posi
tion.
w Four-rope grab in open position is stored.
u Set key switch for winch service operation mode to position I.

w Closing winch is active.
u Slowly and carefully use the closing winch to close the four-rope grab.
u Press symbol on screen for four-rope grab in closed position.

w Position of the closed four-rope grab is stored.
w The difference in length between the pendant ropes and holding ropes
when the four-rope grab is closed is also displayed.
u Set key switch for winch service operation mode to position 0.

w Both winches are active.
w The symbol shown for the closing winch goes out.
u Raise and lower the closed four-rope grab 2 times.

w A hydraulic switch automatically causes load compensation in the ropes.
LHM 120-280_002 273

141128
Operation
u Press symbol on screen for four-rope grab in closed position again.

w Four-rope grab in closed position is stored.
u Ensure that the display shows the same load values when the four-rope
grab is closed and empty.
u If the load values are not synchronous, repeat adjustment with the closing
winch.
.
u To check operation, use right joystick to open and close four-rope grab:
w Joystick in direction C - four-rope grab opens.
B C
w Joystick in direction D - four-rope grab closes.
D A
274 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.20.3 Reduction of crane movements
NOTE
The slewing gear, hoisting gear and luffing gear speeds change
dynamically depending on load weight.
Hoisting gear reduction when lifting grab
To extend machine service life:
If the grab is closed and the load of the pendant winch or closing winch is less
than the slack rope load, the load is raised 10% at creep speed until the load of
both winches is greater than the slack rope load.
If the grab is not closed, the load on the pendant winch is used exclusively as
a reference for activating the reduction.
4.20.4 Overload
Depending on the overload, different crane movement stops may occur.

` Lift hoisting gear
` Lower luffing gear
` Lift luffing gear - only in certain conditions
` Slewing gear anticlockwise/clockwise
NOTE
If the load was less than 90% of the current load 3 seconds before the
overload occurred, the luffing gear stop is activated.
Load thresholds Pre-warning Switch-off

All hook load thresholds at 90 % at 105 %
` Warning triangle flashes on ` Stop symbol on monitor
monitor ` Luffing gear lower stop

` Acoustic warning signal in
` Hoisting gear lift stop
cabin, can be acknowledged after `
5s Acoustic warning signal in cabin, can be
acknowledged after 5 s
` Exterior acoustic warning signal
` max. load and radius stored as message
LHM 120-280_002 275

141128
Operation
All four-rope grab load at 95 % at 110 %

thresholds ` Warning triangle flashes on ` Stop symbol on monitor
monitor ` Luffing gear lower stop
` Slewing gear stop

` Acoustic warning signal in cabin, can be
All other load thresholds at 95 % at 110 %

(e.g. load magnet device, ` Warning triangle flashes on ` Stop symbol on monitor
motor grab, etc.) monitor ` Luffing gear lower stop
` Acoustic warning signal in cabin, can be

Four-rope grab overload bypass
In the event of an overload in grab operation, slewing gear, luffing gear and
hoisting gear lifting is stopped:
u To deactivate stops, press Slack rope button.

w Heavy load threshold toggles between 75 % and 66 %. Slewing gear and
luffing gear remain stopped. Hoisting gear speed depends on current utili
sation.
w Lift hoisting gear at 20 % of max. speed.
w Grab, if not yet closed, switches automatically to "Bulkygoods".
w Slewing gear brake releases. If there is no slewing motion or manual op
eration of the slewing gear brake within 1 minute (see Operation chapter,
Crane operation, Slewing gear brake), the slewing gear brake is applied
automatically.
w Operation of the bypass is documented.
Bypass luffing gear overload

0 I
u Press and hold down LML button.

w Luffing gear is enabled.
276 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.20.5 Operation
u Select operation mode four-rope grab on control panel X25.

w Operation mode four-rope grab appears in the status display.
Figure 135 Operational screen for four-rope grab
NOTE
The selected operation mode is stored in the machine control system and
automatically selected the next time the machine starts.
NOTE
If an unambiguous position (open or closed) can be detected after
selecting the operation mode, this is also shown in the status display.
LHM 120-280_002 277

141128
Operation
All four-rope grab movements are controlled with the right joystick:
` Raise - Joystick direction A

B C ` Lower - Joystick direction B
` Open - Joystick direction C
` Close - Joystick direction D
D A ` Combined movements
Figure 136 Combined movements
A Raise both winches 100%

B Lower both winches 100%
C Open Closing winch 100%
D Close Closing winch 100%
Pendant winch (speed Closing winch (speed

shown as %) shown as %)
1 50 100
2 33 100
3 20 100
4 50 100
5 100 100
6 100 0
278 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Close grab
u Move right joystick in direction D until four-rope grab is closed.

w While it is closing, the four-rope grab closed status display on the screen
B C flashes.
w Four-rope grab closed.
w Four-rope grab closed status display on the screen is constantly illumina
D A ted.
Figure 137 Four-rope grab closed
LHM 120-280_002 279

141128
Operation
Raise / Lower
Raise means that when the four-rope grab closes, the holding winch also mo
ves in the lifting direction. This prevents the four-rope grab from being over
filled.
Lower means that when the four-rope grab closes, the holding winch also mo
ves in the lowering direction. The four-rope grab sinks further into the material.
More material can thus be picked up.
Standard setting:
Prerequisite
` The speed for Raise / Lower on the winch synchronisation page is 0%
(see Set speed for raising and lowering for automatic operation).
u During closing press button 1 (raise) on right joystick.

w Pendant winch moves in addition to closing winch at 30% of raising
speed.
u During closing press button 3 (lower) on right joystick.

w Pendant winch moves in addition to closing winch at 30% of lowering
speed.
280 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Automatic mode:
Set speed for raising and lowering in automatic mode:
Positive value:
` Raise function is possible exclusively.
Negative value:
` Lower function is possible exclusively.
u Press the button to set the speed of the functions lift and/or lower.
w Speed starts at 0% and ends at +50%.
w Speed is adjusted in steps of 5%.
w When +50% is reached and the button is pressed again the value reverts
to +45% and ends at -50%. If pressed again, -45% and so on.
NOTE
The set value is also stored when the machine is switched off.
LHM 120-280_002 281

141128
Operation
Automatic lifting
Prerequisite
` The speed for Raise on the winch synchronisation page is a positive per
centage (see Set speed for raising and lowering for automatic operation).
u If button 1 (raise) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Raising is deactivated.
u If button 3 (lower) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Lowering is possible for as long as button 3 (lower) is pressed down.
w A positive set percentage is adopted for the lowering speed.
Automatic lowering
Prerequisite
` The speed for lowering on the winch synchronisation page is a negative
percentage (see Set speed for raising and lowering for automatic opera
tion).
u If button 1 (raise) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Raising is possible for as long as button 1 (raise) is pressed down.
w A negative set percentage is adopted for the lifting speed.
u If button 3 (lower) on right joystick is pressed during closing in automatic

mode:
w Lowering is deactivated.
282 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Cargo - grab operation
If there is something between the blades of the four-rope grab and the grab
cannot close:
w The grab can now be raised.
w Tensile force on closing winch is maintained (identical to holding winch).
w The cargo symbol appears on the screen.
The cargo symbol goes out as soon as the four-rope grab is open again.
Four-rope grab loses material
If the four-rope grab loses material after lifting, the loss can be reduced by in
creasing the closing force.
u Lift four-rope grab 1 metre above material.
u Hold button 3 on right joystick down and simultaneously run lifting until four-
rope grab is completely closed.
w Tensile force of the closing winch increases.
LHM 120-280_002 283

141128
Operation
Open grab
u Move right joystick in direction C until four-rope grab is open.

w While it is opening, the four-rope grab open status display on the screen
B C flashes.
w Four-rope grab open.
w Four-rope grab open status display on the screen is constantly illumina
D ted.
A
Figure 139 Four-rope grab open
4.20.6 Pump switch-over - four-rope grab* working speed

Increase working speed for:
` raising / lowering the empty four-rope grab
` closing the four-rope grab.
u Press four-rope grab working speed button on control panel X26.

w The working speed for the above points increases.
u Press the button again.
w Four-rope grab working speed is selected.
NOTE
To increase the four-rope grab working speed the luffing gear is diverted to
the hoisting gear.
Luffing becomes slower and makes hoisting faster.
284 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.20.7 Wheel loader - bobcat loading operation*
This is a special operation mode, developed for loading wheel loaders with four-
rope grab. The wheel loader is suspended below the four-rope grab.
to select wheel loader - bobcat loading:

` Four-rope grab is selected.
` four-rope grab is in the closed state (see chapter Operation, four-rope
grab, operation, close grab).
Figure 140 Four-rope grab closed
u Press wheel loader - bobcat loading button on control panel X25.

w Load curve switches automatically to hook curve.
w All grab movements are blocked.
NOTE
Crane movements in wheel loader - bobcat loading operation:
In this operation mode hoisting gear, luffing gear and slewing gear are
active.
LHM 120-280_002 285

141128
Operation
4.21 Log grab*
DANGER
Stop timber grab mode if wind speed reaches 20 m/s.
The log grab should be used exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of the log grab for damage, leakage, etc.
Before lifting ensure that the trunks are positioned correctly and straight.
Store the log grab according to the applicable guidelines of the
manufacturer.
Obey the safety instructions and operating instructions of the log grab
manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
If you use a log grab that is not part of the scope of supply, ensure that
the log grab is suitable for this machine!
286 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 141 Log grab rigged
1 Rotator
2 Lifting chains
3 Lifting chains (shackles)
4 Cable
5 Log grab
LHM 120-280_002 287

141128
Operation
4.21.1 Installation
NOTE
Sling log grab on already slung rotator (see section
Operation/Rotator/Assembly).
u Position log grab approx. 15 m away from crane.
u Position hook of rotator above the lifting chains (2) of the log grab.
u Connect chains (2) to hook of rotator (1).
DANGER
Worn chains!
Load breakaway.
Ensure that lifting chains are in perfect condition and visually inspect for
damage before starting up.
u Switch machine off to connect the rotator cable (4) to the log grab.
CAUTION
u Start machine and raise log grab.

w Machine is ready for log grab operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect log grab mode.
u Position log grab approx. 15 m away from crane.
CAUTION
u Loosen and remove chains.

w Log grab is dismantled.
288 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.21.2 Operation
u Select log grab operation mode on control panel X25.

w Operation mode log grab and log grab status appears in the status indi
cator of the monitor.
NOTE
Rotator mode and automatic cable drum operation are automatically
selected on machines from production year 2004 onwards as soon as the
electrical connection is made between cable drum and rotator and the
machine has started up. (See section 'Operation, Boom cable drum,
Automatic mode').
Figure 142 Log grab mode screen
All log grab movements are controlled with the right joystick.
u Move master switch in direction A.
B w Raise log grab.

C
u Move master switch in direction B.
w Lower log grab.
D A u Move joystick more than 50% in direction C.
w Open log grab.
w Log grab mode screen changes. Symbol for opening is displayed.
LHM 120-280_002 289

141128
Operation
Figure 143 Open log grab mode screen
u Move joystick more than 50% in direction D.

w Close log grab.
w Log grab mode screen changes. Symbol for closing is displayed.
Figure 144 Close log grab mode screen
290 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.22 Motor grab*
DANGER
Stop motor grab operation if wind speed exceeds 20m/s.
Use motor grab exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of motor grab for damage, leakage, etc.
Store motor grab according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
Obey safety instructions and operating instructions of motor grab
manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
If using a motor grab that is not part of scope of supply, ensure motor
grab is suitable for this machine!
LHM 120-280_002 291

141128
Operation
Figure 145 Motor grab attached
1 Rotator
2 Cable
3 Motor grab
4 lifting chain
5 Rotator hook
292 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.22.1 Installation
NOTE
Attach motor grab to already slung rotator (see chapter
u Position motor grab approx. 15m away from crane.
u Position hook of rotator above motor grab chains (4).
u Connect chains (4) to hook of rotator (5).
DANGER
Worn chains!
Load breakaway.
u Switch off machine in order to connect rotator cable (2) to motor grab.
CAUTION
u Start machine and raise motor grab.

w Machine is ready for motor grab operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect motor grab operation.
u Position motor grab approx. 15m away from crane.
CAUTION
u Loosen and remove chains.

w Motor grab is disassembled
LHM 120-280_002 293

141128
Operation
4.22.2 Operation
NOTE
following plug connections must be disconnected (on LHM 120-280 plugs
are fitted inside the switch cabinet room):
u Select motor grab operation mode on control panel X25.

M
w Motor grab operation mode and motor grab status appear in status dis
play.
Motor grab status - instantaneous current display of grab.
NOTE
Rotator mode and automatic cable drum operation are automatically
selected on machines from production year 2004 onwards as soon as the
electrical connection is made between cable drum and rotator and the
machine has started up. (See section 'Operation, Boom cable drum,
Automatic mode').
Figure 146 Motor grab mode screen
294 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
All motor grab movements are controlled with the right joystick.
w Raise motor grab.
B C
w Lower motor grab.
D u Move joystick more than 50% in direction C.

A
w Open motor grab.
u Move joystick more than 50% in direction D.
w Close motor grab.
LHM 120-280_002 295

141128
Operation
4.23 Coil tong*
DANGER
Stop coil tong operation at a wind speed of 20m/s.
Use coil tong exclusively for specified application.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of the coil tong for damage, leakage, etc.
Ensure that coils are rolled up correctly and straight before lifting.
Store the coil tong according to the applicable guidelines of the
manufacturer.
Observe the safety instructions and operating instructions of the coil tong
manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
If using a coil tong that is not part of the scope of supply, ensure the coil
tong is suitable for this machine!
296 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.23.1 Installation
Figure 147 Coil tong bolting
1 Hook of rotator
2 Connecting pin
3 Cable
NOTE
Attach coil tong to already attached rotator (see section
u Position coil tong approx. 15m from crane.

u Position hook of rotator (1) above the opening of the coil tong.
u Insert connecting pin (2) in opening and secure with securing pin.
u Switch off machine to suspend the cable (3) of the coil tong on the rotator.
CAUTION
LHM 120-280_002 297

141128
Operation
DANGER
Malfunction of coil tong!
Serious physical injury and material damage.
Figure 148 Attach coil tong to rotator
1 Cable
2 Hook of rotator
3 Fastening pin
u Start machine and raise coil tong.

w Machine is ready for coil tong operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect coil tong operation.
u Position coil tong approx. 15m from crane.
CAUTION
298 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Loosen and remove all pins.

w Coil tong is dismantled.
4.23.2 Operation
Figure 149 Coil tong
1 Opening and fastening pins

2 Coil tong arm
3 Coil lugs folded in
4 Coil lugs folded out
u Select coil tong operation mode on the X25 control panel:

w Coil tong operation mode and the current status of the coil tong appear in
the status indicator of the monitor.
LHM 120-280_002 299

141128
Operation
Figure 150 Coil tong mode screen
NOTE
Automatic selection
connected to rotator, rotator operation mode is automatically selected.
300 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Coil lugs*
Control the coil lugs with the right-hand master switch:
u Move master switch in direction D.

B C w Fold in coil lugs.
w Coil lugs folded in symbol is shown on the monitor in the status indicator.
D u Move master switch in direction C.

A
w Fold out coil lugs.
w Coil lugs folded out symbol is shown on the monitor in the status indica
tor.
Coil lugs folded in
Coil lugs folded out
Coil tong arm
Since the sizes of the coils differ, it is possible to extend and retract the coil
tong arms.
u Press button 2 on the right-hand master switch until the cut-off bar hit sym
bol appears on the monitor.
w Retract coil tong arms.
w Symbol - cut-off bar hit - appears on the monitor as soon as the cut-off
bar has been hit.
u Press button 4 on the right-hand master switch.

w Extend coil tong arms.
u In two-hand operation* press button 4 on the right-hand master switch and

button 2 on the left-hand master switch at the same time.
w Extend coil tong arms.
Coil lugs folded in and coil tong arms have hit cut-off bar*.
Coil tong folded out and coil tong arms have hit cut-off bar*.
LHM 120-280_002 301

141128
Operation
Lifting the load
Control the lifting of the load with the right-hand master switch:

B C w Raise coil tong.
w Coil tong landed symbol appears on the monitor as soon as a load is res
ting on the coil lugs.
D A u Move master switch in direction B.
w Lower coil tong.
Coil tong landed

The coil lugs are extended and a load is applied.
Coil tong landed / on cut-off bar

The coil lugs are extended and a load is applied. In addition, the coil tong arms
have hit the cut-off bar.
Light barrier*
The light barrier helps the machine operator to recognise whether the coil tong
can be retracted without difficulty and whether there is nothing between the coil
lugs.
If this is not needed, it is possible to bypass the light barrier.
u Press coil tong light barrier bypass on X25 control panel.

w Coil tong light barrier bypass appears on the monitor.
u Press button 5 coil tong light barrier bypass on left-hand master switch.
w Coil tong light barrier bypass appears on the monitor.
Coil tong light barrier bypass
Coil tong light barrier free
Coil tong light barrier blocked
302 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.24 Pipe grab*
DANGER
Stop pipe grab mode if wind speed exceeds 20m/s.
Use pipe grab exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of pipe grab for damage, leakage, etc.
Store pipe grab according to applicable guidelines of manufacturer.
Obey the safety instructions and operating instructions of the pipe grab
manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
If using a pipe grab that is not part of scope of supply, ensure pipe grab is
LHM 120-280_002 303

141128
Operation
4.24.1 Assembly
Figure 151 Pipe grab
1 Pipe grab hook 1

2 Pipe grab hook 2
3 Hook of rotator
4 Cable
5 Fastening
6 Pipe grab hook 2
7 Pipe grab hook 1
NOTE
Attach pipe grab to already slung rotator (see chapter
u Position pipe grab approx. 15 m away from crane.
u Position hook of rotator above pipe grab fastening (5).
u Attach fastening (5) to hook (3) and secure.
u Switch off machine to suspend the cable (4) of the pipe grab on the rotator.
CAUTION
304 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
DANGER
Pipe grab malfunction!
Serious physical injury and material damage.
u Start machine and raise pipe grab.

w Machine is ready for pipe grab mode.
Dismantling
u Deselect pipe grab operation mode.
u Position pipe grab approx. 15 m away from crane.
CAUTION
u Loosen and remove fastening.

w Pipe grab is dismantled.
4.24.2 Operation
It is possible to transport two pipes at the same time. Pipes are held on each
side by a single hook. There is a pair of hooks for each pipe. Hooks can be re
tracted and extended. The pair of hooks for each pipe are controlled together.
Extending is only permitted when no pipe is hanging in the hook pair.
u Ensure that pipe grab is in position and man riding is deselected.
u Select operation mode pipe grab on control panel X25.
w Pipe grab operation mode and the current status of the pipe grab appear
in the status indicator of the monitor.
LHM 120-280_002 305

141128
Operation
u Select X25 on the control panel for pipe grab heavy load (HL).
w Pipe grab heavy lifting symbol appears on the monitor.

w Heavy lifting curve is activated.
NOTE
Automatic selection
Retract pipe grab arms.
u Press button 1 (hook pair 1) or button 2 (hook pair 2) on right master switch.
w Pipe grab arms retract.
w As soon as arms are fully retracted, - Pipe grab arms correctly retracted -
symbol appears on monitor.
w Lift hoisting gear enabled.
Extend pipe grab arms.
u Press button 6 on left master switch and at the same time press button 3
(hook pair 1) or button 4 (hook pair 2) on right master switch.
w Pipe grab arms extend.
w As soon as arms are fully extended, - Pipe grab arms correctly extended
- symbol appears on monitor.
306 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Position of pipe grab arms undefined
Pipe grab arms not fully extended or retracted:
w Pipe grab arms undefined position symbol flashes.
w Hoisting gear lift stop appears.
Pipe grab arms with no load or single pair operation
If there is no load on the pipe grab arms or only one pipe on one pair of hooks:
w Pipe grab without load / load on hook pair 1 or hook pair 2 symbol ap
pears.
w Additional text "1 + 2" appears if there are no pipes on pipe grab.
NOTE
Additional text "1 + 2" during pipe grab operation
If there is no pipe on hook pair 1 and a pipe is loaded on hook pair 2, text
"1" appears on monitor.
If there is no pipe on hook pair 2 and a pipe is loaded on hook pair 1, text
"2" appears on monitor.
Lifting/ lowering the load
Control the lifting of the load with the right-hand master switch:

B C w Lift pipe grab
D w Lower pipe grab.

A
LHM 120-280_002 307

141128
Operation
Pipe grab Bypass mode
Pipe grab is not fully retracted or extended and is therefore in undefined posi
tion.
w Symbol flashes.
w Hoisting gear lift stop appears.

w Lift hoisting gear not enabled.
u Press and hold down button 5 and button 4 on left master switch.
u Move right master switch in direction A.

B C w Lift pipe grab
D A
308 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.25 Magnet*
DANGER
Set a winch speed of 20m/s for magnet operation.
Use magnet exclusively for its intended purpose.
when it is dark.
Carry out a visual check of the magnet for damage, leakage, etc.
Store the magnet according to the applicable guidelines of the
manufacturer.
In addition, obey the safety instructions and operating instructions of the
magnet manufacturer!
operator!
CAUTION
NOTE
If using a magnet that is not part of the scope of supply, ensure the
magnet is suitable for this machine!
LHM 120-280_002 309

141128
Operation
Figure 152 Magnet attached
1 Rotator
2 Cable
3 Nemag shackle (connecting element)
4 Lifting chains
5 Magnet
310 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.25.1 Installation
NOTE
Attach magnet to already slung rotator or nook (see chapter
Operation/rotator/fitting).
u Position magnet approx. 15m away from crane.
u Position rotator hook above the lifting chains (4) and shackle (connecting
element) (3) of the magnet.
u Connect shackle (connecting element) (3) to rotator hook (1).
DANGER
Worn chains!
Load breakaway.
u Switch off machine in order to connect rotator cable (4) to magnet.
CAUTION
u Start machine and raise magnet.

w Machine is ready for magnet operation.
Dismantling
u Deselect magnet mode.

u Position magnet approx. 15m away from crane.
CAUTION
u Release and remove connecting elements.

w Magnet is disassembled.
LHM 120-280_002 311

141128
Operation
4.25.2 Battery test

Since the equipment provided with magnets includes backup batteries (rec
tangular magnets, unsecured areas), the battery test can be used to check
backup battery function.
u Press the magnet battery test button on control panel X25.

w Battery is automatically tested.
w Result appears as a text message.
4.25.3 Operation
NOTE
following plug connections must be disconnected (on LHM 320-600 plugs
are fitted in front of control cubicle area):

u Start operation mode rotator or hook (see chapter Operation, rotator/hook).
u Select operation mode magnet on control panel X25.

w Operation mode magnet and the percentage active magnet time in the
last hour appear in the on-screen status display.
Figure 153 Magnet mode screen
312 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
NOTE
Automatic selection
Raise and lower load
u Position magnet over load to be lifted.
u Slowly place magnet onto load.

w On-screen status changes (magnet landed symbol appears).
Figure 154 Magnet landed
LHM 120-280_002 313

141128
Operation
u Press button 2 on the right joystick.

w Magnetised magnet.
w Status on screen changes.
w Active percent magnet time count starts now.
Figure 155 Magnetisation active
u Press button 4 on right joystick and button 2 on left joystick.

w Magnet is no longer magnetised.
w Load drops.
w Status on screen changes.
314 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Operating time of magnet
Automatic safety precautions are installed owing to possible overheating of the

magnet. The percentage shown in the symbol stands for the active magnet time
over the last hour. Current activity is added.
If the magnet is inactive for longer than 1 hour, the magnet operating time re
verts to 0%.
Automatic de-energizing monitor:
u Magnet in continuous operation for 15 min.

w Acoustic warning signal sounds and warning message appears on the
screen.
w Acoustic warning signal sounds continuously and warning message ap
pears on the screen.
w Magnet off. Load drops.
WARNING
Operating time exceeded
Magnet switches off and load drops.
Always operate the magnet for less than 30 min. continuously.
Lower the load before operating time reaches 75%.
Magnet operation blocks

The following points prevent the magnet from switching on:
` LHM power supply faulty
` Faulty backup battery
` Faulty magnet
` Operating time at or over 75%
Magnet Fade Out
u Press button 6 on the left joystick.

w Magnetisation reduces for as long as the button is depressed.
LHM 120-280_002 315

141128
Operation
4.26 Laying down the boom
During maintenance and repair work on the boom head it is possible to lay the
boom tip down on the ground,
DANGER
Wind speed from 50m/s
Danger of load breakaway, personal injury and material damage.
Lay down the boom.
CAUTION
Improper operation!
Ensure that there are no persons in the area in which the boom is laid
down.
Ensure that the winches are monitored by additional personnel who are in
telephone contact with the machine operator and who are informed about
the dangers.
Ensure that the machine is not askew!
Ensure that the cable from the boom cable drum is unplugged from the
rotator during the laying down of the boom!
Liebherr recommends setting the slewing platform parallel to the undercarriage:

` 0
` 180
Because then the step on the undercarriage can be used. Otherwise it is still
possible to climb down through the rotary connection of the undercarriage.
u Move luffing gear (boom) with the LEFT-HAND master switch in direction B
to maximum outreach.
D B
A C
u Lower hoisting gear with the RIGHT-HAND master switch in direction B until
the lifting device reaches the ground. (Liebherr recommends laying down
B C lifting device on Euro palette or similar)
D A
316 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Press lay down boom button on X25 control panel

w Lay down boom operation mode appears in the status indicator on the
monitor.
Figure 156 Lay down boom symbol on screen
CAUTION
If the ropes become taut the lifting device (if already laid down on the ground)
will be dragged while the boom is laid down.
Material damage to the lifting device!
Operate (lower) hoisting and luffing gear simultaneously to prevent rope
becoming taut.
u Lower boom slowly by operating the left-hand master switch in direction B.

D B
u Lay down boom on support.
w The boom is laid down.
A C
LHM 120-280_002 317

141128
Operation
Figure 157 Boom is laid down on support
Setting up the boom
u Press lay down boom button on X25 control panel.

w Lay down boom operation mode appears in the status indicator on the
monitor.
u Move luffing gear (boom) slowly and carefully in direction A with the LEFT-
HAND master switch.
u Raise hoisting gear slowly and carefully in direction A with the RIGHT-HAND
master switch. (Compensate for slack rope)
NOTE
Slack rope is displayed on the monitor. However, no automatic stop takes
place on the winch.
u Raise boom until the lifting device is located in the working area of the ma
chine.
w Boom is set up.
318 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.27 Vertical Line Finder*
The vertical line finder transmits the vertical position of the suspended load
using displays on the screen.
NOTE
The position of the load under the boom head is determined by angle
sensors on the hoisting ropes.
The display is only correct when a load is being hoisted from the ground
(ropes under tension).
If the load is swinging free greatly the swing is shown with a long delay.
WARNING
Lifting a load that is not vertical with respect to the boom head causes the
load to swing more or less strongly depending on the angle of the diagonal
pull.
Compensate any displayed diagonal pull before lifting the load.
4.27.1 Operation
NOTE
No need for selection on control panels X25 and X26.
Figure 158 Vertical line finder
LHM 120-280_002 319

141128
Operation
Other status displays in the same order of priority as shown below appear here
on the screen:
Pendant winch key switch selection
Closing winch key switch selection
Winches not synchronised
Top support pads
Vertical line finder (diagonal pull display)
Software 993390014 - 036 and later
Figure 159 Vertical line finder - Up to Software 993390314 - 040
320 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Software 993390014 - 041 and later
Figure 160 Vertical line finder - Software 993390314 - 041 and later
4.27.2 Symbol description
A B
Figure 161 Symbol description - Vertical Line Finder
NOTE
The maximum deviation (A) of the bar is 100cm
The minimum deviation (B) of the bar is 25cm
LHM 120-280_002 321

141128
Operation
DANGER
Bar in vertical line finder symbol flashes and moves all the way in both
directions (x and y)!
Sensors no longer active, danger of accident and damage!
Stop crane operation.
Contact customer service.
4.27.3 Examples of diagonal pull display
If the lifting device is central (+/- 25cm in X and y directions) under the boom
head the symbol has a square in the centre. Lifting is only safe when the lif
ting device is central!
Figure 162 Example: vertical line finder - central
If the lifting device is to the right of the boom head, move the slewing gear to
the right until the lifting device is positioned centrally.
Figure 163 Example: vertical line finder - to the right
322 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
If the lifting device is to the left of the boom head, move the slewing gear to the
left until the lifting device is positioned centrally.
Figure 164 Example: vertical line finder - to the left
If the lifting device is in front of the boom head, move the luffing gear down until
the lifting device is positioned centrally.
Figure 165 Example: vertical line finder - in front of boom head
LHM 120-280_002 323

141128
Operation
If the lifting device is behind the boom head, move the luffing gear up until the
lifting device is positioned centrally.
Figure 166 Example: vertical line finder - behind boom head
If the lifting device is in front of and to the right of the boom head, move the luf
fing gear and the slewing gear until the lifting device is positioned centrally.
Figure 167 Example: vertical line finder - in front of boom head and to the right
324 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.28 Sycratronic*
Sycratronic enables a load to be hoisted with two cranes simultaneously from

one control station. The definitions LEADER CRANE and FOLLOWER CRANE
define which crane controls the two of them.
There are 2 ways of slewing the load:

` Slew around the traverse centre point.
` Slew around the leader crane hook.
DANGER
Preventing collisions between crane and load, and between load and
undefined moving obstacles.
Observe national and international regulations (e.g. ISO 12480:1997
Cranes-Safe Use) for heavy load lifting, tandem lifting, and similar lifting.
Stop crane operation if wind speed exceeds 12m/s.
Beware of the wind when loads have a large surface area.
Ensure that both machines (leader crane and follower crane) are manned.
Ensure that when in Sycratronic mode there is either a speech connection
or eye contact between the two machine operators.
when it is dark.
Comply with national and international regulations and standards for
heavy load lifting, tandem lifting or similar lifting.
When in Sycratronic mode exclusively work with a banksman.
Define a clearly structured chain of command between machine operators
and banksman.
Avoid diagonal pull when hoisting the load and correct if necessary.
All repairs and replacement of safety-related sensors and actuators to be
carried out exclusively by Liebherr after sales service.
Use crossbar in accordance with EN13155.
Exercise caution to avoid collision of both cranes (leader crane and
follower crane).
If more than 75% capacity of one or both cranes is utilised, do not
deselect Sycratonic!
LHM 120-280_002 325

141128
Operation
4.28.1 Vertical line finder (diagonal pull display)
NOTE
See Operation chapter, Vertical line finder.
Sycratronic operation mode can only be selected when the diagonal pull in all
directions is less than 1°. Otherwise, selecting Sycratronic operation mode is
not possible and an error message appears.
If the diagonal pull exceeds 1.5° for more than 3 seconds during operation, ma
chine stops and error message appears.
Figure 168 Vertical line finder - Main menu - Own crane
326 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 169 Vertical line finder - Sycratronic page - Other crane
4.28.2 CAN connection
Figure 170 Sycratronic CAN connection
u Connect CAN connecting cable to undercarriage switch cabinet of the rele

vant crane.
w Sycratronic operation possible.
LHM 120-280_002 327

141128
Operation
CAUTION
Incorrect handling of CAN connecting cable!
Damage to CAN connecting cable.
Visibly mark CAN connecting cable run (for example, using signs, traffic
cones, etc.) for people and vehicles, such as reachstackers and trucks,
and protect from being run over.
Protect from mechanical forces (running over, pulling, kinking, etc.)!
Do not place loads (e.g. containers) on CAN connecting cable.
Figure 171 CAN connection display
328 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 172 CAN connection display, detail
1 Crane type (own crane)

2 Connection to gateway computer (own crane)
3 Crane type gateway computer (own crane)
4 Symbol for connection to gateway computer displayed (own crane)
5 Connection to other crane
6 Symbol for connection to gateway computer present (other crane)
7 Crane type gateway computer (other crane)
8 Connection to gateway computer (other crane)
9 Crane type (other crane)
NOTE
CAN connection interrupted:
Pos. 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 no longer displayed.
4.28.3 CAN connection interrupted
If leader crane CAN connection is interrupted:

` All already set reference points (teach-in point) are deleted.
` Sycratronic main menu is reset.
` Leader crane and follower crane displays flash.
` An error message appears.
` Crane stops automatically.
If follower crane CAN connection is interrupted:

` All already set reference points (teach-in point) are deleted.
LHM 120-280_002 329

141128
Operation
` All selected operation modes reset automatically.

` Sycratronic mode displays no longer visible on monitor.
u Deselect Sycratronic mode (see Deselecting Sycratronic).
u Re-establish CAN connection.

w Sycratronic mode possible again.
4.28.4 Set teach-in points
Figure 173 3 teach-in points
u Identify and number 3 teach-in points on the ground.
u Ensure that the teach-in points are at least 10mapart and are arranged in
the form of a triangle.
u Bring lifting device of leader crane to first mark on ground.
u Position lifting device just above mark.
u Ensure that lifting device is still and does not swing.
NOTE
The more accurately the teach-in points are approached by the hook the
more accurate the Sycratronic operation.
Banksman needed!
Vertical line finder recommended!
We recommend fixed markers on the ground that are clearly visible from
eye level in the tower cabin.
330 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 174 Power operation screen

Figure 175 Power operation screen (functional enhancement)
LHM 120-280_002 331

141128
Operation
u Press Sycratronic button.

w Sycratronic screen opens
Figure 176 Sycratronic screen
u Turn key switch Operation mode winch service to the right.

w Operation mode winch service symbol appears on the screen.
w Teach-in point storage is enabled.
NOTE
Teach-in points can only be changed, deleted or reset after the key switch
has been turned to the right.
332 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 177 Crane operation screen with winch service mode activated
u Press teach-in point 1 button.

w Teach-in point 1 is set.
w Symbol changes.
w Mark appears within the circle on the monitor.
w Position point appears on point display of Sycratronic screen.
u Switch winch service key switch back to centre position.

w Winch service mode symbol disappears from screen.
u Bring hook of leader crane to second mark on ground.
u Repeat sequence of first teach-in point.

w Second teach-in point is set.
u Bring hook of leader crane to third mark on ground.
u Repeat sequence of first teach-in point.

w Third teach-in point is set.
u Set the teach-in points with the following crane in the same sequence.
w Teach-in points for both cranes are set.
LHM 120-280_002 333

141128
Operation
Figure 178 Position point on point display of Sycratronic screen
NOTE
Until a teach-in point has been set, the corresponding position point will
be in the centre of the point display.
Press button again to delete teach-in point.
On quitting Sycratronic mode the teach-in points remain stored.
4.28.5 Automatic deletion of teach-in points
Already set teach-in points are automatically deleted, as soon as:

` travelling brakes are released (machine moving).
` CAN connection is interrupted.
334 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.28.6 Operation
Prerequisites for enabling operation of Sycratronic mode:
` Both cranes (leader crane and follower crane) are manned.
` there is voice communication between both cranes.

` Diesel engine is running (Economy Software or 100% - LED lit up
constantly).
` Move leader and follower crane safety levers to lowered position. (see
chapter Operation, operation enable lever).
` Joystick is in zero position.
` Cycoptronic and passenger-carrying mode are not selected.
` Hook or rotator mode is selected.
` Diagonal pull display under 1°.
` Teach-in points are set.
` CAN connection is made.
` Operation mode winch service key switch is in centre position.
For generally activated button 9:
u to activate Sycratronic, press and hold down button 9 on one of the two con
trol levers (left or right) in leader crane.
w Button 9 not necessary in follower crane.
u Press Sycratronic button on control panel X25.

w LED in button flashes until all the prerequisites listed above have been
met.
w Flashing screen icons appear in leader crane and follower crane.
w In follower crane, acoustic signal sounds to confirm Sycratronic mode.
NOTE
The first crane that Sycratronic mode selects is the automatic leader
crane.
All symbols that appear on screen in the status display are visible on both
the Sycratronic screen and the power operation screen.
LHM 120-280_002 335

141128
Operation
Before Sycratronic mode is enabled, operator is responsible for:

` planning of load lifting in accordance with ISO 12480-1
S Crane capacity (SWL, outreach).
S Check load lifting points to ensure they are secure and suitable for
load to be lifted.
S Position of cranes.
S Ground bearing strength.
S Check whether load can be lifted.
S Nominate someone responsible for lifting the load.
NOTE
If the prerequisites for selecting Sycratronic are not satisfied, the
operation mode will not be enabled!
Figure 179 Sycratronic page leader crane with flashing symbols
NOTE
Symbols flash onleader crane until follower crane confirms and all
prerequisites for Sycratronic mode are satisfied.
Leader crane cannot move if follower crane has not confirmed or has
deselected Sycratronic mode.
336 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 180 Sycratronic page follower crane with flashing symbols
u Follower crane Press Sycratronic button.

w Follower crane confirms.
w Screen icons in leader crane and follower crane change.
w Rotators automatically switch to freewheel.
LHM 120-280_002 337

141128
Operation
Figure 181 Power operation screen leader crane
Figure 182 Power operation screen follower crane
338 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.28.7 Emergency stop

WARNING
Press emergency stop button!
Swinging load, damage to property and personal injury.
No personnel in danger zone!
Use emergency stop button exclusively for emergency cut-off and not as
a normal procedure for shutting down the engine.
NOTE
After restoring operational safety, disengage emergency stop button by
turning anticlockwise in order to restart engine.
Check operation of multi disc brakes and look for wear after every
emergency stop.
Visually inspect steel structure, ropes and pulleys for damage.
Contact Liebherr service department.
u Leader crane actuates emergency stop.

w Leader crane and follower crane stop.
w Operation modes are automatically selected on follower crane.
u Follower crane actuates emergency stop.

w Leader crane and follower crane stop.
w Flashing symbol appears on leader crane screen.
Figure 183 Power operation screen of leader crane on emergency stop
LHM 120-280_002 339

141128
Operation
4.28.8 Crane movements
Leader crane takes over all movements for both cranes.
NOTE
Follower crane has no influence on crane movements.
CAUTION
Danger of damage to machine!
In dangerous situations follower crane can interrupt Sycratronic operation
by pulling the operation enable lever up.
When the operation enable lever is up the movements of both cranes are
stopped.
When the operation enable lever is up the follower crane can also
deselect Sycratronic mode by pressing the Sycratronic button on control
panel X25.
Figure 184 Power operation screen crane movements in following crane via
movement instruction from leader crane.
340 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
NOTE
On reaching relevant limit switch, crane movement STOPS and load moment
limiter (LMB) is activated.
At all STOPS (hoisting gear, luffing gear, slewing gear), the STOP symbol
for the other crane is combined with the Sycratronic symbol.
The STOP symbols for the same crane are without the Sycratronic
symbol.
The STOP symbols for the same crane always take precedence over the
STOP symbols for the other crane.
Figure 185 Power operation screenleader crane - STOP on leader crane

(own Stop symbols, no combination with Sycratronic symbol)
LHM 120-280_002 341

141128
Operation
Figure 186 Power operation screenleader crane - STOP on follower crane

(STOP symbols for other crane, STOP symbols combined with Sycratronic
symbol)
342 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.28.9 Rotate crossbar (about traverse centre point)
Figure 187 About traverse centre point (standard)
B C
u Move joystick direction D (left, anticlockwise) or C (right, clockwise).
w Crossbar rotates about traverse centre point
D w No additional symbol is displayed on screen.
A
LHM 120-280_002 343

141128
Operation
4.28.10 Rotate crossbar (about leader crane hook)
Figure 188 About leader crane hook (selection needed)
u Press Rotation about leader crane hook button.

w Rotate crossbar (about leader crane hook) symbol is displayed on
screen.
Rotate crossbar (about leader crane hook) symbol
B C
u Move joystick direction D (left, anticlockwise) or C (right, clockwise).
w Crossbar rotates about leader crane hook.
D A
344 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.28.11 Correction mode
In correction mode, which can only be activated in the leader crane, one crane
can be controlled independently of the second crane when in Sycratronic mode.
NOTE
Either the leader crane or the follower crane can be controlled.
Exclusively in the directions that reduce the diagonal pull!
Speed reduction of 20% for all machines.
Deselecting correction mode resets the crossbeam positions and reactivates

Sycratronic mode.
Correction mode luffing gear / slewing gear
u Turn key switch to position I.

w Key switch and Stop all machines appears on the monitor.
Figure 189 Correction mode luffing gear / slewing gear
LHM 120-280_002 345

141128
Operation
Prerequisites for selecting correction mode:

` Utilisation of both cranes under 102%.
` Key switch active.
` Correction mode hoisting gear not active.
u Press button 2 on the left control lever.
u Select the required direction of luffing gear or slewing gear using the left
control level.
w Luffing gear and slewing gear on leader crane active (exclusively in the
direction dictated by the diagonal pull, see Operation chapter, Vertical line
finder).
w Lift hoisting gear is disabled.
u Press button 4 on the left control lever.
u Select the required direction of luffing gear or slewing gear using the left
control level.
w Luffing gear and slewing gear on follower crane active (exclusively in
the direction dictated by the diagonal pull, see Operation chapter, Vertical
line finder).
w Lift hoisting gear is disabled.
Figure 190 Correction mode luffing gear / slewing gear active
346 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Correction mode hoisting gear
The rope length is saved when correction mode is activated. The hoisting gear
is disabled in both directions (lifting and lowering) when utilisation is above
110%. This rope length is also saved. It is still possible to travel in the direction
active when correction mode was selected (depending on the rope length
threshold). If there is then an overload (110%) on the second crane, this posi
tion will also be saved.
Both the leader crane and the follower crane can be driven.
NOTE
Prerequisite for selecting correction mode:
Overload of 110% not exceeded.
Example:
` 102% overload.
` Key switch activated (rope length 1 saved at 11.3m).
` Correction mode hoisting gear in leader crane activated (button 4).
` Lift and lower hoisting gear enabled.
` Hoisting gear lowered.
S 110% overload at 3.15m (rope length 2 saved).
S Only Lift hoisting gear is still enabled (as rope length 1 was saved at
11.3m).
S Hoisting gear is lifted - overload reduces!
` The second crane takes more of the load and now has a 110% overload
(rope length of 17.36m saved).
` Movement only possible towards 11.3m - lower hoisting gear!
` etc.
u Turn key switch to position I.

w Key switch and Stop all machines appears on the monitor.
LHM 120-280_002 347

141128
Operation
Figure 191 Follower crane overload
Figure 192 Correction mode hoisting gear
348 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Press button 2 on the right control lever.
u Select the desired hoisting gear direction using the right control lever.
w Hoisting gear exclusively active on leader crane.
w All other movements are disabled.
u Press button 4 on the right control lever.
u Select the desired hoisting gear direction using the right control lever.
w Hoisting gear exclusively active on follower crane.
w All other movements are disabled.
NOTE
Set load down diagonally
In hoisting gear correction mode, it is possible to deliberately set the load
down diagonally.
LHM 120-280_002 349

141128
Operation
4.28.12 Overload
The following movements are disabled when 102% utilisation is reached:
` Lift hoisting gear.
` Lower hoisting gear.
` Lower luffing gear.
Load centre of gravity at top

Situation 1:
When lowering the small crane or lifting the large crane, an overload persists on
the small crane.
Figure 193 Overload load centre of gravity at top, situation 1

Situation 2:
When lowering the large crane or lifting the small crane, an overload persists on
the large crane.
Figure 194 Overload load centre of gravity at top, situation 2
350 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Load centre of gravity at bottom

Situation 1:
When lowering the large crane or lifting the small crane, an overload persists on
the small crane.
Figure 195 Overload load centre of gravity at bottom, situation 1
Situation 2:
When lowering the small crane or lifting the large crane, an overload persists on
the large crane.
Figure 196 Overload load centre of gravity at bottom, situation 2
NOTE
The following movements are disabled when 102% utilisation is exceeded:
Lower luffing gear.
Lift and lower hoisting gear can no longer be actively controlled (the
horizontal load path is still active).
LHM 120-280_002 351

141128
Operation
4.28.13 Deselect Sycratronic
The following prerequisites must be met in order to deselect Sycratronic mode:

` All 4 joysticks (both cranes) are in neutral position
` There is no crane movement
` Operation enable lever is down
Leader crane deselects Sycratronic mode:

w Sycratronic is deselected.
Follower crane deselects Sycratronic mode:
u Pull operation enable lever up.

w Sycratronic is deselected.
352 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.29 Cycoptronic*
Cycoptronic stands for CYCle OPtimising elecTRONIC - a cycle-optimised elec

tronic crane control system. An independently selectable operation mode with
which load movements can be automatically smoothed out.
In Cycoptronic mode sensors monitor the current position:

` of the luffing gear (outreach of the boom).
` of the slewing gear.
` of the load.
` of the rotator*.
WARNING
The following safety notes should be observed in Cycoptronic operation in
addition to the general and lifting device-specific safety notes:
Do not lift hatch covers in Cycoptronic operation.
Avoid diagonal pulling.
Do not suspend, assemble or lay down lifting device in Cycoptronic
operation.
Maximum rope length between lifting device and load is 8m.
Ensure that the load hangs free and is not in contact with anything.
Before all maintenance work, ensure that Cycoptonic operation is not
active.
Ensure that there is enough space for automatic compensatory
movements.
NOTE
The hoisting gear is not affected by the Cycoptronic control.
4.29.1 Conditions for Cycoptronic operation.
Ensure that the following conditions for Cycoptronic operation are fulfilled:
` All conditions for crane operation (see section Operation, crane opera
tion).
` Operation mode (e.g.: spreader, rotator, etc.)
` Heavy load operation not selected.
` Anti-collision system* not selected.
` Man riding* not selected.
` Travelling mode not selected.
` Boom down mode not selected.
LHM 120-280_002 353

141128
Operation
4.29.2 Operation
u Select Cycoptronic operation mode on the X26 control panel:

w LED in the button flashes.
w Hourglass appears in the status indicator on the monitor for approx. 12
seconds.
w LED lit up constantly.
Figure 197 Hourglass
w Then the Cycoptronic symbol appears instead of the hourglass.

w Cycoptronic active.
NOTE
If the symbol flashes continually:
Condition for Cycoptronic operation not fulfilled.
Observe error message.
u To activate Cycoptronic, press and hold down button 9 during crane move
ments (slewing gear, luffing gear) on one of the two master switches (left-
hand or right-hand).
w The pendulum movements of the load will be automatically smoothed
out.
w Status of the active Cycoptronic symbol changes (animation).
354 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Cycoptronic operation examples to be avoided:
u Releasing button 9 during a crane movement (slewing gear, luffing gear).

w Crane movements stop, no compensatory movements of the load.
w Severe pendulum movement of the load.
u Pressing button 9 again in combination with movement of the master switch
during the pendulum movement of the load:
w Severe and sudden compensatory movement by Cycoptronic.
u Operating hoisting gear (raising or lowering).

w Slewing and luffing gear not active.
u Moving left-hand master switch and pressing button 9.
w Slewing and luffing gear enabled.
u Moving master switch to neutral position during a crane movement (slewing

gear, luffing gear).
w Load is braked and pendulum movements compensated for therefore
load does not swing.
w Precise calculation of braking distance of load not possible (dependent
upon load movement).
NOTE
Compensatory movements of slewing and luffing gear can also take place
with master switch in neutral position.
NOTE
Hoisting rope loose and not in tension (e.g.: spreader lying upon
container):
w Cycoptronic switches off automatically.
Hoisting rope once again in tension and a slewing or luffing movement
takes place:
w Cycoptronic automatically reactivates.
LHM 120-280_002 355

141128
Operation
4.29.3 Advanced Container Control*
Condition for advanced container control:

` Cycoptronic already active.
` Rotator and spread correctly attached and connected to boom cable
drum.
u Select advanced container control on X26 control panel:

w Symbol for advanced container control appears on the monitor. First fla
shing (arrow) then steady.
w Rotator free-wheel deactivated and not selectable.
u Observe error message if flashing continuously.
The rotator free-wheel button* is deactivated during advanced container control.
Figure 198 Symbol for advanced container control
NOTE
If spreader width display does not correspond with the actual width of the
spreader:
Retract spreader fully until spreader width display once again corresponds
with the spreader symbol.
356 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 199 Operation mode of advanced container control
1 Rotator operation
2 Rotator operation with advanced container control
The container remains parallel to the defined position (quay, lorry, etc.).
u Define position by means of rotator.
The position is stored at the point where the rotator comes to a standstill:
Figure 200 Position rotator
1 Container
2 Rotator
3 Boom
4 Rotator in motion and position container.
5 Rotator stationary and thus position automatically saved.
LHM 120-280_002 357

141128
Operation
4.30 Cycoptronic teach-in*

Using the Cycoptronic teach-in function it is possible to define two destination
points that are necessary for a semi-automatic load transport.
NOTE
Teach-in* functions exclusively in combination with Cycoptronic*.
WARNING
The following safety notes should be observed in Cycoptronic teach-in operatio
in addition to the general and lifting device-specific safety notes:
Ensure that no collisions are possible between the teach-in points.
Boom and load can swing outside the teach-in points. Observe machine's
danger zone!
Do not lift hatch covers in Cycoptronic operation.
Avoid diagonal pulling.
Do not suspend, assemble or lay down lifting device in Cycoptronic
operation.
Maximum rope length between lifting device and load is 8m.
Ensure that the load hangs free and is not in contact with anything.
Before all maintenance work, ensure that Cycoptonic operation is not
active.
Ensure that there is enough space for automatic compensatory
movements.
4.30.1 Conditions for Cycoptronic teach-in

Ensure that the following conditions for Cycoptronic teach-in operation are ful
filled:
` All conditions for crane operation (see section Operation, crane opera
tion).
` Operation mode (e.g.: spreader, rotator, etc.)
` Heavy load operation not selected.
` Anti-collision system* not selected.
` Man riding* not selected.
` Travelling mode not selected.
` Boom down mode not selected.
` Cycoptronic* selected and active.
` Boom is located between the two destination points (left-hand point to the
left of boom and right-hand point to the right of boom).
358 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.30.2 Set destination points

u Start Cycoptronic operation mode (See section Operation, Cycoptronic).
u Press Cycoptronic teach-in button.

w Symbol appears in the status indicator of the monitor.
Figure 201 Mode screen with teach-in LHM 180-280
LHM 120-280_002 359

141128
Operation

Figure 202 Mode screen with teach-in LHM 180-280 (functional enhancement)
u Press automatic page button.

w Automatic page opens.
Figure 203 Cycoptronic/teach-in - automatic page
360 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Current position display
This display shows the current position (slewing gear and luffing gear - outre
ach).
Set destination points
The left-hand display stands for the left-hand destination point.
The right-hand display stands for the right-hand destination point.
Status display
Crane boom position
+ set destination point
u Position crane boom (lifting device) at desired left-hand destination point.

w Display takes on value of current position display.
w Boom is displayed as a square in the status indicator.
w Button flashes until destination point set.
u Press button to save the left-hand destination point.

w Destination point saved.
w Mark appears within the circle on the monitor.
w Mark (cross) appears in the status indicator.
u Repeat process to position and saveright-hand destination point.

w Both destination points are saved.
NOTE
Saving the destination points is also possible without Cycoptronic or
Cycoptronic teach-in active.
Saving the destination points possible exclusively with machine stationary.
LHM 120-280_002 361

141128
Operation
4.30.3 Setting the destination points using master switch
It is possible to move the destination points during Cycoptronic teach-in opera

tion by pressing a button on the master switch.
u Hold down left-hand master switch button 6 and bring boom (lifting device)
into desired position.
w Left-hand destination point flashes.
w Cycoptronic teach-in is deactivated.
w Cycoptronic still active.
u Release left-hand master switch button 6.

w Left-hand destination point is reset.
w Cycoptronic teach-in is reactivated.
u Hold down right-hand master switch button 6 and bring boom (lifting device)
into desired position.
w Right-hand destination point flashes.
w Cycoptronic teach-in is deactivated.
w Cycoptronic still active.
u Release right-hand master switch button 6.

w Right-hand destination point reset.
w Cycoptronic teach-in is reactivated.
362 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.30.4 Operation
Slewing gear and luffing gear should be run individually and thus yield 2 additio
nal destination points:
Figure 204 Destination points and possible slewing and luffing range
1 Left-hand destination point Slewing gear 1 and luffing gear 1

2 Left-hand destination point Slewing gear 1 and luffing gear 2
3 Right-hand destination point Slewing gear 2 and luffing gear 1
4 Right-hand destination point Slewing gear 2 and luffing gear 2
NOTE
In the range of the luffing gear point it is possible to increase or decrease
the radius (outreach) by operating the luffing gear.
u Move left-hand master switch to the left to approach left-hand destination

D B point (move to the right to approach right-hand destination point). Determine
the speed of the crane movements 0% - 100% by position of master switch.
w Machine moves automatically in the direction of the desired destination
C point.
A
w Caution symbol appears above the direction information.
w Cycoptronic teach-in symbol rotates.
NOTE
If the approached destination point is passed by the compensatory
movements of the Cycoptronic, so that e.g.: the left-hand destination point
is now to the left of the boom, nevertheless move master switch to the
left.
LHM 120-280_002 363

141128
Operation
Caution symbol
Direction information
The arrows displayed indicate the movement direction of the machine to reach
the destination points.
364 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.30.5 Changing sector

It is possible to leave the sector defined by the destination points.
u Hold down left-hand master switch button 5 in combination with the SHIFT
button.
w The boundary that is closer to the crane centre point can be passed.
w The destination point with the larger radius is moved to the minimum
radius.
w A new sector is defined and valid.
u Hold down left-hand master switch button 5 in combination with the SHIFT
button again to leave newly defined sector once again and release button 5
to set new destination point.
Figure 205 Defining new slewing and luffing range

1 Destination point 1
2 Possible slewing and luffing range
3 Boundary
4 Minimum radius
5 Crane centre point
6 Destination point 2
7 Newly defined sector
8 Moved destination point 1
LHM 120-280_002 365

141128
Operation
4.31 Anti-collision system*

The anti-collision system limits the movement of the boom to prevent collision
with obstacles. By setting teach-in points the working area of the machine is
determined.
3 anti-collision programs are available:

` Side wall
` Slewing gear limitation
` Luffing gear (outreach) limitation
WARNING
The following safety notes should be observed in anti-collision operation in
addition to the general and Cycoptronic, plus lifting device-specific safety notes
In reduced working area take particular care with and avoid swinging the
load!
Before all maintenance work, ensure that anti-collision operation is not
active.
NOTE
Symbols
The symbols for the teach-in points (side wall, slewing gear limitation) in
this description are for LHM before delivery date 2010 (see section 3,
Control elements, operating elements). However, the function is the
same.
4.31.1 Teach-in points
NOTE
General notes regarding teach-in points:
It is possible to trigger the same teach-in points several times by pressing
the relevant button on the control panel. The last set teach-in point is
saved.
A flashing LED means that the teach-in point is not valid, the second
teach-in point has not yet been set or a teach-in point has not been
properly cleared. Likewise, if the conditions (minimum distances, etc.) for
the programming of the teach-in points have not been adhered to.
The teach-in points remain stored even after the deactivation of the
anti-collision system and after the switching off of the machine.
Clearing teach-in points

u Press the button in question (for side wall, slewing gear limitation or luffing
gear limitation) for longer than one second.
w Teach-in point cleared.
366 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.31.2 Side wall
Figure 206 Side wall
1 Left-hand sector point

2 Side wall
3 Right-hand sector point
4 Valid working area
u Bring boom or lifting device into desired position.
u Press left-hand sector point button.

u Press right-hand sector point button.

w LEDs of both buttons (left-hand and right-hand sector point) are
constantly lit up.
NOTE
Conditions for teach-in points:
Minimum difference between teach-in points greater than 10° and less
than 350°.
Radius greater than 10m.
LHM 120-280_002 367

141128
Operation
4.31.3 Slewing gear limitation
Figure 207 Slewing gear limitation
1 slewing gear sector point left

2 reduced working speed
3 valid working area
4 slewing gear sector point right
u Press slewing gear sector point left button.

u Press slewing gear sector point right button.

w LEDs of both buttons (slewing gear sector point left and right) are
constantly lit up.
NOTE
Minimum difference between teach-in points greater than 20° and less
than 340°.
368 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.31.4 Luffing gear limitation
Figure 208 Luffing gear limitation

1 maximum outreach
2 valid working area
3 minimum outreach
4 luffing gear sector point minimum outreach
5 luffing gear sector point maximum outreach

u Press luffing gear sector point maximum outreach button.

u Press luffing gear sector point minimum outreach button.
w LEDs of both buttons (luffing gear end switch maximum and minimum
outreach) are constantly lit up.
NOTE
Minimum difference between teach-in points greater than 4m.
LHM 120-280_002 369

141128
Operation
4.31.5 Operation
u Ensure that the teach-in points are correctly set for the relevant anti-collision
function and the LED lights up in the relevant button.
u Press anti-collision On / Off button

w Anti-collision active.
Deselecting anti-collision system
u Press anti-collision On / Off button

w Anti-collision system deactivated.
u Clear the teach-in points if required.
370 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.32 Land- Sea side*

The land-sea side is a safety precaution that restricts maximum load and sle
wing gear when a pier is too weak.
NOTE
The following data is an example exclusively and is different for each
customer. For further information, please contact Liebherr service
department.
These instructions are an overview exclusively of the land-sea function!
WARNING
Failure to comply with safety notes!
Ensure that all safety notes for crane operation and lifting device used are
complied with!
Example:
Where a second support base is active, the load curve is apportioned as fol
lows:
` 75% sea side.
` 50% land side.
u Press Land-sea side button on control panel X26.

w Symbol appears in status line of screen.
Figure 209 Land- Sea side screen symbol
LHM 120-280_002 371

141128
Operation
Figure 210 Land- Sea side (example)
1 Sea side with 75% load curve

2 Slewing gear creep speeds (slewing gear stop) at 75% load curve
3 Land side with 50% load curve
In zone (2) slewing gear slows in linear fashion and on reaching set limit (in ex
ample illustrated at 355° or 185° / land side) slewing gear stops. Warning signal
sounds and slewing gear anticlockwise/clockwise stop appears (depending on
slewing direction):
Slewing gear left stop
If a slewing gear stop point is reached it is possible to slew back in the other
direction.
372 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.33 Fire alarm and fire extinguishing system*
The fire alarm and fire extinguishing system is fitted as standard in the ma
chinery house of each LHM with combustion engine. Optionally also in switch
cabinet room. In the event of a fire, a warning sequence and then a fire
extinguishing sequence is initiated by various sensors.
DANGER
Incorrect behaviour in event of fire!
See section Safety, behaviour in event of fire.
Observe correct handing of fire extinguishing units.
NOTE
Naked flames and smoking are forbidden in the machinery house and
switch cabinet room when fire alarm system is activated!
Keep all doors of the monitored areas closed. If doors are open the
desired extinguishing effect will not be achieved in the event of an
extinguishing sequence.
NOTE
After switching off the machine:
The fire alarm and fire extinguishing system remains active for another 1
hour!
Ventilation flaps close automatically after half an hour.
NOTE
Maintenance work:
When carrying out any maintenance work on the machine and when
entering the machinery house or the switch cabinet room, the fire
detection and extinguishing system must be turned off with the key
switch.
On resuming operation, the fire detection and extinguishing system must
be turned on again.
In the event of a fault, the fire detection and extinguishing system must be
turned off. There is a risk of false alarm.
Do not use a steam cleaner to clean in the area of the sensors. Danger of
damage!
FIRST AID
See section Safety, dangers, injury due to burns.
LHM 120-280_002 373

141128
Operation
4.33.1 Warning sequence
When only one sensor is triggered (smoke, UV or heat) the following steps will
be initiated:
` Warning signal on monitor (fire symbol)
` Tower cabin and slewing platform control units (acoustic warning signal
and flashing of warning lights)
` Activation of video surveillance (machinery house, switch cabinet room*)
NOTE
If just one sensor is triggered, the machine operator must ensure that
there is actually no danger!
The cancellation of an initiated sequence of the fire alarm and fire
extinguishing system is only possible by pressing the reset button
(slewing platform control unit)!
NO EXTINGUISHING SEQUENCE IS INITIATED!
If at least two different sensors are triggered (smoke, UV or heat) the war
ning sequence is initiated with a duration of 30 seconds.
Automatic actions and warning signals:

` Tower cabin and slewing platform control units (acoustic warning signal
and flashing of warning lights)
` Warning signal on monitor (fire symbol)
` Activation of video surveillance (machinery house, switch cabinet room*)
` Immediate closure of ventilation flaps (machinery house)
Automatic actions after 20 seconds:

` All machine movements are stopped
` Drive motors are shut down
` Diesel supply interrupted
` Interruption of hydraulic oil supply (see test of hydraulic oil supply shut-off
flap)
NOTE
When the ventilation flaps are closed the ventilation is no longer sufficient
and overheating or heating up of the machinery house occurs.
NOTE
After the warning sequence lasting in total 30 seconds the extinguishing
sequence is automatically initiated.
Only within this 30 seconds is the cancellation of the initiated sequence of
the fire alarm and fire extinguishing system possible by pressing the reset
button (slewing platform control unit).
374 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.33.2 Extinguishing sequence
After the end of the warning sequence the extinguishing sequence is initiated.
Automatic actions after the end of the warning sequence:

` Ventilation flaps remain closed
` All warning devices active including the warning devices mounted on the
outside of the machine (warning siren and warning light)
` Ignition of extinguishing generators
Automatic actions in the event of manual triggering (time to ignition of extinguis

hing generators approx. 10 seconds):
` Ventilation flaps are closed
` All warning devices are active including the warning devices mounted on
the outside of the machine (warning siren and warning light)
` All machine movements are stopped
` Drive motors are shut down
` Interruption of diesel supply
` Interruption of hydraulic supply
` Ignition of extinguishing generators
4.33.3 Operating and control units
Figure 211 Tower cabin fire alarm and fire extinguishing control unit
LHM 120-280_002 375

141128
Operation
Figure 212 Slewing platform fire alarm and fire extinguishing control unit
230 V
Figure 213 Fire alarm and fire extinguishing system switch cabinet
1 Control lamp lights up at power supply of 230V (operation)

2 Control lamp lights up in the event of a fault in the 1-hour battery
power supply (after switching off of machine)
376 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Key switch On / Off
u Turn key switch

w Fire alarm and fire extinguishing system is switched on or off depending
upon direction in which key switch is turned.
w If On operation control lamps 1 and 2 light up
Operation control lamp
u Operation control lamp 1 or 2 flashes

w Fault in the fire alarm and extinguishing system
Changeover between operation modes "manual triggering" and "automatic trig

gering" (tower cabin control unit)
u Switch to "manual triggering" operation mode.

w Automatic initiation of the extinguishing sequence after end of the war
ning sequence is suppressed.
u Switch to "automatic triggering" operation mode.

w Automatic initiation of the extinguishing sequence after end of the war
ning sequence is guaranteed.
NOTE
Fire recognition by sensors is guaranteed even in "manual triggering"
operation mode.
Manual triggering machinery house
u Press button to initiate the warning sequence and then extinguishing se
quence for the machinery house.
w Warning sequence and then extinguishing sequence are initiated imme
diately. The countdown of 10 seconds to the initiation of the extinguishing
sequence begins. The sequences can only be switched off by acknowled
ging with the reset button (slewing platform control unit). See extinguis
hing sequence, automatic actions during manual triggering.
NOTE
The manual triggering buttons are sealed. After operation of the manual
triggering buttons the seal should be renewed.
LHM 120-280_002 377

141128
Operation
Manual triggering switch cabinet room*
u Press button to initiate the warning sequence and then the extinguishing se
quence for the switch cabinet room.
NOTE
Reset
u Press button to switch off the warning sequence and then the extinguishing
sequence.
w Sequences are switched off.
NOTE
If the sensors still detect heat, smoke or flames, the countdown of 30
seconds to the initiation of the extinguishing sequence restarts.
Acknowledging warning signals of the control unit
u Press button to switch off the acoustic and optical warning signal of the con
trol unit.
w Acoustic and optical warning signal is switched off.
Manual triggering device of switch cabinet room*
u Press button to manually initiate the extinguishing sequence for the switch
cabinet room.
NOTE
378 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.33.4 Warning devices
Various acoustic and optical warning devices are fitted to warn the machine
operator and other personnel.
Warning devices in and on the machine:

` Fire symbol on the monitor
` Warning light, fire alarm control lamp and acoustic warning signal control
units (tower cabin and slewing platform)
` Warning horn and warning light (mounted externally)
Control units (tower cabin and slewing platform), acoustic and optical warning
signal.
Fire alarm control lamps 1 and 2
Fire symbol on the monitor
LHM 120-280_002 379

141128
Operation
4.33.5 Monitoring cameras
Additional cameras are fitted to monitor the machinery house and the switch
cabinet room*
Camera switchover on control panel X26
Camera selection on the control unit of the video surveillance system
u Camera changeover on X26 control panel activated by pressing the button

or by automatic activation of the fire alarm and fire extinguishing system.
w LED lights up
w Video surveillance system switches to fire alarm mode
w Position 1 of the camera selection activates machinery house camera 2
w Position 3 of the camera selection activates switch cabinet room camera*
u Camera changeover X26 control panel deactivated by deselection of the but

ton.
w LED not on
w Video surveillance system to normal mode
w Position 1 of the camera selection activates boom camera
w Position 3 of the camera selection activates reversing camera*
NOTE
Whenever there is a warning from the fire alarm and extinguishing
systems the cameras switch over automatically.
380 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.33.6 Sensors
Various types of sensor are fitted for the early detection of a fire.
Types of sensor:
` UV flame detector
` Heat detector
` Smoke detector
UV flame detector machinery house

(clean carefully in the event of severe soiling, see Chapter Maintenance, main
tenance plan)
Machinery house heat detector
Switch cabinet room* heat detector
Switch cabinet room* smoke detector
DANGER
Damaged sensors!
No early warning for combating a fire. Serious material damage and personal
injury!
Notify after sales service immediately in the event of damaged sensors.
Replace damaged sensors immediately.
LHM 120-280_002 381

141128
Operation
4.33.7 Extinguishing generators
The fire is extinguished by the extinguishing generators that are located in the
machinery house and optionally in the switch cabinet room.
NOTE
The aerosol emitted from the extinguishing generators is not harmful to
health during or after use! No oxygen deprivation!
During the flooding of the room by the extinguishing generators, severe
obstruction of visibility occurs that makes orientation impossible.
The emitted aerosol can however cause a scratchy, burning and
unpleasant feeling in the respiratory tract when inhaled.
CAUTION
Extinguishing generators heat up after ignition and the outlets have sharp
edges!
Danger of burns and injury.
Do not touch until extinguishing generators have cooled down.
Only replace extinguishing generators with gloves.
NOTE
Storage of the extinguishing generators.
The extinguishing generators can be stored for 10 years at room
temperature.
Disposal
Avoid the risk of environmental damage.
After a service life of 5 years all extinguishing generators must be
replaced by new extinguishing generators (see Maintenance,
maintenance plan).
Return the used or old extinguishing generators to the manufacturer or
dispose of them properly according to regional or national regulations.
4.33.8 Hydraulic oil supply shut-off flap
To guarantee safety, test the shut-off flap of the hydraulic oil supply (see Sec
tion Maintenance/fire alarm and fire extinguishing system/Testing the hydraulic
oil supply shut-off flap).
382 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.34 Video monitoring
4.34.1 Monitors
Figure 214 6.8" TFT screen (on LHM supplied before 2008)
Power ON/OFF
Switches the TFT monitor on and off.
Menu
Contrast Contrast adjustment

Bright Brightness
Colour Colour saturation
Tint Colour unit
Dimmer Background illumination
Pic-Reset Resets to default values
Revolve DN/UP Horizontal image mirroring: top/bottom
(for overhead installation)
Revolve RT/LT Vertical image mirroring: right/left
(for reversing camera)
M-Video 2/1 Change signal source:
1=VIDEO INPUT
2=FOR TUNER
Select Up
Select Down
LHM 120-280_002 383

141128
Operation
Figure 215 10.4" TFT screen (on LHM supplied from 2008 onwards)
1 Power On/Off *
2 Menu / Input
3 down / right / increase
4 up / left / reduce
5 Change entry mode
6 Automatic adjustment
CAUTION
Use of unsuitable cleaning equipment!
Scratches on display
Use soft, dry microfibre cloth exclusively.
4.34.2 Cameras
Up to 5 cameras can monitor the working area and the internal part of the ma
chine (fire risk):
` Boom head (view of lifting device)
` Reversing camera*
` Machinery house (left)*
` Machinery house (right)*
` Switch cabinet room*
384 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.34.3 control unit
Figure 216 Camera control unit
Control lever
Vertical:
` Zoom in/out
Horizontal:
` Manual focusing
NOTE
Control lever works exclusively for the boom head camera.
Autofocus
Video monitoring On/Off
Brighten image On/Off
camera selection
LHM 120-280_002 385

141128
Operation
4.34.4 Operation
NOTE
Whenever there is a warning from the fire alarm and extinguishing
systems the cameras switch over automatically.
camera selection
u Camera selection position 1:

w Boom head camera active.

w Not used.

w Reversing camera* active.
Camera switchover on control panel X26
u Press camera switchover on control panel X26

w Video monitoring system switches over to fire alarm mode.
w Machine housing camera 1 active.
w Machine housing camera 2 active.
w Switch cabinet room camera* active.
386 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.35 PIN Code*
Up to 40 PIN codes are available for operator identification. The data (Login/Lo
gout, date, time, operator) is stored on a card (flashcard)* and can therefore be
evaluated.
u Switch on the ignition (see chapter Operation, starting up).

w Home page Input PIN code appears on screen.
Figure 217 Home page Input PIN code
If PIN is not entered:

` Machine cannot be started.
` Joysticks are not enabled.
You can access the error page as errors can be processed nevertheless:
u Press Error page button on screen to access error screen.
w Error screen appears on monitor.
u Press Input PIN code button on screen to return to PIN input screen.
LHM 120-280_002 387

141128
Operation
4.35.1 Input PIN code / Login

Enter PIN on Litronic control panel:
Figure 218 Litronic control panel
NOTE
u Press the arrow button to activate the input field.

w Input field activated.
w Input is now possible.
u Enter the 4-digit code.
u Confirm with Enter button.

w If the PIN has been entered correctly the power operation screen ap
pears.
w Machine and therefore all functions are enabled.
NOTE
PIN is not displayed when entered on the screen!
If PIN entry is incorrect Stop symbol next to input field flashes 3 times.
u Press arrow button.
u Repeat PIN code input.
388 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.35.2 Change to PIN code home page
Without NRS data recorder*
Figure 219 Power operation screen without NRS data recorder*
u Press Input PIN code button on screen to return to PIN input screen on
home page.
LHM 120-280_002 389

141128
Operation
With NRS data recorder*
Figure 220 Power operation screen with NRS data recorder*

w Power operation screen with functional enhancement appears on moni
tor.
Figure 221 Power operation screen with NRS data recorder*
390 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Press Input PIN code button on screen to return to PIN input screen on
home page.
4.35.3 Logout
u Change to "input PIN code" home page (see chapter operation, PIN code,
change to PIN code home page)
Figure 222 Home page Input PIN code (already logged in)
u Press Logout button on screen.

w Operator is logged out.
w All crane movements are disabled.
w Engine can no longer be started.
u Switch off engine (see chapter Operation, starting up).
NOTE
Data recorder
All login and logout data is stored in the data recorder.
LHM 120-280_002 391

141128
Operation
4.36 Data recorder*

The data recorder saves and writes all load cycles made with the machine. Ho
wever the minimum load must be approx. 2 tonnes and the minimum dura
tion of a cycle 10 seconds.
A valid load cycle consists of:
` Raise load.
` Move load via a trigger point.
` Set down load.
` Write load cycle to memory card* or print out*.
4.36.1 Calibration
Calibration is necessary for every operation mode with data recorder:

` Check after every activation of the data recorder.
` After every change of lifting device.
u Raise lifting device. (see section Operation, crane operation)
w Lifting device is in the air and stationary.
w Load indication shows the same value constantly.

u Ensure that no error messages are active.
u Press the hook taring button.

w Load is tared.
392 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.36.2 Trigger points
Figure 224 Power operation screen LHM 180 - 280
u Press data recorder on the crane operation picture.

w Data recorder screen opens.
Figure 225 Data recorder page (no trigger points set)
LHM 120-280_002 393

141128
Operation
u Position machine so that trigger points 1 and 2 can be set situation-specifi

cally (see trigger points picture).
u Define trigger points by pressing the trigger points button on the monitor.
w Trigger point is defined on the slewing angle position.
w Small circle appears in the display.
w Slewing angle is saved and displayed.
The current slewing platform position shows the momentary slewing angle.
For machines with a year of manufacture before 2000 it is possible that the
trigger points are set by operation of the set trigger button on the X26 control
panel.
Figure 226 Trigger points
1 Ship
2 Trigger point 1
3 LHM
4 Trigger point 2
394 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.36.3 Operation
u Press data recorder start / stop recording button on X26 control panel.
w Recording of the load cycles starts and data is saved.
w Status indicator changes on the monitor.
u Press data recorder start / stop recording button once again.
w Recording of load cycles stops.
Upon recognition of a valid load cycle:
w Slow flashing of the LED in the data recorder start / stop button.
Upon saving of a valid load cycle:
w Rapid flashing of the LED in the data recorder start / stop button.
Figure 227 Data recorder screen (stop recording)
u To interrupt the recording press data recorder pause button on X26 control
panel.
w Recording of the load cycles is interrupted.
LHM 120-280_002 395

141128
Operation
NOTE
Emergency stop
When an emergency stop is actuated, the current load cycle becomes
invalid and is thus not saved!
To retain a valid load cycle after an emergency stop:
u Press data recorder pause button.
u Bring load to start point.
u Press data recorder pause button again.
u Raise load and continue.
NOTE
Display
The designation of all symbols in the data recorder screen can be seen in
the section Control and operating elements, data recorder screen.
396 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.36.4 Selecting hatch cover

With this function the relevant hatch cover is selected to be loaded or unloaded.
The data is then recorded.
Figure 228 Data recorder screen (stop recording)
Change active hatch

u Press hatch on the left or right of the monitor to select active hatch.
u Press hatch on right.

w Active hatch moves further to the right by a place.
u Press hatch on left.

w Active hatch moves further to the left by a place.
Hatch active
Hatch not active
LHM 120-280_002 397

141128
Operation
4.36.5 Memory card (flash card)*
Display of the free storage space on the flash card*.
All cycles recorded by the data recorder are automatically saved on the
memory card as soon as the data recorder is started:
u Start data recorder.

w Directory (LOAD000x) is automatically placed on the memory card.
u Stop data recorder.
w Directory (LOAD000x) is automatically closed.
u Restart data recorder.
w A new directory is created.
Data structure of the flash card:
Directories of the flash card:
LOAD0001
LOAD0002
LOAD0003
...
Content of the directories:
LOAD0001 / head.txt
data.txt
Structure of the file head.txt (example):
LOAD RECORDER LOAD0001

start date 05.12.09
start time 14:24:35
stop date 06.12.09
stop time 07:06:48
load cycles 10
sum load [t] 244.0
sum load hatch 1 [t] 44.0
NOTE
The file head.txt can be viewed on the monitor and in printed form.
398 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Structure of the file data.txt (example):
date time start time stop average load in max. load utiliza hatch operation
load [t] rope [t] [t] tion [%] mode
05.12.2009 14:24:35 14:30:22 32,7 50.4 52.4 74.6 1 8
05.12.2009 14:31:40 15:00:17 33.7 53.4 54.4 87.6 2 8
05.12.2009 15:01:20 15:34:55 33.3 52.7 53.1 81.0 3 8
...
date Start date

time start Time of load take-up
time stop Time load set down
average load [t] Weight of the load when driving over trigger
(excl. lifting device)
load in rope [t] Weight of total load when driving over
trigger (incl. lifting device)
max. load [t] Maximum weight during the entire cycle
utilization [%] Maximum utilization of the device as a percen
tage
hatch Hatch of the ship into which loading takes place
operation mode Operation mode code
Operation mode codes:
No operation mode selected 0

Travelling mode and crab mode 1
Hook 2
Heavy Load 3
Rotator 4
Rotator Heavy Load 5
Spreader 6
Spreader Heavy Load 7
Four-rope Grab (inc. Cargo) 8
Magnet 9
Motor Grab, Coil Tong, Log Grab 10
NOTE
Data.txt is only available as a file.
LHM 120-280_002 399

141128
Operation
4.36.6 Printer*
u Press print out last load cycle button on X26 control panel.
w The last load cycle is printed out.
Example:

start date 19.11.2009
start time 09:36:43
stop date 19.11.2009
stop time 9:41:18 AM
load cycles 2
sum load [t] 18.0
u Press print out current load cycle button on X26 control panel.
w The current load cycle is printed out.
Example:

start time 9:41:43 AM
stop time 09:41:55
load cycles 0
sum load [t] 0.0
Example:
Three data directories (LOAD0001, LOAD0002, LOAD0003) should be printed
out.
u Press print out load cycles from end button at the back of the X26 control
panel.
w The load cycles are printed out starting from the end. (The last load cycle
is not included)
u Before pressing print out load cycles from end button, press print out last
load cycle button!
start time 9:41:43 AM
stop time 09:41:55
load cycles 0
sum load [t] 0.0

start time 09:36:43
...
400 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.37 Litronic testing system
The Litronic test system is a comprehensive diagnosis and service tool avail
able on the Litronic monitor, service notebook and also via a modem connec
tion.
It is used to monitor I/O, flags, internal system variables and statuses.
The test system can also be used totally independently across a number of dif
ferent interfaces (e.g.: Litronic monitor, service notebook, modem* etc.)
4.37.1 Features
The Litronic test system provides the following functions:

` Displays the installed software ID and version numbers.
` Displays all module I/O with comments.
` Displays the internal memory variables with comments.
` Displays a selection list.
` Displays correction values (machine parameters)
` Displays messages (message stack)
` displays special functions:
S Modem configuration*
S Memory card control (CF)
S CAN configuration/status
4.37.2 General
The Litronic test system comprises a number of "pages"; the function keys are
used to move from page to page.
Some pages have two menu bars that you can toggle between using the func
tion symbol MENU 1/2 . The first menu bar is always active when a page first
opens.
The home page (main menu) is displayed when the Litronic test system is first
started. On each subsequent start, the page that was being used when the sys
tem was exited will be loaded. The other settings are also retained.
CAUTION
Wrong setting or correction value!
Material damage.
Authorised LIEBHERR Service personnel exclusively are entitled to
change the values of the Litronic test system.
LHM 120-280_002 401

141128
Operation
4.37.3 Start
u Press the Testing system button on the Litronic service panel. (at any time,
including during operation)
w The Litronic test system main menu is displayed on the screen.
NOTE
3
4
Figure 229 Litronic test system home page
1 Header: Name of the current screen

2 Main window: Actual information
3 Input: For display and correction of entered values, display of
status messages and input prompts.
4 Menu bar: Function symbol assignments
The first 2 lines in the main window (project ID and project ID index) show the
current software status.
NOTE
Multiple execution of the function symbols
Some commands such as: PREVIOUS and NEXT can be executed many
times in sequence.
NOTE
Operating error messages are not displayed while the Litronic test system
is running!
402 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.37.4 Home screen
Various other pages are accessed from the main menu. It is also possible to
terminate the Litronic test system and return to the mode screen by pressing
function key BACK.
The following pages are accessible from every main page:

` INPUT/OUTPUT
` MEMORY
` SELECT
` MESSAGES
` CORRECTION
` SPECIAL
4.37.5 INPUT/OUTPUT page
This page allows all the module I/O to be viewed.
Description of the function symbols:

` NEXT CAN LINE goes to the next CAN line
` PREVIOUS MODULE and NEXT MODULE toggle between the modules
in the selected CAN line.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move the cursor up and down to highlight a
channel in the selected module. The highlighted channel is displayed as
an inverse I or O.
` Add the highlighted channel to the Select list using SELECT. If it is al
ready selected, it will be removed from the list. The name of a channel
will be displayed inverse if it is selected.
` MENU 1/2 toggles between the 2 menu bars.
` DOCUMENT displays 16 channels (inputs/outputs) with comments on a
page. In digital modules (32 channels) use PREVIOUS and NEXT to
switch to the second page.
` UNDOCUM displays all inputs and outputs on one page.
` IDENTIFY displays 16 inputs/outputs on one page with the identifier on
one page. In digital modules (32 channels) use PREVIOUS and NEXT to
switch to the second page.
` BACK returns to the main menu.
4.37.6 MEMORY page
This page is used to display the internal flags that are being used.

` NEXT SECTION moves between the 16 flag sections: X-B-W-D, 1-2-3-4.
` PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE toggle between the pages. Each
page contains 16 flags from the selected section.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the flags. The highlighted flag ap
pears as an inverse M.
LHM 120-280_002 403

141128
Operation
` Use SELECT to add the highlighted flag to the Select list. If it is already
selected, it will be removed from the list. The name of a flag will appear
inverse if it is selected.
` DOCUMENT displays flags with additional comments.
` IDENTIFY displays flags with their identifiers.
4.37.7 SELECT page
To avoid having to always switch between the I/O and the flag menus, values
can be added to the Select list. These entries can then be viewed and edited on
the SELECT page at the same time. The Select list can consist of several
pages.
If a new value is added to the Select list when the list is already full, the oldest
value is removed from the list.
These Select lists can also be backed up on the memory card and reloaded
again when necessary.
Select list entry

` Using the function symbol SELECT directly on the INPUT/OUTPUT,
MEMORY or CORRECTION page.
` Using the function symbol ADD on the SELECT page by inputting the
IEC address.
` Reading from a file with the LOAD FROM CARD function key on the
SELECT page.
Delete select list entry

` Using the function symbol SELECT directly on the INPUT/OUTPUT,
MEMORY or CORRECTION page, call up a selected value.
` Delete the highlighted entry using the function symbol DELETE on the
SELECT page.

` ADD adds a new entry to the SELECT page. A menu bar is displayed
which is used to enter the IEC address. (see ADD SELECTION page)
` DELETE removes the selected entry from the list.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the separate select entries. The
highlighted entry is displayed as an inverse I, O or M.
` NEXT PAGE moves to the next page of the Select list so that more va
lues can be viewed.
` IDENTIFY displays the inputs/outputs or tags with the identifier.
` DOCUMENT displays the inputs/outputs or tags with the comments.
` LOAD FROM CARD loads a new SELECT list from a file. A menu is then
displayed. The menu contains a list of file names, one of which can be
selected, and also allows a specific file name to be entered. (see
SELECT FILE LOAD page)
404 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
` SAVE TO CARD saves the current SELECT list in a file. A menu appears
from which the name of the file can be selected. (see SELECT FILE
SAVE page)
ADD SELECTION page
This page is accessed using the ADD function symbol from the SELECT page.
The IEC address is entered in the input line using the corresponding function
symbols and the numeric keys on the Litronic service panel.
Example:
S Desired IEC address: %QW1.17.1
S %, Q and W are entered using the corresponding function symbols.
S 1.17.1 is entered as normal numbers and can be edited as necessary
using function symbol TAKE & BACK to accept the address.

` Use M, I or Q to select the IEC type flag, input or output. These change
each time a key is pressed and appear in the input bar. A correction can
be made by pressing another type.
` X, B, W, D are used to select the size of the IEC entry. These change
each time a key is pressed and appear in the input bar. A correction is
made by pressing another size.
` TAKE & BACK calls up the SELECT page again and takes the IEC
address from the input line.
SELECT FILE LOAD page
Enables a saved Select list to be loaded from the memory card.

` CHARACTER NEXT adds a new character to the end of the input line.
New characters can also be added by entering numbers and letters.
` CHARACTER DOWN and CHARACTER UP modify the last character in
the input line.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move the cursor up and down in the list. When a
file is selected, its name is copied to the input bar. this is the easiest way
to select the desired file.
` LOAD loads the file displayed in the input line and then returns to the
SELECT page.
` BACK abandons the operation and returns to the Select page.
SELECT FILE SAVE page
Saves a Select list to the memory card.

` CHARACTER NEXT adds a new character to the end of the input line.
New characters can also be added by entering numbers and letters.
LHM 120-280_002 405

141128
Operation
` CHARACTER DOWN and CHARACTER UP modify the last character in

the input line.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move the cursor up and down in the list. When a
file is selected, its name is copied to the input bar.
` SAVE saves the Select list in a file (enter file name in the input line) and
returns to the Select page.
` BACK abandons the operation and returns to the Select page.
CORRECTION page
This page is used to display the correction values. It is very similar to the
MEMORY page, but only displays correction values.

` NEXT SECTION moves between the 4 correction value sections:
X-B-W-D
` PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE toggle between the pages. Each
page contains 16 correction values from the selected section.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the correction values. The high
lighted correction value is displayed as an inverse M.
` DOCUMENT displays the correction values with comments.
` IDENTIFY displays the correction values with the identifier.
` BASE MIN & MAX displays the correction values with the default value
and the upper and lower limits.
` SAVE TO CARD saves the current correction values in a file. The file
name can be selected from the menu that now appears. A standard file
name (created from the current date) is suggested. This name can, of
course, be changed (see SELECT FILE SAVE page).
` Use SELECT to add the highlighted entry to the Select list. If it is already
selected, it will be removed from the list. The name of a correction value
will be displayed inverse if it is selected.
MESSAGES page
This page displays the saved application messages (e.g. sensor errors) and all
system errors (CAN bus, module, CPU, etc.). These are buffered internally.

` all lists all stored messages (max. 15.000).
` PREVIOUS START and NEXT START move between all messages sa
ved at each start-up.
` PRIORITY MAXFILTER and PRIORITY MINFILTER list the saved mes
sages filtered by priority.
` GROUP FILTER lists the saved messages filtered by certain groups.
` SINCE START lists exclusively the messages since the machine was
started.
` LANGUAGE enables a different language to be loaded for the messages.
Messages that are not found in the selected language are displayed in
406 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
English. This language change applies only to the MESSAGES page and
not to the Litronic test system (see LANGUAGE SELECTION page).
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the messages.
` SAVE TO CARD saves all the messages (ALL or SINCE START) in a
file. The file name can be selected from the menu that now appears. A
standard file name (created from the current date) is suggested. This
name can, of course, be changed (see SELECTION FILE SAVE page).
LANGUAGE SELECTION page
The language in which the messages are displayed is selected on this page.

` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the separate language files.
` SELECT is used to select and load the highlighted language.
LHM 120-280_002 407

141128
Operation
4.37.8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page
You can access various other pages from this page, or return to the home page
by pressing BACK.
The following pages can be accessed from the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

page.
` MODEM
` DISPLAY INFO
` DRIVE
` SYSTEM LANGUAGE
` TIME
` SAMPLE
` LEVEL
` SYSTEM STATUS
` DAN CONFIG
` MDE/PDE
` CAN LINE INFO
` CLIENTS
MODEM FUNCTIONS page*
This page is used to configure and control the modem*.
The current modem status (Online, Offline, False PIN etc.) may be viewed in
the input bar.

` DIAL dials a previously entered phone number.
` HANGUP terminates an active modem connection (hang up handset).
` RLP ON / OFF switches the radio link protocol for GSM modem connec
tions on or off. These settings become active the next time the machine
is switched on.
` V32/V110 switches on the v32 or v110 protocol for GSM modem connec
tions. This setting is not active until the next time the machine is switched
on.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT change between the interfaces; the default Mo
dem Client is COM2.
` PIN INPUT allows the PIN code for GSM modems to be entered manu
ally.
` MODEM CONNECT enables the modem server program to be started on
an unused interface.
` BACK returns to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page.
408 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
DRIVE FUNCTIONS page
This page displays information about the current drive.

` REMOVE CARD must be performed before removing a memory card
from the drive. Switching off the Litronic control system is another option.
The system automatically recognises when a new card has been inser
ted.
` DIR LIST displays the files and directories (but no sub-directories) on the
current drive.
` PREVIOUS DRIVE and NEXT DRIVE change between the individual
drives available to the Litronic controller.
` CHECK CARD checks the current drive for errors
TIME FUNCTIONS page
Date and time are displayed on this page.

` DAYLIGHT SAVING toggles daylight saving time on and off.
` TIMEZONE MOVE WEST moves the time zone settings an hour to the
west.
PRIOITY LEVEL page (for LIEBHERR service per

sonnel only)
Enter the Litronic code, which provides access to the Supervisor Level, on this
page.

` When the LEVEL CHANGE key is pressed, the value in the input line is
examined to see whether it is a valid Litronic code.
CAN CONFIGURATION page
All the CAN modules that are inserted, together with their usage status, are dis
played on this page

` NEXT PAGE moves to the next page.
LHM 120-280_002 409

141128
Operation
CAN LINE INFORMATION page
This page displays the CAN lines being used and their settings.

` MODULE INFO changes to the CAN CONFIGURATION page.
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION page
The display options for the INPUT/OUTPUT page are defined on this page.

` ALL MODULES is used to display all CAN modules (USED and NOT
USED) on the INPUT/OUTPUT page.
` ONLY USED MODULES: only modules that are currently set to USED
are displayed on the INPUT/OUTPUT page.
` NUMBER STYLE switches the inputs, outputs and flags between stan
dard and hexadecimal display.
` UPDATE INTERVAL changes the update rate of the input, output and
flag displays.
SYSTEM LANGUAGE SELECTION page
This function allows the system language to be changed by selecting a lan

guage file or loading the internal standard language. The selected system lan
guage is only activated once the Litronic control system is switched back on.

` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the separate language files.
` SELECT loads the marked language files as the new system language
and returns to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page.
` USE DEFAULT loads English as the new system language and returns to
the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page.
` BACK abandons the operation and returns to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
page.
410 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
SAMPLING TRACE page
The SAMPLING TRACE is used for online data recording of previously defined
inputs/outputs.
The page displays SAMPLING TRACE information and allows its status to be
modified, and also allows the recorded data to be saved.

` SAMPLE ACTIVE activates the SAMPLING TRACE functionality once
the options have been defined. It is used to record the data and check
the trigger conditions.
` TRIGGER MANUAL simulates the trigger conditions. This function key is
only available if SAMPLING TRACE is active and the trigger conditions
are not yet satisfied.
` END MANUAL ends SAMPLING TRACE recording and returns automat
ically to the READY status. This function key symbol is only available if
SAMPLING TRACE is active.
` LOAD FROM CARD loads a configuration from a saved SAMPLING
TRACE file. A menu is then displayed from which you can select a file
name (see SELECT FILE LOAD page).
` SAVE TO CARD saves the recorded data and the SAMPLING TRACE
configuration in a file. A menu is then displayed from which you can se
lect a file name (see SELECT FILE SAVE page).
` SAVE TO SELECT takes variables that were used in the SAMPLING
TRACE and saves them in the SELECT list. Existing entries in the
SELECT list are deleted.
` LOAD FROM SELECT loads the currently selected variables into the
SAMPLING list.
` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between configuration data. The highlighted
(active) entry is displayed inverse.
` CHANGE is used to change the highlighted entry to the value in the input
bar. This only happens, however, if the value is within the permitted lim
its.
LHM 120-280_002 411

141128
Operation
SYSTEM STATUS page
This page shows the current system status (running, stopped, etc.) and the tim
ing of the PLC (programmable logic controller) task.

` SYSTEM TASKS displays information about the SYSTEM TASKS.
` BOARD INFO displays board information (voltage, temperature, etc.).
MDE/PDE page
This page shows the status of the MDE (Machine Data Acquisition), the PDE
(Process Data Acquisition) and the data logger.

` MDE displays the MDE data.
` PDE displays the PDE data.
` SELECT GRAPHIC lists the saved graphics (e.g. company logo) for
printing the PDE data. The desired graphic can be selected.
` LOGGER displays the data from the data recorder.
` SAVE TO CARD saves the MDE, PDE or data recorder data in a file. The
file name can be selected from the menu that now appears. A standard
file name (created from the current date) is suggested. This name can, of
course, be changed (see SELECT FILE SAVE page).
CLIENTS page
This page shows the status of the individual communication interfaces (clients).

` PREVIOUS and NEXT move between the interfaces
412 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.38 Operator`s seat
CAUTION
Incorrect adjustment of driver's seat!
Posture damage and injuries.
Only adjust driver's seat with machine stationary
Adjust driver's seat to the best of your knowledge and belief
Figure 230 Driver's seat overview
1 Arm rest
2 Safety belt*
3 Seat height adjustment
4 Inclination of seat
5 Damper setting
6 Inclination of backrest
7 Horizontal adjustments
8 Safety belt clasp*
9 Backrest
10 Headrest
LHM 120-280_002 413

141128
Operation
4.38.1 Adjusting the driver's seat
Figure 231 Adjusting the driver's seat horizontally
u Adjust driver's seat horizontally using lever 6
Figure 232 Seat height and backrest inclination of driver's seat
u Adjust inclination of back rest using lever 7

u Adjust seat height using lever 3
414 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
Figure 233 Adjust inclination of seat and arm rests
u Adjust inclination of seat using lever 4

u Adjust arm rest using screw 1 (each arm rest is adjusted individually)
Figure 234 Damper setting
u Adjust driver's weight by turning the adjustment wheel 5 on the driver's seat
LHM 120-280_002 415

141128
Operation
4.39 Windscreen wiper
Every LHM is fitted with windscreen wipers in the tower cabin (see chapter Pro
duct description, technical description, tower cabin).
The following buttons are installed for each windscreen wiper on the relevant
control panel:
u Press "windscreen wiper on/off" button

w Windscreen wiper is on.
u Press "Windscreen wiper on/off" button.

w Windscreen wiper is off.
u Press "Intermittent windscreen wiper on/off" button

w Intermittent windscreen wiper is on (wiper wipes at defined intervals).
u Press "Intermittent windscreen wiper on/off" button

w Intermittent windscreen wiper is off.
u Press and hold down "Windscreen wash system on/off" button

w Windscreen wash system is on.
u Release "Windshield wash system on/off" button.

w Windscreen wash system is off.
CAUTION
Dirty windscreens!
Poor view. Personal injury and damage to property.
Ensure that sufficient screen wash solution is present (see chapter
product description, technical description, turntable cabin or tower cabin,
screen wash solution filler neck
416 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.40 Telephone system

CAUTION
Damage!
Improper use of the telephone system adversely affects the service life of the
telephone system components.
Avoid exposure to high temperatures and sunlight.
Keep rain and water spray well away from telephone system components.
CAUTION
Improper operation of the telephone system and the telephone system
components!
Damage to the telephone system and the telephone system components.
Avoid exposure to high temperatures and sunlight.
Keep rain and water spray well away from telephone system components.
4.40.1 Telephone sockets
Figure 235 Telephone socket

1 Lock
2 Cover
u Unfasten lock (1) and remove cover (2)
u Insert telephone system plug.
w Telephone system is ready.
Telephone sockets are installed in:

` Switch cabinet room
` Machinery house
` undercarriage switch cabinet X5
` Tower cabin
` Slewing platform cabin
` Winches
` Tower
` undercarriage access
` Boom
` Slewing platform middle section
LHM 120-280_002 417

141128
Operation
4.40.2 Handset operation
The handset is located in the black box on the front undercarriage access.
u After use, secure handset in box (on bracket) again.
Figure 236 Telephone system handset
1 Loudspeaker
2 Call button
3 Speak button
4 Microphone
5 Top screw for battery changing
6 Bottom screw for battery changing
7 Connector plug
u Insert connector plug (7) of the handset into desired telephone socket.
u Press call button 2.

w Signal sounds on handset, headset control or headset itself.
u To speak, press speak button 3.
418 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.40.3 Headset and control operation
Figure 237 Headset and control for telephone system
1 Loudspeaker
2 Microphone
3 Lever
4 Call position
5 Off position
6 Talk position
7 Connector plug
8 Socket
9 Screws for battery changing
10 Plug
LHM 120-280_002 419

141128
Operation
u Insert plug (10) in socket (8) of control unit.
u Insert connector plug (7) of control unit into desired telephone socket.
u Set lever (3) of control unit to call position (4).

w Signal sounds on handset, headset control or headset itself.
u Set lever (3) of control unit to talk position (6).

w Headset is ready for conversation.
u Set the lever (3) of control unit to off position (5) if telephone system is not in
active use.
w Headset is ready for reception.
4.40.4 Change batteries
u Loosen and remove identified screws (items 5 and 6 on handset, item 9 on

headset control unit).
u Open the cover.
u Change batteries (observe polarity).
u Close cover and screw firmly.

w Batteries are changed.
Disposal
regulations.
420 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.41 Setting the time
Figure 238 Power operation screen LHM 180 - 280
u Press "Operating hours screen" button.

w Operating hours screen opens.
Figure 239 Service hour meter screen LHM120-280
LHM 120-280_002 421

141128
Operation
u Press "Set time" button.

w Time stops and the hour starts to flash.
Figure 240 Litronic service desk
u Use Litronic service panel to set the hour.
u Press the right arrow button to cycle between hours, minutes and seconds.
u Enter the time on the numeric keypad.
u Confirm with Enter button.
u Press "Set time" button.

w The time is now set.
Troubleshooting:
` Time stops and symbol flashes on the operating hours screen.
` The power operation screen displays no hours, minutes or seconds.
u Repeat time setting procedure.
422 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.42 PA amplifier
CAUTION
Improper operation of the amplifier!
Damage.
Keep foreign bodies and liquids away from the amplifier.
Protect amplifier against direct sunlight. Overheating danger! Allow to cool
off before use.
Switch off immediately in the event of smoke or stench!
Do not overload the amplifier for long periods. Thermal overload!
Clean front of amplifier exclusively with a dry and clean cloth. Do not use
cleaning agents or chemicals.
4.42.1 Overview
Figure 241 Overview of PA amplifier
1 XLR microphone input

2 DIN microphone input
3 Volume control for microphone input
4 Volume control for additional inputs
5 Sound control
6 ATT switch
7 Mono switch
8 AUX input
9 ON / OFF switch
XLR microphone input
This input allows the use of dynamic microphones with balanced and unbalan
ced output. If this input is used at the same time as the DIN input, both signals
are transmitted
LHM 120-280_002 423

141128
Operation
DIN microphone input

This input allows the use of dynamic microphones with balanced and unbalan
ced output. If this input is used at the same time as the XLR input, both signals
are transmitted Special connections to the plug allow music to be turned down
manually (see ATT switch). LED lights up when microphone is plugged in.
Volume control for microphone inputs
The volume of both microphone inputs (XLR and DIN) is controlled by the vo
lume control.
Volume control for additional inputs
The volume of the AUX input is controlled by the volume control for the additio
nal inputs.
Sound control
The high and low frequencies are controlled by the sound control. The middle
position is neutral.
ATT switch
The AUX input is turned down by the operation of the ATT switch. This function
is used to give priority to microphone announcements that would otherwise be
mixed with AUX signals.
Mono switch
Switching from STEREO to MONO for AUX input.
AUX input
The AUX input allows the connection of car radio, CD player, MP3 player, etc.
4.42.2 Operation
u Volume control to minimum (turn right round to the left).
u ON / OFF switch to ON and ensure that LED lights up.

7
u Operate button 7 PA system ON on the right-hand master switch.
NOTE
To prevent background noise and feedback, speak close to microphone.
424 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.43 Undercarriage bell
DANGER
Third parties entering the danger zone.
Serious injuries, death!
Do not loiter under a suspended load.
Pay attention to crane movements.
Before accessing the machine or the danger zone, make contact with the
operator.
Figure 242 Bell on undercarriage
u Ring undercarriage bell

w Access to undercarriage appears on screen.
LHM 120-280_002 425

141128
Operation
u Press "Information screen" function key.

w Information screen is displayed on monitor.
Figure 243 Information screen, "Access to undercarriage" symbol
426 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.44 Emergency exit

` Emergency descent eyelets
CAUTION
Leaving the machine improperly through carelessness and failure to use the
emergency descent rescue equipment correctly!
Severe injury to one or more persons.
See Abseil Rescue Equipment documentation supplied with the product.
CAUTION
Emission of smoke!
Poisoning or suffocation.
Use fire escape package. See also additional documentation, Fire escape
hood.
NOTE
Use the ladder in the slewing platform as a maintenance ladder
exclusively and not as an auxiliary exit!
LHM 120-280_002 427

141128
Operation
4.44.1 Emergency exit from the tower cabin

CAUTION
Failure to use the emergency descent rescue equipment correctly!
Danger of accident and falling.
Use abseil rescue equipment exclusively after thorough training.
The abseil rescue equipment must be inspected after every use or at
least once a year and the results documented (see Maintenance chapter,
Maintenance schedule).
Arrange for repairs to be carried out exclusively by the manufacturer!
NOTE
In the event of fire:
Use fire escape hood in escape package!
1 Abseil rescue equipment

2 Abseil eye
u Take the emergency descent rescue equipment (1) out of its storage in the
tower cabin.
u Fasten the rope to the emergency descent eyelet (2) with the karabiner (on
the rope).
u Throw rope over hand rail.
1 Cover
2 Storage compartment
3 Rescue harness, rope, karabiner
u Stand over the abseil rescue equipment with legs apart.
u Grasp rescue harness by the D-rings
u Lift rescue harness up to below the shoulders.
u Latch D-rings into the karabiner (of the rescue harness).
428 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
u Slip "braces" up.
u Step over the tower cabin platform rails, suspended in the emergency de
scent rescue equipment.
u Hold the rope that is running through the abseil rescue equipment firmly in
left hand.
u Operate brake lever with right hand.
u Carefully release brake!
NOTE
To stop or slow down, hold the running rope tightly and / or release brake
lever.
LHM 120-280_002 429

141128
Operation
4.45 Decommissioning
WARNING
Unauthorised use of machine!
Severe physical injury and material damage.
When leaving the machine, protect against unauthorised use, damage by
vandalism and any possible adverse environmental impact.
When shutting down the machine, a distinction is made between:

` Short work interruption: Waiting time or breaks
` Long work interruption: Overnight or several days

` The machine is on ground that has a suitable load-bearing capacity.
` The machine does not impede any public safety facilities for persons or
animals.
` The place where the machine is left is adequately secured.
` Ensure that a power supply is provided for the safety equipment (e.g.
helicopter light*, etc.).
` The machine is horizontal in parked position.
4.45.1 Parked position at wind speeds less than 50 m/s
The parked position must be within the following radii to ensure that the ma
chine is parked safely:
LHM 120 180 280

Radius (m) 16-20 17-21 14-22
DANGER
Wind speed from 50m/s
Danger of load breakaway, personal injury and material damage.
Lay down the boom.
4.45.2 Short work interruption
The machine operator remains on site.
u Set down and secure the load.
u Switch off diesel engine before leaving the tower or slewing platform cabin
and lock up tower or slewing platform cabin.
430 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.45.3 Long work interruption
The machine operator leaves the site.
u Set down and secure the load.
u Remove the ignition key and keep it in a safe place.
u Lock doors.
S Tower cabin
S Slewing platform entrance
S Undercarriage flaps
S Switch cabinet room doors
LHM 120-280_002 431

141128
Operation
4.46 Emergency stop
The emergency stop buttons allow the machine to be shut down quickly in a
dangerous situation.
As soon as an emergency stop key is pressed:

` diesel engine shuts down,
` multi-disc brakes are applied thereby abruptly braking the engine.
WARNING
Press emergency stop button!
Swinging load, damage to property and personal injury.
No personnel in danger zone!
Use emergency stop button exclusively for emergency cut-off and not as
a normal procedure for shutting down the engine.
NOTE
After restoring operational safety, disengage emergency stop button by
turning anticlockwise in order to restart engine.
Check operation of multi disc brakes and look for wear after every
emergency stop.
Visually inspect steel structure, ropes and pulleys for damage.
Emergency stop control panel
Emergency stop
432 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.47 Emergency operation

DANGER
Emergency operation deactivates all safety devices and limit switches on the
machine.
No automatic stop! Danger of accident, injury or damage!
Bring in additional personnel to oversee movements.
Stay away from danger zone.
Execute emergency operation exclusively when machine is at a complete
standstill.
Start emergency operation by switching the manual valves and accumulator

that is filled either by the feed pressure system or with the hand pump.
Emergency operation consists of:
` Lower load
` turning the turntable
NOTE
Manual valves:
Operating position: Valves point downwards.
Emergency operating position: Valves are in horizontal position.
Figure 244 Overview 1 of emergency operation LHM 120-280

1 Pressure accumulator and valve A60
2 Hand pump
LHM 120-280_002 433

141128
Operation
Figure 245 Overview 2 of emergency operation LHM 120-280
1 Valve for hoisting gear H62A (closing winch)*

2 Valves for slewing gear D62A, D62B, D62C
3 Valve for hoisting gear H62 (Haltewinde)
4 Valve for hoisting gear H60 (holding winch)
434 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.47.1 Lower load
NOTE
Ensure that there is enough space to lower load. Turn slewing platform
(see chapter Operation, emergency operation, turn slewing platform) if
space not enough.
After lowering load check boom cable drum for damage (stopping brakes).
u Bring valve H62 and if necessary H62A* to emergency operation position.
u Move valve H60 to emergency operation position.
u To release the winch holding brakes, slowly and carefully move valve A60
(located below accumulator on LHM 120-280) to emergency operation posi
tion.
u Before load touches ground, stop movement by slowly closing valve A60.
w Load is on ground.
LHM 120-280_002 435

141128
Operation
NOTE
Hoisting gear holding brakes release exclusively when sufficient pressure
(above 20 bar) available in accumulator.
If pressure insufficient, charge accumulator (see chapter Operation,
emergency operation, charge accumulator).
NOTE
Error message display: Analog signal difference - incremental sensor when
ignition switched back on.
When ignition is switched off, lowering the load creates a difference between
the two sensor values. The difference prevents work resuming after
I 0 II emergency operation. To delete error message, execute following steps:
1 Press and hold down button (2) winch service mode on control panel X25
below key switch (1).
Bring boom to minimum outreach.
Raise hoisting gear until load lifting device reaches upper limit switch.
Release button (2) below key switch (1).
2
436 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.47.2 turning the turntable
WARNING
Swinging suspended load!
Do not stand under a suspended load.
Only perform emergency operation movements when they are being
overseen by additional personnel.
u Move valves D62A, D62B and D62C to emergency operation position.
u To open slewing gear holding brakes, open valve A60 (emergency operation
position) below accumulator (LHM 120-280).
w Holding brakes are open and slewing gear can be turned.
LHM 120-280_002 437

141128
Operation
NOTE
Slewing gear holding brakes release exclusively when sufficient pressure
(above 20 bar) available in accumulator.
If pressure insufficient, charge accumulator (see chapter Operation,
emergency operation, charge accumulator).
Figure 246 Turn fasteners (2x) for slewing platform LHM 120-280
Prerequisites for turning slewing platform:

` Tensile force needed to turn machine is 2 t.
` Attach rope of sufficient thickness to one of the two fastening points.
` Using another machine (e.g.auxiliary crane, forklift truck etc.) turn sle
wing platform.
438 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Operation
4.47.3 Charge accumulator
If pressure in accumulator drops below 20bar, close holding brakes of slewing

or hoisting gear. To guarantee emergency operation charge accumulator with
hand pump.
u Move hand pump lever up and down to charge accumulator.
u Ensure valve is closed.
u Move valve A60 to normal position as shown.
u Using hand pump, pump until manometer (1) on accumulator shows a

pressure of approx. 35bar.
4.47.4 After emergency operation
To restore crane operation after emergency operation is complete
u Bring all valves A60, D62A, D62B, D62C, H60, H62 and H62A* back to
normal position.
w Crane operation is restored.
LHM 120-280_002 439

141128
Operation
440 LHM 120-280_002
141128
5
141128
5
141128
Maintenance
5. Maintenance
Make sure that the persons carrying out the maintenance on the machine:
` have read and understood this entire operating manual
` have received instruction on the machine
` have received training on this machine at the Liebherr training centre
` use only original Liebherr spare parts
NOTE
Liebherr will regard as null and void any obligations entered into by
Liebherr and/or its dealers such as warranties, service agreements etc.
without prior notice where spare parts which are not original Liebherr
parts or have not been purchased from Liebherr are used for maintenance
and repairs.
All the maintenance work and maintenance intervals listed in the maintenance
schedule must be carried out/observed. Descriptions of the maintenance work
to be carried out on the diesel engine can be found in the documentation sup
plied with the engine.
Proper functioning of the machine requires conscientious care and mainte

nance. The hydraulic system may be considered maintenance-free if the filters
are checked and changed appropriately.
The maintenance intervals given in the maintenance schedule are actual ma
chine operating hours.
If these intervals are longer than half-yearly as a result of low machine

usage, all parts that require lubrication and all external exposed parts must be
lubricated at least half-yearly to protect them against the influence of the
weather.
Whenever the machine is not going to be used for at least 3 months, all
exposed parts must be protected against the influence of the weather. This
protection must be removed before recommissioning the machine.
CAUTION
Incorrect maintenance or failure to observe the maintenance and inspection
intervals may cause damage or premature wear to the machine.
To avoid damage to the machine:
Observe the prescribed maintenance and inspection intervals. Shorten
the intervals if necessary.
WARNING
If incorrect procedures are followed, the machine may be damaged and
serious injuries may be caused to personnel!
Turn off the machine when carrying out maintenance work.
Deactivate the fire detection and extinguishing system.
Secure the machine against unauthorised start-up.
LHM 120-280_002 441

141128
Maintenance
5.1 Maintenance schedule
Maintenance operations are divided into two groups identified as follows:
z Symbols with colour fill:

` The machine operator or his maintenance personnel carry out the
maintenance work under their own responsibility.
` Maintenance personnel:
Trained personnel with the appropriate qualifications, specialist know
ledge and experience needed to carry out maintenance tasks.
Z Symbols without colour fill:

` Authorised and qualified personnel of LIEBHERR or its authorised
dealers carry out these maintenance and inspection tasks.
` Authorised and qualified personnel:
Specially trained personnel with comprehensive and in-depth knowledge
of components and systems who have been authorised by LIEBHERR to
carry out this work.
These are primarily Liebherr service engineers who have been trained by
the manufacturer itself or one of its service agents.
Special intervals are intervals for maintenance to be carried out at the time indi
cated.
NOTE
The spare parts catalogue lists all spare parts need for carrying out
maintenance and inspection work.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the maintenance intervals will cause premature wear
or damage to the machine.
To avoid premature wear or damage to the machine:
Carry out maintenance at the interval that expires first (e.g.: if "2000
operating hours" or "annually" is stipulated, whichever is reached first
applies)
NOTE
Notes regarding maintenance intervals:
To determine maintenance intervals, use the mechanical operating hours
counter on the switch cabinet (see chapter: Control elements, Control
units, Switch cabinet)
If necessary, carry out the maintenance and inspection tasks before the
specified intervals.
Clean or change contaminated filters before the specified intervals.
442 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
Maintenance/inspection according
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT
to
operating hours
by trained maintenance personnel by authorised maintenance
4000h /every 2 years

personnel
1000h / half-yearly
500h / 3-monthly
one-off task one-off task
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly
repetition interval repetition interval

8h / daily
z when necessary Z when necessary

L yearly, at the start of the cold season
Overall machine
Visual check of crane
Check threaded connections and weld seams for rust (see Technical in
formation, weld seam inspection overview)
Inspect weld seams of luffing cylinder
for the first time at 15000h, thereafter at 20000h, thereafter every 2000h
or yearly (see Technical information, weld seam inspection overview)
Check preservation coating (see chapter Maintenance, anti-corrosion
coating)
Check preservation finish (see chapter Maintenance, anti-corrosion coa
ting)
Diesel engine, MAN D2842 LE (LHM 280)
Check the engine externally for oil, fuel and coolant leaks
Check the oil level of the diesel engine
Change engine oil (first change after 20 hrs in the case of biodiesel*, then
every 250 hrs / 1.5 months, see Maintenance chapter, Diesel engine fuel,
Biodiesel - FAME)
Change engine oil filter (first change after 20 hrs in the case of biodiesel*,
then every 250 hrs / 1.5 months, see Maintenance chapter, Diesel engine
fuel, Biodiesel - FAME)
Change engine oil separator (every 1000 hrs / 6 months in the case of
biodiesel*, see Maintenance chapter, Diesel engine fuel, Biodiesel -
FAME)
Check all connecting elements in the switch cabinet for tight fit and tigh
ten if necessary
Retighten cylinder head bolts (1st tightness)
after the first 20-50h (with overhauled engine)
Retighten cylinder head bolts (2nd tightness) (with overhauled engine)
Check ribbed V-belts, replace if necessary
Check V-belt tightener pulley, replace if necessary
Check and if necessary adjust the valve clearance
Check compression pressure
8000h
Check starter motor and replace wear parts if necessary
8000h
Check exhaust gas turbocharger for contamination, clearance, operation,
4000h replace if necessary
LHM 120-280_002 443

141128
Maintenance
Maintenance/inspectionaccording
to
operating hours
4000h /every 2 years by trained maintenance personnel by authorised maintenance

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly

Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Fuel system, MAN D2842 LE (LHM 280)

Check the water separator on the fuel prefilter, drain off condensate
Check fuel tank, drain off condensate
Change fuel prefilter (every 250 hrs / 1.5 months in the case of biodie
sel*, see Maintenance chapter, Diesel engine fuel, Biodiesel - FAME)
Change fuel filter (every 250 hrs / 1.5 months in the case of biodiesel*,
see Maintenance chapter, Diesel engine fuel, Biodiesel - FAME)
Check the injection nozzles, replace if necessary
8000h
Check the oil and fuel lines for leaks
Fuel system, MAN D2842 LE (LHM 280)
Check coolant level and top up if necessary
Check the anti-corrosion coating concentration and frost protection
Replace coolant
z Check the water cooler fins for contamination
Change the cap of the compensation tank
Check the cooling system for leaks
Remove and reinstall the coolant pump, repair if necessary
8000h
Air filter, MAN D2842 LE (LHM 280)
Empty the dust extraction valve of the air filter
Check the air filter
z Renew the air filter elements
Check the air filter underpressure display
Check the intake and exhaust system for condition and leaks
Diesel engine, LIEBHERR D9508 (LHM 120-280)
Visual inspection (leaks, dirt, damage)
Check oil level of the diesel engine and top up if necessary
Check diesel engine brake flap
Check the exhaust gas recirculation stop valve
Changing the engine oil, (using E4, E6, E7 engine oil only)
Change oil separator filter element
Changing the oil separator (at least every two years)
3000h
Check batteries and cable connections
444 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
to
operating hours


1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Check that oil sump, engine mounting and engine bracket are securely
fastened
Check condition of belt drive and replace if necessary / check tension of
ribbed V-belts and adjust if necessary
Check the intake and exhaust system for condition, fastening and leaks
Check valve clearance, adjust if necessary up to engine serial number
2010 14 0729
Check valve clearance, adjust if necessary from engine serial number
2010 14 0730
Grease crown gear on flywheel
L Check heating flange
Change the heating flange
10000
h
Fuel system, LIEBHERR D9508 (LHM 120-280)
Carry out visual check of fuel and lubrication systems for leaks and gene
ral condition
Check the water separator of the fuel prefilter and drain off condensate if
necessary
z Draining condensate and bottom sediments from the fuel tank
Replace the fuel prefilter
Change fuel fine filter
z Bleeding the fuel system (do not detach the injection pipes)
Cooling system, LIEBHERR D9508 (LHM 120-280)
Check coolant level and top up if necessary
Check the cooling and heating system for leaks and condition
L Check the anti-corrosion coating concentration and the concentration of
the frost protection
Replace coolant (at least every two years)
3000h
z Check the water cooler fins for contamination and clean if necessary
Z Degrease the cooling system
Z De-scale and de-rust the cooling system
Change the cap of the compensation tank
Air filter, LIEBHERR D9508 (LHM 120-280)
Visually checking the air filter vacuum indicator
Clean the dust extraction valve of the air filter
LHM 120-280_002 445

141128
Maintenance
to
operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly

Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

z Change the dry air filter main element

z Replace the air filter safety element (every 3rd time the main element is
replaced / annually)
z Check air filter for contamination
Check the intake and exhaust system for condition and leaks
Electric system, LIEBHERR D9508 (LHM 120-280)
Check the condition of the control unit mounting
Visual check of sensors and cable connections
Electric motor
Lubricate ball bearings (50Hz)
7600h
Lubricate ball bearings (60Hz)
Hydraulic system
Check the oil level of the hydraulic system
Carry out a hydraulic oil analysis ten hours after every oil change (refe
rence measurement)
Carry out a hydraulic oil analysis after 500 hrs
Carry out a hydraulic oil analysis after 1000 hrs / 1 year
Change hydraulic oil NOT supplied by Liebherr after 2000 hrs / 2 years
Change Liebherr "Hydraulik 37" oil after 4000 hrs / 4 years
Change Liebherr "Hydraulik Plus" and "Hydraulik Plus Arctic" oil after
6000 hrs / 6 years
z Clean the hydraulic tank on oil change
Replace the return filter
Replace all oil filters
Replace the pressure accumulator
Drain water from hydraulic tank
Check for leaks
Clean and lubricate the piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders
Replace the breather filter
Distributor gearbox
Check oil level of distribution gearbox
Change gear oil
Check that the fan is working and replace if necessary
Slewing gear
446 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
to
operating hours


1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Check the oil level of the slewing gearbox

Change gear oil
Grease the toothing
Lubricate the stud bolts
Check the bearing lubrication (grease collar)
Check the pretensioning of screws, torque of the roller slew bearing / un
dercarriage - slewing platform.
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the slewing platform connec
tion, front and rear sections.
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the tower - slewing platform
connection.
Hoisting gear
Check the oil level of the hoisting gearbox
Change gear oil
Check the drive sleeve of the hoisting gear motors
Check the oil level of the holding brakes
Change the oil of the holding brake
Travelling gear
Check the oil level of the travel gear
Change gear oil
Check levelling, adjust if necessary
Lubricating wheel set axles and links
Manually replace the grease of the drive units
Check the tightening torque of the wheel nuts
Check tyre pressures
Electrical system
Check the back-up batteries of the load magnet device before use by
means of a battery test
Check batteries and cable connections
Grease battery poles, check terminals are tight
Check battery fluid and top up if necessary (using distilled water only)
Replace filter mat of the switch cabinet
Replace the generator air filter mat
Clean the undercarriage slipring transmitter
LHM 120-280_002 447

141128
Maintenance
to
operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly

Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

Boom
Change the gear oil of the cable drum on the boom
10000
h
Check the screw pretensioning, torque of the boom connection.
Lifting device + rotator
Spreader: Measure and adjust the gap of the brake on the tower motor
Spreader: Measure and adjust the gap of the brake on the telescopic mo
tor
Rotator: Change the hydraulic oil and filter, clean the slipring transmitter
(see product documentation, rotator)
Visually check the Nemag shackle for cracks
Check the Nemag shackle for cracks by MPI (magnetic powder inspec
tion)
For machines in grab operation (four-rope grab, motor grab or magnet
operation), check the Nemag shackle by MPI (magnetic powder inspec
tion).
Visually inspect for damage on all components between the rope and lift
100h ing device (e.g. chains, shackles, etc.)
Central lubrication
Check the grease content of the lubricant pumps
Check all lubrication points (grease collar)
Check all lubrication points of the central lubrication system
Ropes and pulleys
Check ropes
Lubricate ropes
Check whether ropes are due for replacement
Check pulleys for damage
Safety
Check safety devices (slewing gear, luffing gear, hoisting gear)
Check emergency stop; no load on hook, control lever in neutral position,
with ignition ON and diesel engine off, operate emergency stop.
Check hoisting limit switch and undercarriage flap (Emergency exit un
dercarriage) to ensure they are working correctly.
Check acoustic warning devices
Check LMB switch-off threshold
Carry out braking test for hoisting gear, travelling and slewing gear
448 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
to
operating hours


1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly
Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

z Carry out braking test for hoisting gear, travelling and slewing gear after
every emergency stop with load
Check inspection date on fire extinguisher. If inspection date has passed,
replace fire extinguisher or arrange to have inspected by authorised quali
fied personnel.
Check first-aid box for completeness and expiry date. If expiry date has
passed, replace first-aid box.
Training on use of abseil rescue equipment with practical training (abseil
from tower cabin).
Check escape package (fire escape hoods, gloves, lamp) is present and
its expiry date. If expiry date has passed, replace escape package.
Safety equipment training (emergency exit, exiting through the undercar
riage, what to do in the event of a fire, emergency operation, etc.)
Fire detection and extinguishing system
Visually inspect the whole system for damage and dirt.
Check the whole system to ensure it is working correctly.
Check expiry date of extinguishing generators. If expiry date has passed,
replace extinguishing generators with new ones.
Renew extinguishing generators every 5 years.
Clean panel of UV flame detector.
Test hydraulic oil supply stop valve
Cable drum main power supply
Check oil level and top up if necessary.
Visual check of slip rings for signs of wear. Remove dust from carbon
brushes in slip ring chamber. Replace brushes if necessary.
Change gearbox oil in cable drum main power supply.
Lubricate engine support of cable drum main power supply.
10000
h
Transformer station high-voltage supply
Check ambient temperature and ventilation.
Assess various noises coming from transformer station.
Check surface of transformer station for paint damage, rust and contam
ination.
Check transformer for leaks.
Check bushings, devices and controls for contamination.
Clean transformer station insulators.
LHM 120-280_002 449

141128
Maintenance
to
operating hours

1000h / half-yearly
personnel
500h / 3-monthly

Special intervals
2000h / yearly
40h / weekly

8h / daily

BORNACK KE10 St crane abseil rescue equipment

Check safety rope for cuts or fibre breaks.
Check safety rope for chemical or mechanical damage.
Check safety rope for thickening, kinks, knots or loops.
Check safety rope for rotting, excessive wear, abrasion or scorching.
Check end termination (knot and seam) of safety rope for completion.
Check shrink hose fastening of rope end termination.
Check carabiners/safety hooks for mechanical damage, corrosion dam
age and deformation.
Check closure mechanism of carabiners/safety hooks.
Check condition of springs/rivets/axles.
Check that snap action of carabiners/safety hooks works smoothly.
Check ease of movement of abseil rescue equipment cam.
Check abseil rescue equipment for mechanical damage and corrosion
damage.
Check brake cam (aluminium) of abseil rescue equipment for wear.
Check brake cylinder (brass) of abseil rescue equipment for wear.
Check legibility of type plate.
450 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.2 Lubrication and oiling
NOTE
Cross-references
Refer to maintenance schedule for lubrication and maintenance intervals.
(See chapter: Maintenance, Maintenance schedule)
Filling capacities are given in the chapter: Maintenance, Filling capacities.
The lubricants to be used are indicated in the chapter: Maintenance,
Lubricants.
Points and components to be greased:

` Central lubrication systems (boom, tower, slewing platform, undercar
riage)
` Ropes
` Open gear
` Electric motor*
` Lifting device
` Wheel sets
Points and components to be oiled:

` Cable drum
` Diesel engine
` Distributor gearbox
` Driven wheel sets
` Hydraulic oil tank
` Slewing gearbox
` Winch(es)
` Lifting device (rotator, hook, etc.)
NOTE
Lifting device
For the lubricant and filling capacity, refer to the manufacturer's
documentation.
LHM 120-280_002 451

141128
Maintenance
5.3 Filling capacities
NOTE
Filling capacities
The filling capacities shown here are approximate values.
The actual filling capacities should only be determined with the oil dipstick
and/or the sight glass.
Make sure that:

` the lubricants concerned are suited to the local climatic conditions.
` if the machine is provided with optional fuels and lubricants (-30°C), this
information has priority.
Unit / item (general) No. (lubricant table) Filling capacity

Diesel engine (MAN) No. 1 35l
Diesel engine (D9508) No. 1 60l
Slewing gear No. 2 11.2l each
Distributor gearbox No. 2 16l
Wheel set (driven) No. 2 8.5l each
Boom cable drum See documentation for cable drum See documentation for cable drum
Cable drum main power supply No. 3 See documentation for cable drum
Hydraulic tank No. 4 See chapter: Product description, Technical
data, Hydraulic tank
Fuel tank Diesel fuel with sulphur content <= 0.5% See chapter: Product description, Technical
data, Fuel tank
Cooling system No. 8 144l (MAN)
Windscreen wash system No. 9 5l / cabin
Central lubrication system No. 5 -
Grease nipple (for greasing with grease gun) No. 5 -
Roller-bearing swing ring (toothing) No. 5 -
Ropes No. 6 See chapter: Maintenance, Ropes and pul
leys
Sealing rubber on doors and covers Silicone spray -
Hinges, connectors, closures Ordinary oil -
Winche(s) type LHM 120 - 280 No. (lubricant table) Filling capacity (in litres)
NL42S2 No. 2 21l
NL42S4 No. 2 11l / winch
NL64S2 No. 2 50l
NL84S4 No. 2 51l
452 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.4 Lubrication chart

No. Lubrication points Outside Type ISO Specification Liebherr
temperature VG/SAE Lubricants
1. Engine, oil bath air filter year-round to -20℃ SAE 10W-40 ACEA E4 Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40
below -20℃ with pre API CF
heating
year-round to -20℃ SAE 10W-40 ACEA E4/E6/E7 Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 low ash
below -20℃ with pre API CF-4 / CG-4 required when using a soot particle
heating CH-4 / CI-4 filter
year-round to -30℃ SAE 5W-30 ACEA E4 Liebherr Motoroil 5W-30

below -30℃ with pre API CF
heating
2. Mechan. Gears, winches to -20℃ SAE 85W-90 API GL5 Liebherr Hypoid EP90
and drive shafts to -40℃ SAE 75W-90 API GL4; GL5, MT1 Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75W-90
3. Hydrostatic drive unit, from -25°C to 50°C** ISO VG32-46 DIN 51 524 / T3 Liebherr Hydraulic 37
hydraulic steering SAE 10W-20 HVLP
ATF* 1.DEXRON II D/E
from -25°C to 50°C** ISO VG46 (32-68) DIN 51 524 / T3 Liebherr Hydraulic Plus
SAE 10W-20 HVLPD HC
biodegradable in ac
cordance with CEC-
L-33A393
from -50℃ to 30℃ ISO VG15-46 DIN 51 524 / T3 Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic
SAE 0W-20 HVLPD HC
biodegradable in ac
cordance with CEC-
L-33A393
4. Hydr. additive for free- DIN 51,757 Liebherr special additive NL
fall brake DIN 51,562
5. Roller bearing and fric from -25℃ to 150℃ Lubricating DIN 51 502 Liebherr universal grease 9900
tion bearing, ball or For lubrication system grease, lithium KP 2 K-30
roller-bearing swing from -20℃ to 150℃ saponified

KPF 2 N-25
rings, cardan pivots and
from -60℃ to 140℃ DIN 51 502 Liebherr universal grease Arctic
other grease lubrication
For lubrication system KPFHC 1N-60
from -55℃ to 140℃
LHM 120-280_002 453

141128
Maintenance
No. Lubrication points Outside Type ISO Specification Liebherr

temperature VG/SAE Lubricants
6. Open gear wheels and from -25℃ to 150℃ Lubrication and DIN 51 502 Liebherr universal grease 9900
crown gears For lubrication system preservation OGPF 2
from -20℃ to 150℃
from -60℃ to 140℃ OGPF 1 Liebherr universal grease Arctic
For lubrication system
from -55℃ to 140℃
all areas OGPF 00 Liebherr paste spray
7. Ropes from -40℃ to 50℃ Liebherr WR-Lube SC
8. Telescopic boom all areas Special regulation DIN 51 502 Liebherr grease for telescopic
KP 2 K-30 components 9613 Plus
9. Coolant to -37℃ DIN 51,757/4 Liebherr Antifreeze Mix
DIN 51 432/2
10. Screenwash fluid to -80℃ Rala Klirr
* If Liebherr oil is not being used, ATF oil is compulsory for disc brakes.
** When the oil preheater is activated, the outside temperature can be about
10°C lower.
The specifications indicated in the lubricant table represent a qualitative mini
mum standard for the oils.
Liebherr products have been developed and tested with one another. There is
no guarantee that third-party oils** will correspond to the quality and per
formance of original Liebherr oils.
**Oils from other manufacturers.
NOTE
Authorisation to use third-party oils:
Contact the Liebherr Lubricant Hotline (+49 (0) 7354/80-6060 or
[email protected]).
5.4.1 Ordering information
Engine oil
5l canister 20l canister 210l drum 1000l container

Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 10 29 05 06 10 33 02 39 10 33 02 46 10 28 62 79
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 low ash 10 32 61 13 10 32 61 12 10 32 61 11 10 32 61 10
Liebherr Motoroil 5W-30 10 42 57 12 10 42 57 13 10 42 57 15 10 42 57 19
454 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
Gear oil

Liebherr Hypoid 90 EP 10 66 48 74 10 66 48 75 10 66 48 76 10 44 16 36
Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75 W-90 10 33 02 85 10 33 02 87 10 33 02 88 10 29 64 77
Hydraulic oil

Liebherr Hydraulic 37 10 66 48 65 10 66 48 67 10 66 47 12 10 66 48 56
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus 10 29 64 80 10 33 02 72 10 33 02 76 10 29 64 81
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic 10 29 64 79 10 33 02 77 10 33 02 78 10 29 64 78
Grease
400g cartridge 5kg tub 10kg tub 25kg tub

Liebherr universal grease 9900 10 29 68 16 10 29 68 13 10 29 68 12
Liebherr universal grease Arctic 10 29 68 28 10 29 68 25 10 29 68 24
Liebherr paste spray 10 33 03 08 (950g) 10 33 03 11
Liebherr grease for telescopic com 86 13 036 08

ponents 9613 Plus
Liebherr WR-Lube SC 10 17 33 71 (600ml) aerosol can
Coolant

Liebherr Antifreeze Mix 10 65 18 38 10 30 12 13 10 45 54 46 10 35 90 77
Screenwash fluid

Screenwash -80°C 89 03 108 14
Oil concentrate

Liebherr special additive NL 10 51 53 00 10 51 57 52
Oil analysis kit
Oil analysis kit: 88 56 018 14
LHM 120-280_002 455

141128
Maintenance
5.5 Diesel engine
5.5.1 Checking the oil level
CAUTION
Hot surfaces and hot engine oil.
Burns and open wounds.
Only inspect the diesel engine when it is at rest.
Wear protective clothing.

` The engine has been switched off and secured against unauthorised
starting.
` The machine is level.
` After turning off the diesel engine wait 20 minutes.
` Wear protective clothing.
Figure 247 Diesel engine oil level

1 Engine oil filler neck
2 Oil dipstick
u Take out the oil dipstick (2) and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
If dirt and foreign bodies get into the distributor gearbox:
The distributor gearbox is liable to be damaged.
Make sure the distributor gearbox is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
u Put the oil dipstick back in as far as it will go and wait a short time.
u Take the oil dipstick out again and hold it horizontally.
w The oil level is between the MIN and MAX markings.
w No further action needed.
w Oil is below the MIN marking - Top up oil according to lubricant table.
456 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
CAUTION
Insufficient oil pressure
is liable to cause irreparable damage to the diesel engine.
If the oil pressure does not build up after 10 seconds, turn off the diesel
engine.
Check the cover of the oil filler neck.
Check the oil level.
Check the diesel engine for damage.
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
poses a risk of fire.
Clean the diesel engine thoroughly.
NOTE
Oil filter
The oil filters must be changed every time the engine oil is changed.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 457

141128
Maintenance
5.5.2 Topping up the engine oil

starting.
Figure 248 Diesel engine oil level

1 Engine oil filler neck
2 Oil dipstick
u Remove the cover of the engine oil filler neck.
u Top up with suitable engine oil according to the lubricant table via the engine
oil filler neck.
CAUTION
Overfilling of engine oil
is liable to cause irreparable damage to the diesel engine.
Make sure that the engine oil level is between the MIN and MAX
markings.
CAUTION
u Check the oil level after 5 minutes (see chapter: Maintenance, Diesel en
gine, Checking the oil level).
NOTE
Oil filter
Disposal
regulations.
458 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.5.3 Draining the engine oil

starting.
` Have a sufficiently large collecting container and a suitable oil drain hose
to hand.
Figure 249 Draining the engine oil
1 Oil filter tightening screw

2 Oil filter
3 Oil drain screw
4 Oil sump drain
u Place a suitable collecting container (oil-resistant, free of leaks, sufficient
capacity) under the diesel engine.
u Remove the protective cap from the oil sump drain (4).
u Connect a suitable oil drain hose to the oil sump drain.
u Drain the engine oil into the collecting container which you have placed
ready.
u Unscrew the oil drain screw from the oil filter (3) and drain the engine oil into
a suitable collecting container.
u Fit new sealing rings on the oil drain screws of the oil filter and screw them
back in.
u Remove the oil drain hose.
u Fit new sealing rings on the oil sump drain.
u Reattach the protective cap on the oil drain.
LHM 120-280_002 459

141128
Maintenance
CAUTION
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
NOTE
Oil filter
Disposal
regulations.
460 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.5.4 Changing the oil filter
NOTE
Oil filter

starting.
` Have a sufficiently large collecting container and a suitable oil drain hose
to hand.
` An original Liebherr oil filter is available.
Figure 250 Draining the engine oil
1 Oil filter tightening screw

2 Oil filter
3 Oil drain screw
4 Oil sump drain
CAUTION

capacity) under the oil filter.
u Open the oil drain screw (3).
u Drain oil into the collecting container via the two oil drain screws (3).
LHM 120-280_002 461

141128
Maintenance
u Undo the oil filter tightening screws (1).

u Remove the oil filters.
u Take out the oil filter elements and replace them with new original Liebherr
oil filters.
u Clean all parts thoroughly with cleaning fluid.
CAUTION
u Reattach the oil filters with new seals and tighten with the oil filter tightening
screws.
NOTE
Seals
Make sure that the seals fit snugly.
While tightening the oil filter tightening screws, hold the oil filters firmly to
prevent the seals from twisting.
u Screw in and tighten the oil drain screws.

u Check the oil level (see chapter: Maintenance, Diesel engine, Checking the
oil level) and top up if necessary (see chapter: Maintenance, Diesel engine,
Topping up the engine oil).
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
Disposal
regulations.
462 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.5.5 Changing the oil separator

starting.
` Original Liebherr oil separators are to hand.
Figure 251 Oil separator
1 Hose clamp
2 Oil separator
3 Hose clamp
u Place a cloth under the oil separator in case any oil escapes.
u Undo the hose clamp (1) and carefully pull the hose off the oil separator.
u Open the hose clamp (3) with pliers and carefully pull the hose off the oil
separator.
u Now perform the same actions in reverse, fitting a new original Liebherr oil
separator.
u Make sure you have a tight fit.
CAUTION
DANGER
Leaking engine oil
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 463

141128
Maintenance
5.6 Diesel engine fuel
NOTE
Refer to maintenance schedule for maintenance intervals (see
Maintenance chapter, Maintenance schedule).
Filling capacities are given in the chapter: Maintenance, Filling capacities.
5.6.1 Fuel specification
Fuels must satisfy the minimum requirements of the following fuel specifica
tions.
Permitted fuel specification:

` EN 590
` ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D
` FAME DIN EN 14214*
5.6.2 Sulfur content in fuel
Only use fuels whose sulphur content is less than 1 % (10,000 mg/kg).
NOTE
Liebherr recommends
In the case of diesel engines with external exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR). Use fuels whose sulphur content is less than 0.005 % (50 mg/kg).
CAUTION
Damage to engine
Run diesel engine with E6 engine oil and change lubricating oil at
standard intervals. (See chapter: Maintenance, Maintenance schedule).
Use exclusively fuels whose sulphur content is less than 0.005 % (50
mg/kg).
According to the HFRR (60) test, the diesel fuel lubricity must not exceed
460 um [lubricity of corrected wearscar "diameter" (1.4) at 60 °C].
Fuel standard ASTM D 975 does not require fuels to have passed a fuel lubri
city test.
` A written confirmation from the fuel supplier must be provided.
` Arrange for fuel suppliers to add additives.
` The fuel supplier is responsible for the quality of the fuel.
` The addition of secondary lubricity additives by the customer is not re
commended.
464 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.6.3 Fuel at low temperatures (winter operation)
NOTE
Sluggish fuel flow or temperatures below -20 °C.
Use starting aid (e.g. engine pre-heater).
For fuels conforming to ASTM D 975, a cetane number of at least 45 is required

above 0 °C and at least 50 below 0 °C.
As the external temperature drops, paraffin crystals separate out from the fuel.
Paraffin crystals increase the flow resistance in the fuel filter and restrict the
supply of fuel to the diesel engine.
CAUTION
Add petroleum or regular fuel.
Safety hazard and damage to engine.
Use special fuels for arctic conditions.
5.6.4 Biodiesel FAME (vegetable oil methyl ester PME /

RME)*
NOTE
Microorganisms in fuel system in case of diesel fuel and biodiesel
Use disinfectant (see MAN product documentation)
It is only possible to use biodiesel with MAN engines if this fuel conforms
to the DIN EN 14214 standard. As biodiesel attacks the elastomers (gaskets,
fuel lines, etc.) used when operating normally with EN 590 diesel fuel, operation
is only possible with a so-called RME package for gaskets, etc.
FAME has less favourable evaporation properties compared with conventional

diesel fuel. This results in fuel dilution of the engine oil, loss of viscosity and
ultimately to increased engine wear. The maintenance intervals are therefore
reduced by half (see Maintenance chapter, maintenance schedule). This also
applies to mixtures of diesel fuel and biodiesel.
LHM 120-280_002 465

141128
Maintenance
5.7 Fuel system Liebherr D9508
CAUTION
Direct contact with fuel or with condensate/diesel mixture.
Chemical burns, eye injuries.
CAUTION
DANGER
Escaping diesel fuel
Diesel engine and parts which come into contact with diesel fuel must be
cleaned thoroughly.
NOTE
Work on the components of the common rail system must only be carried
out by specially trained maintenance personnel.
466 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.7.1 Draining condensate in the fuel tank

starting.
` A suitable and sufficiently large (acid-resistant) collecting container is
available.
Figure 252 Fuel tank
1 Fuel tank drain plug (undercarriage)
u Position a suitable and sufficiently large (acid-resistant) collecting container

under the drain hose (1) or (2).
u Open the drain plug.
u Leave the drain plug open until only pure fuel comes out.
u Close the drain plug.
Disposal
Dispose of all hazardous materials, such as: waste oil, coolant,
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 467

141128
Maintenance
5.7.2 Fuel hand pump
Figure 253 Hand pump
1 Plunger
2 Hand pump
u Unscrew the plunger (1) of the hand pump (2) 1-2 times and pump until bub
ble-free fuel comes out.
u While pumping, tighten the vent screw on the prefilter.
u Screw the plunger of the hand pump in again and tighten.
u Start the engine and check the fuel prefilter for leaks.
Disposal
regulations.
468 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.8 Cooling system
CAUTION
Hot parts of the cooler and hot coolant.
Only inspect the cooling system when it is at rest.
Figure 254 Water and charge air cooler
1 Water and charge air cooler

2 Water cooler compensation tank
LHM 120-280_002 469

141128
Maintenance
5.8.1 Diesel engine coolant
Coolant specification
CAUTION
Not recommended or incorrectly prepared anti-corrosion agents.
Cavity pitting or corrosion damage in the cooling system.
Deposits on heat-conducting components will result in overheating and failure o
the diesel engine.
Use Liebherr recommended anti-corrosion/frost protection (see
Maintenance chapter, Lubricant table)
Do not use emulsifiable anti-corrosion oils under any circumstances.
The coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion and antifreeze additives.
Observe the following regarding the cooling system:

` The cooling system only works reliably when under pressure.
` Keep the cooling system clean and free of leaks.
` Ensure that the coolant shut-off and working valves function correctly.
` Maintain the required coolant level.
Water (fresh water)
Unsuitable water (e.g. seawater, brackish water, brine water and industrial efflu
ent).
u Use exclusively colourless, clear, free from mechanical contamination, pot

able tap water with the following restricted analysis values.
Designation Value
Total alkaline earths (water hardness) 0.6 mmol/dm3 to 3.6 mmol/dm3
pH value at 20°C 6.5 to 8.5
Chloride ion content maximum 80 mmol/dm3
470 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.8.2 Checking the coolant level

starting.
` The cooling circuit has cooled down.
Figure 255 Water cooler compensation tank
1 Compensation tank
2 Pressure compensation lid
3 Compensation tank cap
4 Coolant level sight glass
u Check the coolant level with the sight glass (4).

w If coolant is clearly visible in half the sight glass, no further action is
required.
w If the coolant level is more than halfway down the sight glass, top up with
suitable coolant according to lubricant table (see chapter: Maintenance,
Cooling system, Topping up coolant).
LHM 120-280_002 471

141128
Maintenance
5.8.3 Draining coolant MAN D2842 LE103
CAUTION
Unsuitable coolant.
Destruction of cooling system.
Use only suitable coolant according to the lubricant table.

starting.
` Have a sufficiently large collecting container and a suitable drain hose
available.
Figure 256 Cooling water drain
1 Coolant hose
2 Coolant drain
CAUTION
Hot parts of the cooler and hot, spurting coolant.
u Open the filler neck cap of the compensation tank (see chapter: Mainte
nance, Cooling system, Topping up coolant).
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in the cooling system!
Damage to cooling system.
Make sure that no dirt or foreign bodies get into the water cooler
compensation tank when topping up.
472 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
u Place a suitable and sufficiently large collecting container underneath the

coolant drain (2).
u Slowly and carefully unscrew the cap of the coolant drain (2) by turning its
anticlockwise (safety lock - the cap engages in the intermediate position).
u Wait until the cooling system is depressurised.
u Gently press the cap of the coolant drain and carefully unscrew it comple
tely.
u Pay attention to the seals of the cap.
u Connect the drain hose from the Liebherr tool kit to the coolant drain (as
soon as it is connected, coolant flows out).
u Drain the coolant into a suitable collecting container which you previously
placed in position.
u Remove the drain hose
NOTE
Coolant cap:
Only replace the coolant cap once you have refilled the cooling system.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 473

141128
Maintenance
5.8.4 Checking the coolant
NOTE
Refer to engine documentation.
u Ensure that the coolant contains between 50% and 60% anti-corrosive
agent/anti-freeze.
w Anti-freeze effective down to -37°C.
CAUTION
Too high a proportion of anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze.
Damage to engine.
Never use more than 60% anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze.

starting.
` A strip kit or a suitable testing instrument is available.
` Coolant and anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze are available.
CAUTION
u Unscrew the compensation tank cap (3) by turning its anticlockwise (safety
lock - the cap engages in the intermediate position).
u Gently press the compensation tank cap downwards and unscrew it comple
tely.
u Take a sample of coolant and check the concentration of anti-corrosive

agent/anti-freeze with the strip kit or testing instrument.
w If the concentration of anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze is between 50%
and 60%, no further action is required.
w If the concentration of anti-corrosive agent/anti-freeze produces any
other result, drain and change the coolant.
u Replace the compensation tank cap and close it tightly.
Disposal
regulations.
474 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.8.5 Top up coolant
CAUTION
Unsuitable coolant.
Destruction of cooling system.
Use only suitable coolant according to the lubricant table.

starting.
Figure 257 Water cooler compensation tank
1 Compensation tank
2 Pressure compensation lid
3 Compensation tank cap
4 Coolant level sight glass
CAUTION
tely.
LHM 120-280_002 475

141128
Maintenance
u Slowly (no more than 10l per minute) top up with suitable coolant according
to the lubricant table.
w Coolant is visible halfway up sight glass.
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in the cooling system!
Damage to cooling system.
Make sure that no dirt or foreign bodies get into the water cooler
compensation tank when topping up.
u Replace the filler neck cap and close it tightly.
u Switch on the engine.
u After 5 minutes check the coolant level via the sight glass on the compensa
tion tank.
w If the coolant is halfway up the sight glass, no further action is required.
w If the coolant is less than halfway up the sight glass, top up the coolant.
Disposal
regulations.
476 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.8.6 Changing the cap of the compensation tank

u See maintenance schedule concerning maintenance intervals.

starting.
` An original Liebherr compensation tank cap is available.
Figure 258 Compensation tank cap

1 Water cooler compensation tank cap
CAUTION
tely.
u Remove the compensation tank cap and replace it with a new original Lieb
herr cap.
u Place the compensation tank cap accurately in the recess, then fix and close
it
5.8.7 Cleaning the water and charge air cooler

u Keep the cooling fins of the water and charge air cooler clean so as to gua
rantee adequate cooling.

starting.
u For detailed cleaning instructions, refer to the chapter: Maintenance,

Cleaning.
LHM 120-280_002 477

141128
Maintenance
5.9 Air filter

CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
Only inspect the air filter when the machine is at rest.
5.9.1 Checking air filter and intake system

starting.
u Clean the air filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

u In case of dust-intensive use, regularly check and clean the dust extraction
valve.
u If the air filter is damaged or does not work properly (leaks), replace it with
an original Liebherr air filter.
u Check air hoses for cracks and other damage.
u Check hose clamps for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
Figure 259 Location of air filter

1 Air filter
2 Diesel engine
Disposal
regulations.
478 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.9.2 Emptying the dust extraction valve

starting.
Figure 260 Dust extraction valve air filter
1 Dust extraction valve
u Squeeze the rubber lip on the dust extraction valve (1) several times.
w Dust comes out.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 479

141128
Maintenance
5.9.3 Emptying the dust reservoir

starting.
Figure 261 Air filter
1 Dust reservoir
2 Tensioning bracket
3 Filter element
4 Securing element
5 Filter holder
u Open the tensioning bracket (2).
u Remove and empty the dust reservoir (1).
u Replace the dust reservoir, ensuring that it is straight and the dust extraction
valve points downwards.
u Close the tensioning bracket without exerting a great deal of force.
Disposal
regulations.
480 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.9.4 Changing the filter element

starting.
` Two original Liebherr filter elements including securing elements are
available.

1 Dust reservoir
3 Filter element
4 Securing element
5 Filter holder
u Remove, empty and clean the dust reservoir (1).
u Pull out and dispose of the filter element (3).
u Unscrew the securing element (4) from the filter holder (5) and dispose of it.
u Screw a new securing element into the filter holder (lightly moisten the secu
ring element with oil).
u Insert the filter element in the filter holder and check for tight fit.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 481

141128
Maintenance
5.10 Air filter Liebherr D9508

CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
Only inspect the air filter when the machine is at rest.
5.10.1 Checking air filter and intake system

starting.
u Clean the air filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
u In case of dust-intensive use, regularly check and clean the dust extraction
valve.
u If the air filter is damaged or does not work properly (leaks), replace it with
an original Liebherr air filter.
u Check air hoses for cracks and other damage.
u Check hose clamps for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
Figure 263 Location of air filter

1 Diesel engine
2 Air filter
Disposal
regulations.
482 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.10.2 Emptying the dust extraction valve

starting.
Figure 264 Dust extraction valve air filter
1 Dust extraction valve
u Squeeze the rubber lip on the dust extraction valve (1) several times.
w Dust comes out.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 483

141128
Maintenance
5.10.3 Emptying the dust reservoir

starting.
1 Dust reservoir
3 Filter element
4 Securing element
5 Filter holder
u Remove and empty the dust reservoir (1).
Disposal
regulations.
484 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.10.4 Changing the filter element

starting.
` Two original Liebherr filter elements including securing elements are
available.

1 Dust reservoir
3 Filter element
4 Securing element
5 Filter holder
u Remove, empty and clean the dust reservoir (1).
u Pull out and dispose of the filter element (3).
u Unscrew the securing element (4) from the filter holder (5) and dispose of it.
u Screw a new securing element into the filter holder (lightly moisten the secu
ring element with oil).
u Insert the filter element in the filter holder and check for tight fit.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 485

141128
Maintenance
5.11 Electric motor

CAUTION
Wrong grease.
Damage to electric motor.
Only use lubricants in accordance with the lubricant information label
affixed to the electric motor.
CAUTION
Beware of hot surfaces and live and rotating parts.
These can cause burns, electric shock and injury.
Only inspect the electric motor when it is at rest.
Figure 267 Electric motor
1 Electric motor
2 Grease nipple
starting.
u Lubricate ball bearings in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple and inject suitable grease ac
cording to the lubricant information label on the electric motor.
w Old grease escapes.
u Keep the electric motor clean.
u Regularly check the fastenings (screws), connections and seals.
Disposal
regulations.
486 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.12 Distributor gearbox
CAUTION
Hot gearbox components and hot gearbox oil or hydraulic oil.
Exclusively carry out maintenance and inspections with the machine at
rest.
Figure 268 Distributor gear box MAN (LHM 280)
1 Driven by engine
2 Drive for pump
3 Oil drain
4 Oil dipstick
5 Breather filter
LHM 120-280_002 487

141128
Maintenance
Figure 269 Distributor gear box MAN (LHM 280)
1 Oil dipstick
2 Oil filler neck, breather filter
3 Oil dip stick (alternatively)
4 Oil drain
5 Driven by engine
6 Drive for pump
7 Oil drain
488 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.12.1 Check oil level

starting.
u Take out the oil dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION

Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 489

141128
Maintenance
5.12.2 Topping up the gear oil

starting.
u Remove the breather filter from the distributor gearbox.
CAUTION
u Top up with suitable gear oil according to the lubricant table via the breather
filter opening.
u After 5 minutes check the oil level with the dipstick.
u Take the dipstick out and hold it horizontally.

u Reattach the breather filter to the distributor gearbox.
Disposal
regulations.
490 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.12.3 Draining gearbox oil

starting.
` The gear oil is at normal operating temperature.
available.
Disposal
regulations.

capacity) under the distributor gearbox.
u Remove the breather filter.
CAUTION
u Remove the protective cap from the oil drain.
u Connect a suitable drain hose to the oil drain.
u Drain the gear oil via the drain hose into a suitable collecting container.
u Reattach the protective cap on the oil drain.
u Reattach the breather filter.
LHM 120-280_002 491

141128
Maintenance
5.13 Slewing gear
Figure 270 Slewing gear
1 Filler neck and ventilation

2 Sight glass for checking oil level
3 Oil drain
4 Oil drain (alternative)
5 Toothed pinion
492 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.13.1 Check the slewing gear oil level

starting.
` The machine is horizontal both lengthwise and crosswise.
` The slewing gearbox is at normal operating temperature.
u Check the oil level via the sight glass (3) on the slewing gear.
w Oil visible in sight glass - no further action required.
w No oil visible in sight glass - top up with suitable oil according to lubricant
table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Slewing gear, Topping
up slewing gear oil).
LHM 120-280_002 493

141128
Maintenance
5.13.2 Topping up slewing gear oil

starting.
` Have a suitable funnel available.
` Make sure suitable oil according to the lubricant table is available.
u Clean the area around the oil filler neck.
u Open the cover of the oil filler neck (1).
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in the gearbox!
Damage to gearbox.
Make sure the gearbox is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
u Top up with suitable oil according to the lubricant table, placing a suitable
funnel in the oil filler neck.
u Check the oil level in the sight glass (3).

w Oil just visible.
w Oil less than halfway up sight glass - Top up oil according to lubricant ta
ble.
u Close the cover of the oil filler neck.
u Turn the machine on and operate the slewing gear in both directions.
u Turn off the machine, after 5 minutes check the oil level of the slewing gear
and top up if necessary.
Disposal
regulations.
494 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.13.3 Draining the slewing gear oil

starting.
` A suitable and sufficiently large collecting container is to hand.
` An oil drain hose is to hand.
u Clean the area around the oil filler neck.
u Open the cover of the oil filler neck (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Place collecting container in position.
u Place a suitable collecting container under the oil drain and open the oil
drain.
w Oil drains out.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 495

141128
Maintenance
5.13.4 Grease the toothing

starting.
` Suitable grease according to the lubricant table is available.
u Lubricate the open gear of the roller slew bearing and the pinion (5 or 4) of
the slewing gear with suitable grease according to the lubricant table.
u Turn the machine on and operate the slewing gear in both directions.
w The open gear and pinion are evenly lubricated.
5.13.5 Lubricate the stud bolts

starting.
` Suitable grease is available.
Figure 271 Stud bolts and grease collars
1 External stud bolts

2 Internal stud bolts
3 Bearing lubrication grease collar
u Lubricate the nuts, washers and projecting threads of the external (1) and
internal (2) stud bolts with suitable grease.
NOTE
To lubricate nuts, washers and projecting threads of the external (1) and
internal (2) stud bolts, use "Never-Seez" (Blue Moly) paste.
496 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.13.6 Checking bearing lubrication

starting.
` Suitable grease according to the lubricant table is available.
` A suitable grease gun is available.
Figure 272 Stud bolts and grease collars
1 External stud bolts

2 Internal stud bolts
3 Bearing lubrication grease collar
u Check the bearing lubrication grease collar (3).

w If a grease collar is visible, no further action is required.
w If no grease collar is visible, check the central lubrication system or fill
with suitable grease according to the lubricant table with a grease gun via
the grease nipple until the grease collar is visible.
Figure 273 Bearing lubrication grease collar
1 Grease collar
u After each grease nipple, turn the machine by 45° to distribute the grease.
w Grease collar is visible.
LHM 120-280_002 497

141128
Maintenance
5.14 Hoisting gear
Figure 274 Winch HL104NL70S2 (example)
1 Vent valve
2 Oil dipstick, oil filler
3 Oil filler, overflow and drain for hoisting gear brake
4 Oil drain
498 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.14.1 Checking hoisting gear oil level

starting.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick (2).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.

w Oil is below the MIN marking - top up with suitable oil according to lubri
cant table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Hoisting gear,
Topping up hoisting gear oil).
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 499

141128
Maintenance
5.14.2 Topping up hoisting gear oil

starting.
` Make sure suitable oil according to the lubricant table is available.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick, oil filler (2).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Open the vent valve (1).
u Top up with suitable oil according to the lubricant table, placing a suitable
funnel in the oil filler (2).
u Wait 5 minutes.

w Oil is below the MIN marking - top up with suitable oil according to lubri
cant table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Hoisting gear,
Topping up hoisting gear oil).
u Close the vent valve.
u Reinsert the oil dipstick.
Disposal
regulations.
500 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.14.3 Draining the hoisting gear oil

starting.
` An oil drain hose is to hand.
u Open the vent valve (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Place a suitable collecting container in position.
u Remove the protective cap from the oil drain (4).
u Attach the oil drain hose.

w Oil drains out.
u Detach the oil drain hose and replace the protective cap.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 501

141128
Maintenance
5.15 Travelling gear
Figure 275 Driven wheel set
1 Grease nipples (2x)

3 Suspension cylinder piston rod
4 Wheel nut
5 Drain plug
7 Gear oil dip stick
NOTE
All maintenance intervals as per maintenance schedule.
502 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.15.1 Checking the wheel set gear oil level

starting.
` The wheel set is horizontal both lengthwise and crosswise.
u Clean the area around the oil dipstick.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.

Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 503

141128
Maintenance
5.15.2 Topping up the wheel set gear oil

starting.
u Insert a suitable funnel in the dip stick opening.
u Top up with suitable gear oil according to the lubricant table.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Put the oil dipstick back in as far as it will go and wait 5 minutes.

Disposal
regulations.
504 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.15.3 Draining the wheel set gear oil

starting.
` A sufficiently large collecting container is available.
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Position a sufficiently large collecting container under the drain plug.
u Open the drain plug.
u Drain the gearbox oil into the collecting container which you have placed
ready.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 505

141128
Maintenance
5.15.4 Checking the wheel set suspension cylinder
CAUTION
Excessive oil pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the suspension cylinders
will damage the cylinders, pipes and valves.
Measure the setting of the suspension cylinders and correct if necessary.
u Check each axle set individually.
NOTE
Each machine can have 3 or 4 axle sets.
The number of axle sets is set in the factory and must not be changed.
If in doubt contact Liebherr service department.

starting.
` The machine is standing on firm and level ground.
` The machine is standing on the tyres and is not supported.
` Travelling mode is selected.
` The boom is in the position intended for travelling mode.
Figure 276 Suspension cylinder on driven wheel set
1 Suspension cylinder
2 Piston rod
H = distance between suspension cylinder and marking (groove) on the piston

rod
u Measure distance H on each wheel set of the axle set.

u Distance H is 100mm ± 10mm.
w Result is satisfactory. No further action needed.
u Distance H is less than 80mm.
w Adjust the suspension cylinder to the correct value (see Adjusting the
wheel set suspension cylinder).
506 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.15.5 Adjusting the wheel set suspension cylinder
CAUTION
Excessive oil pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the suspension cylinders
will damage the cylinders, pipes and valves.
Measure the setting of the suspension cylinders and correct if necessary.

starting.
` The machine is standing on the tyres and is not supported.
` Travelling mode is selected.
` The boom is in the position intended for travelling mode.
Figure 277 Axle sets
1 Wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of undercarriage)

2 Hand lever of wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of under
carriage)
3 Axle set hydraulic valve (underside of undercarriage, lead-sealed)
4 Single axle set
5 Combined axle set
LHM 120-280_002 507

141128
Maintenance
NOTE
Each machine can have 3 or 4 axle sets.
The number of axle sets is set in the factory and must not be changed.
Do not operate lead-sealed valves (3).
If in doubt contact Liebherr service department.
u Support the machine so that all wheel sets are lifted off the ground (see
chapter: Operation, Supporting the machine).
u Fit the hand lever of the wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of under
carriage) (2) as shown in the diagram illustrating the axle sets.
u Using the hand lever of the wheel set level adjusting valve (underside of un
dercarriage) (2), fully retract and extend the wheel sets twice.
w Air escapes from the hydraulic system.
u Fully retract all axle sets.
u Place machine on wheel sets.

w Support not active.
w Support pads raised.
w Wheel sets are in contact with the ground.
u All axle sets extended.

w Whole weight of the machine is lifted by the wheel sets.
NOTE
If the total weight of the machine is too great, use the help of the support.
Figure 278 Suspension cylinder on driven wheel set
1 Suspension cylinder
2 Piston rod
H = distance between suspension cylinder and marking (groove) on the piston

rod
u Add together distances H of the measured wheel sets of the axle set and
make sure that the total of distances H of the axle set is within the tolerance
(100mm ± 10mm / wheel set). (See following example).
508 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
Example:
Number of wheel sets of axle set: 5
Tolerance: 5 x 100mm ± 10mm = 500mm ± 50mm
Result: The total of the individual distances H must be between 450mm and
550mm.
u Add together distances H of the individual wheel sets within the axle set and
compare with the calculated tolerance.
w Total lies within the tolerance - no further action required.
w Total does not lie within the tolerance - repeat all previous steps (start the
procedure from the beginning).
5.15.6 Manual greasing of wheel set drive units

starting.
` A grease gun and suitable grease according to the lubricant table are
available.
Figure 279 Wheel set drive unit (non-driven wheel set)
1 Drive units
2 Grease nipple
u Detach the lubrication lines from the wheel sets.
u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple.
u Grease the drive units with the grease gun.

w Grease can be seen escaping from the sealing lips.
u Support the machine so that wheel sets are raised and wheel sets rotate.
w The grease is distributed.
u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple again and re-grease.
w Grease can be seen escaping from the sealing lips.
LHM 120-280_002 509

141128
Maintenance
5.15.7 Lubricating wheel set axles and links

starting.
` It is supported and the wheel sets are raised.
available.
Figure 280 Driven wheel set

3 Suspension cylinder piston rod
4 Wheel nut
5 Drain plug
7 Gear oil dip stick
u Place the grease gun on the grease nipple.
u Top up with suitable grease according to the lubricant table.
510 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.15.8 Wheel nuts

starting.
` A suitable torque wrench is available.
u Tighten all wheel nuts of the wheel sets (driven and non-driven) with a tor
que of 500 - 550Nm.
5.15.9 Tyres, tyre pressure

starting.
` A compressor with pressure display is available.
u Check all tyres of the wheel sets (driven and non-driven) for damage.
NOTE
Always be careful of sharp objects (broken glass, nails, screws, etc.) on
the ground to avoid damage to the tyres.
u Check that all tyres of the wheel sets (driven and non-driven) are at the
prescribed pressure of 10bar and correct if necessary.
5.15.10 Tyre tread depth

starting.
` Tread gauge is available.
u Measure the tyre tread depth with a tread gauge.

w Tyre tread depth is more than 1mm - no further action is required.
w Tyre tread depth is less than 1mm - replace tyres.
LHM 120-280_002 511

141128
Maintenance
5.16 Hydraulic system
CAUTION
Hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure!
Burns and open wounds!
Only inspect the hydraulic system with the drive at rest.
Never touch a leaking part of the hydraulic system with unprotected parts
of the body.
Figure 281 Overview of hydraulic tank
1 Upper sight glass for checking oil level

2 Lower sight glass for checking oil level
3 Return filter
4 Maintenance cover
5 Air filter
6 Filling capacity sensor
5.16.1 Initial filling of hydraulic oil
The information sign on the hydraulic tank filler neck displays the hydraulic oil
with which the machine was first filled.
If the initial filling was carried out by Liebherr, the machine will have been filled
with Liebherr Hydraulic 37 or higher grade hydraulic oil as standard. In exceptio
nal cases (low temperature package, bio application) the machine is initially
filled with a special hydraulic oil.
512 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.16.2 Mixing hydraulic oil
CAUTION
Mixing of ester-based, rapidly biodegradable third-party oils with mineral oils!
Possible damage to hydraulic system.
Do not mix rapidly biodegradable third-party oils** from different
manufacturers.
Do not mix rapidly biodegradable third-party oils** with mineral oils.
Use of a rapidly biodegradable hydraulic oil must be cleared in advance with

Liebherr after-sales service.
NOTE
Plant-based oils:
must not be used because of their poor temperature stability.
Mixing Liebherr hydraulic oils

Liebherr oils + Liebherr oils Can be mixed in any ratio
Liebherr oils + biodegradable Liebherr oils Can be mixed in any ratio.
To ensure biodegradability, do not add more than 2%.
Liebherr oils + third-party oils** To ensure that oil properties are not altered, do not
add more than 10%.
**Oils from other manufacturers
5.16.3 Checking the hydraulic oil level

starting.
` The machine is standing on the wheel sets and the supporting cylinders
are retracted.
` The luffing cylinder is retracted.
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, the hydraulic oil level will not be correct.
u Check the hydraulic oil level with the upper sight glass (2) on the hydraulic
tank.
w Hydraulic oil visible in upper sight glass - no further action required.
w Hydraulic oil not visible in upper sight glas, top up with suitable hydraulic
oil according to the lubricant table and instructions (see chapter: Mainte
nance, Hydraulic oil, Topping up the hydraulic oil) until hydraulic oil is visi
ble in the upper sight glass.
LHM 120-280_002 513

141128
Maintenance
5.16.4 Topping up with hydraulic oil
NOTE
Before changing from “mineral oil-based hydraulic oil” to “synthetic-based
hydraulic oil”, please contact Liebherr after sales service.
CAUTION
Hydraulic oil topped up incorrectly!
Damage to the hydraulic system.
Only top up hydraulic oil via the return filter.

starting.
` Suitable tools are available (torque wrench 69Nm).
` Machine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
CAUTION
Engine parts and hydraulic oil may be hot:
Risk of burns and scalding.
Do not open the cover of the return filter unless the engine is switched off
and the temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40° or less.
Wear suitable protective equipment.
Figure 282 Hydraulic tank return filter

1 Return filter cover
2 Hydraulic tank
u Remove all cylinder screws from the return filter cover (1).
514 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in return filter!
Make sure the return filter is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
u Remove the return filter cover.
CAUTION
Incorrect hydraulic oil.
Top up with suitable hydraulic oil only.
Do not add any additives or concentrates.
u Top up the hydraulic oil.
u Replace the return filter cover and align it so that the screw holes match.
u Tighten the screws by hand.
Figure 283 Closing the hydraulic tank return filter

1 Return filter cover
2 Hydraulic tank
u Tighten the screws with a torque of 69Nm.
u Start the engine and leave it to idle for at least 2 minutes.
u Check hydraulic system for leaks.
u Turn off the engine and restart it after 5 minutes.
u Re-check the hydraulic system for leaks.
LHM 120-280_002 515

141128
Maintenance
5.16.5 Draining the hydraulic oil

starting.
` The gearbox oil is at normal operating temperature.
available.
Disposal
regulations.
Figure 284 Hydraulic tank - oil drain valve
1 Hydraulic tank
2 Oil drain valve

capacity) under the oil drain valve (2).
u Open (remove) the cover of the oil drain valve (2).
u Connect the drain hose from the Liebherr tool kit to the oil drain valve (as
soon as it is connected, oil flows out).
u Drain the hydraulic oil.
u Close the cover of the oil drain valve.
516 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.16.6 Hydraulic oil return filter

If the hydraulic oil return filter is dirty, a text message appears and an acoustic
warning signal sounds.
CAUTION
Hot hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure.
Wait a few minutes until the pressure has fallen to 0 bar and the
temperature of the hydraulic oil is no more than 40°C.

` The boom is lowered.
starting.
` The pressure of the hydraulic oil is 0 bar.
` The temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40°C.
` Suitable tools are available.
` An original Liebherr return filter is available.
Figure 285 Hydraulic oil return filter

1 Screw with circlip
2 Filter cover
3 Sealing ring
4 Magnetic rod
5 Compression spring
6 Pressure flange
7 O-ring
8 Filter element
LHM 120-280_002 517

141128
Maintenance
9 Filter housing
u Undo screws.
u Carefully remove the filter cover and the sealing ring lying underneath it.
CAUTION
u Remove the magnetic rod, compression spring, pressure flange, O-ring and
the used filter element from the filter housing.
u Check the magnetic rod for metal dust and clean with a clean, lint-free cloth.
u Clean all parts thoroughly.
u Check the O-ring and sealing ring for damage, replace if necessary.
u Clean the inside of the filter housing thoroughly.
u Insert a new original filter element.
u Reassemble the parts in the reverse order.
u Check to make sure the O-ring and sealing ring are clean and seated cor
rectly.
Disposal
regulations.
518 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.16.7 Hydraulic oil pressure filter

If the hydraulic oil pressure filter is dirty, a text message appears and an acou
stic warning signal sounds.
Figure 286 Hydraulic oil pressure filter installation location
1 Pressure filter
The pressure filters are in the machinery house on the wall to the tower oppo
site the aggregate:
` Pressure filter for feed pressure.
` Pressure filter for steering system.
CAUTION

` The boom is lowered.
starting.
` The hydraulic oil pressure is 0 bar.
` The hydraulic oil temperature is 40°C.
` An original Liebherr pressure filter is available.
LHM 120-280_002 519

141128
Maintenance
Figure 287 Feed pressure / steering system hydraulic oil pressure filter
1 Clogging indicator
2 Filter housing upper section
3 Sealing ring
4 O-ring
5 Filter element
6 Filter housing lower section (size varies between steering system
and feed pressure)
u Undo screws.
u Carefully remove the filter cover and the sealing ring lying underneath it.
CAUTION
u Remove the magnetic rod, compression spring, pressure flange, O-ring and
the used filter element from the filter housing.
u Check the magnetic rod for metal dust and clean with a clean, lint-free cloth.
u Clean all parts thoroughly, check the O-ring and sealing ring for damage,
replace where appropriate.
u Clean the inside of the filter housing thoroughly.
u Insert a new original filter element.
520 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
u Reassemble the parts in the reverse order.
u Check to make sure the O-ring and sealing ring are clean and seated cor
rectly.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 521

141128
Maintenance
5.16.8 Testing the pressure accumulator
LHM machines have 2 types of pressure accumulator:

` Pressure accumulator for feed pressure (under aggregate).
` Pressure accumulator for emergency operation (tower).
Figure 288 Pressure accumulator
1 Connection for pressure gauge

2 Wall mount
3 Pressure accumulator for emergency operation (tower)
4 Drain valve
5 Connection for pressure gauge
6 Pressure accumulator for feed pressure (under aggregate)
WARNING
Incorrect handling of the pressure accumulator.
Explosion and bursting!
Maintenance work on the accumulator must exclusively be carried out by
trained maintenance personnel.
In case of uncertainty contact Liebherr after sales service.

starting.
` Suitable tools and measuring instruments (pressure gauge) are available.
CAUTION
522 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in hydraulic system.
Make sure the hydraulic system is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
Testing pressure accumulator emergency operation

u Depressurise the hydraulic system (engine off).
u Drain the oil from the accumulator (drain valve open).
u Detach the hydraulic connections.
u Detach the wall mount.
u Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure gauge connection point.
u Compare the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge with the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the pressure accumulator.
w If the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge is less than the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator,
change the accumulator.
Testing the accumulator feed pressure

NOTE
If detaching the hydraulic connection causes oil to leak
use the vacuum pump.
u Detach wall mount.
u Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure gauge connection point.
u Compare the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge with the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the pressure accumulator.
w If the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge is less than the
target pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator,
change the accumulator.
LHM 120-280_002 523

141128
Maintenance
5.16.9 Change pressure accumulator
WARNING
Incorrect handling of the pressure accumulator.
Explosion and bursting!
Maintenance work on the accumulator must exclusively be carried out by
trained maintenance personnel.
NOTE
General
Concerning the accumulator maintenance and service intervals, observe
national regulations or the Liebherr maintenance schedule.
New accumulators must be filled to the necessary pressure by the
manufacturer before being put into operation.
The operating data (pressure, fluid, etc.) must be marked clearly and
legibly on the accumulator.
LHM machines have 2 types of pressure accumulator:

` Pressure accumulator for feed pressure (under aggregate).
` Pressure accumulator for emergency operation (tower).

starting.
` Original Liebherr pressure accumulators are available.
` The hydraulic oil pressure is 0 bar.
` The hydraulic oil temperature is 40°C.
CAUTION
u Drain the oil from the accumulator (drain valve open).
524 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
u Detach the wall mount.
u Replace accumulators with new original Liebherr accumulators and connect

to the hydraulic system and wall mount.
u Thoroughly clean the outside of the pressure accumulator so that the mar
kings and operating data are clearly visible.
CAUTION
Dirt and foreign bodies in hydraulic system.
Make sure the hydraulic system is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
5.16.10 Hydraulic cylinders

starting.
` Anti-corrosion agent is available.
NOTE
Anti-corrosion agent
Liebherr recommends CORTEC VCI 369 (ID 861008614).
CAUTION
Dirt and lack of corrosion protection
are liable to damage the hydraulic cylinders.
Ensure that the hydraulic cylinders are free from dirt and have adequate
corrosion protection.
The following hydraulic cylinders require maintenance:

` Supporting cylinders (for support pads).
` Hydraulic cylinders of the outriggers.
` Suspension cylinders of the wheel sets.
` Luffing cylinder.
u Clean the cylinder pistons thoroughly.
u Treat the cylinder pistons with a suitable anti-corrosion agent.
u Fully extend and retract the cylinder pistons 2-3 times.

w The pistons of the hydraulic cylinders are now treated.
NOTE
Luffing cylinder
To service the luffing cylinders, lay down the boom. (See chapter:
Operation, Laying down the boom).
LHM 120-280_002 525

141128
Maintenance
5.16.11 Hydraulic hoses and hose lines
Hydraulic hoses and hose lines are subject to a natural ageing process. Their
storage life and useful life are therefore limited:
` The useful life is 6 years (note the date of manufacture on hoses).
` Useful life will be shortened by use at the limit of permitted stress (very
high/low temperatures, high pulse frequencies, multi-shift operation, etc.).
CAUTION
Repairing hydraulic hoses and hose lines
is liable to cause damage and injury.
Hydraulic hoses and hose lines should only be renewed.
Use only original Liebherr spare parts.
Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for the following:

` Damage to the outer layer as far as the reinforcement (chafing, cuts and
cracks, etc.).
` Degradation of the outer layer (formation of cracks in the hose material,
etc.).
` Deformation in the pressurised and depressurised state, and at bends
that do not correspond to the original state of the hydraulic hose or hose
line (layer separation, bubble formation, etc.).
` Leaks.
` Damage or deformation of the hose fitting which reduces the strength of
the fitting or the hose/fitting connection.
` Hose straying out of the fitting.
` Corrosion of the fitting which reduces its efficiency or strength.
` Exceeding of storage period and useful life.
u In any of the situations mentioned above, the hydraulic hoses and hose lines
must be renewed.
NOTE
If detaching the hydraulic connection causes oil to leak
use the vacuum pump.
Disposal
regulations.
526 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.16.12 Oil diagnosis system
NOTE
First oil change
Do not delay the first oil change of the unit in question, because increased
contamination occurs during the running-in period.
Functions of the oil diagnosis system:

` To prevent machine failures.
` To reduce downtimes.
` To minimise repair costs.
` To highlight abnormal wear patterns.
` To identify potential causes of damage in good time.
Taking an oil sample

starting.
` The relevant unit has been warmed up for approx. 15 minutes.
` An original Liebherr oil diagnosis kit is available.
u Take the oil samples either directly from the housing of the relevant unit or
from the oil that is drained out when the oil is changed.
u Drain off at least a 1/4 litre of oil before taking the sample and then fill the
container with well-mixed oil.
Figure 289 Liebherr oil diagnosis kit

1 Plastic syringe container cap
2 Plastic syringe container
3 Syringe neck
4 Adapter
5 Plastic hose
6 Shipping carton
7 Sample data sheet
LHM 120-280_002 527

141128
Maintenance
u Screw the plastic hose (5) with adapter (4) onto the plastic syringe container
(2).
Figure 290 Taking an oil sample
u Take at least 200ml of oil.
u Complete all sections of the sample data sheet (7).
u Place the oil sample and the sample data sheet into the shipping carton (6)
and send to the pre-printed address.
Oil diagnosis report
The oil diagnosis report contains the detailed results of the oil sample analysis
and provides information about any measures that need to be taken.
Symbol Meaning
Normal
High value, take a second oil sample for cross checking
Oil change needed
Repair needed
528 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.17 Electrical system
CAUTION
If you do not turn off the battery main switch
there is a risk of electric shock.
Turn of the battery main switch before carrying out any work on the
electrical system.
NOTE
Make sure that all components of the electrical system are clean and dry
at all times.
5.17.1 Batteries
In principle the batteries of the LHM machine are maintenance-free. At normal

operating temperatures and with correct regulator voltage there is no need to
top up the water. However, under abnormal operating conditions water is consu
med, therefore the battery must be regularly inspected according to the mainte
nance schedule.

starting.
` The battery main switch is turned off.
` Distilled water and a suitable funnel are available.
` Suitable pole grease is available.
Figure 291 Battery fluid level
u Carry out a visual check of the battery fluid level.

w The fluid level is between the MIN and MAX markings.
w Fluid level is below the MIN marking - top up with distilled water.
CAUTION
If the safety instructions is not followed:
There is a risk of damage to the electrical system.
Only top up with distilled water without any additives.
LHM 120-280_002 529

141128
Maintenance
u Unscrew the cell cap and insert a suitable funnel.

u Top up with distilled water.
w The fluid level should be roughly halfway between the MIN and MAX
markings.
u Reinsert the cell cap.
u Clean the batteries, especially the battery poles and cable clamps, with a dry
cloth.
u Grease the battery poles and cable clamps with suitable pole grease.
CAUTION
Placing tools or other objects on the battery
poses a risk of short-circuit.
Make sure there are no tools or other objects on the batteries.
5.17.2 Switch cabinets and termination boxes

starting.
` An original Liebherr filter mat is available.
CAUTION
Wet cleaning of switch cabinets and termination boxes
poses a risk of short-circuit and serious damage to the electrical system.
Never carry out wet cleaning of switch cabinets and termination boxes.
Only clean switch cabinets and termination boxes with a clean and dry
cloth.
Figure 292 Switch cabinet filter mat cover

1 Screws
2 Filter mat cover
u Undo the 4 screws (1) and remove the filter mat cover (2).
u Replace the old filter mat with a new original Liebherr filter mat.
u Reattach the filter mat cover and fasten with screws.
u Check all screws and clips for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
530 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.17.3 Replacing the generator air filter mat

starting.
Figure 293 Generator filter mat cover
1 Screws
2 Filter mat cover
u Undo the 4 screws (1) and remove the filter mat cover (2).
u Replace the old filter mat with a new original Liebherr filter mat.
u Reattach the filter mat cover and fasten with screws.
u Check all screws for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
5.17.4 Replace fuses and lamps
NOTE
Use only original Liebherr spare parts.

starting.
` Original Liebherr spare parts are available.
u Replace faulty fuses and lamps immediately.
u Check that the new part is correctly seated.
5.17.5 Check the emergency stop

` The engine has been switched off, only the ignition is on.
u Press the emergency stop switch with the ignition turned on.
w The monitor goes off. Result is satisfactory.
LHM 120-280_002 531

141128
Maintenance
5.17.6 Checking the hoisting limit switch
u Raise the hoisting gear until the hoisting limit switch is reached.
w Status appears on the monitor.
w Stop lifting.
u Lower the hoisting gear until the lifting device reaches the ground.
w Slack rope symbol appears on the monitor.
u Lower the hoisting gear (below crane level).

w Hoisting limit switch is reached.
w Stop lowering.
5.17.7 Check the undercarriage flap (centre ladder)
CAUTION
If the undercarriage flap is opened during crane operation
the slewing gear stops abruptly. The load swings.
Do not open the undercarriage flap during crane operation.
u Turn on the ignition.
u Open the undercarriage flap.

5.17.8 Cleaning the monitor
CAUTION
The use of harsh cleaning agents, solvents, petrol, etc.
will damage the monitor.
Use a suitable cleaning agent to clean the monitor (as for normal
computer screens).

starting.
` The ignition is turned off.
u Wipe the screen with a moistened cloth.
532 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.17.9 Replacing the cable of the boom cable drum
u Lay down boom (see section 'Operation, Laying down the boom').
starting.
` The booms has been laid down and is lying on the ground.
u Unwind and detach the old cable from the boom cable drum.
CAUTION
Non-compliance with safety notes!
Damage to the cable on the boom cable drum.
When preparing the cable plug, before inserting the sealing compound
remove the Teflon wrapping (if present) from the individual cores to
ensure better contact of the sealing compound with the core lead
insulation.
When rewinding both cables, ensure a minimum distance of 5m.
When rewinding both cables, do not use deflection pulleys.
When rewinding the two cables, make sure the drums rotate in the same
direction.
Do not kink the cables.
Do not go below the minimum bending radius for flexible installation of 10
- 12 times the cable diameter.
Do not pull the cable over sharp edges or pointed objects.
u Turn on the battery main switch and start the engine.
u Raise the boom.
u Slowly wind and unwind the cable hanging from the boom cable drum 3 ti
mes (see chapter: Operation, Boom cable drum).
u Unwind the cable from the boom cable drum until it is 1m above the ground
and let it hang there without any additional load for at least 30 minutes.
u Again, slowly wind and unwind the cable of the boom cable drum 3 times.
u Attach the cable of the boom cable drum to the load lifting device.
LHM 120-280_002 533

141128
Maintenance
5.17.10 Cleaning the undercarriage slip ring unit
CAUTION
Use of wet or damp cleaning cloths
will damage the slip ring unit.
Avoid using wet or damp cleaning cloths.
Use only dry methods (compressed air or vacuum cleaner) to clean the
slip ring unit.

starting.
` Compressed air or a vacuum cleaner is available.
Figure 294 Slip ring unit

1 Screw
2 Cover
u Remove the screws (1) from the cover (2).
u Remove the cover.
u Clean the slip ring unit with compressed air and a vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION
Dust and dirt particles
can cause eye injuries.
Wear protective clothing (particularly safety goggles and a breathing
mask).
u Reattach the cover (2).
u Reinsert the screws, tighten and check for leaks.
534 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.18 Fire detection and extinguishing system
NOTE
Maintenance work:
When carrying out any maintenance work on the machine and when
entering the machinery house or the switch cabinet room, the fire
detection and extinguishing system must be turned off with the key
switch.
On resuming operation, the fire detection and extinguishing system must
be turned on again.
In the event of a fault, the fire detection and extinguishing system must be
turned off. There is a risk of false alarm.
Do not use a steam cleaner to clean in the area of the sensors. Danger of
damage!
FIRST AID
See Chapter: Safety, Hazards.
5.18.1 Testing the hydraulic oil supply stop valve

To guarantee safety, this test must be carried out at the intervals of the mainte
nance schedule.
u Press the information screen button.

w The information screen appears.
LHM 120-280_002 535

141128
Maintenance
Figure 296 Information screen LHM120 - 280
u Press the hydraulic oil supply stop valve test screen button.
w The hydraulic oil supply stop valve test screen appears.
Figure 297 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve test screen
536 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
NOTE
To carry out the test, stop all crane movements and place the master
switches in the neutral position.
u Press the hydraulic oil supply stop valve test button.

w The test starts.
w The hourglass flashes on the screen.
Figure 298 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve test screen - test active
Hydraulic oil supply stop valve in open position.
Hydraulic oil supply stop valve in undefined position.
Hydraulic oil supply stop valve in closed position.
LHM 120-280_002 537

141128
Maintenance
If the test is successful, this symbol appears.

w The symbol continues to appear on the test screen until a new test of the
hydraulic oil supply stop valve is carried out or the machine is restarted.
If the test is unsuccessful, this symbol appears.

w An error message appears on the error page.
u Inform Liebherr service department.
NOTE
After testing has finished, manually reopen the stop valve.
u Open the cover.

u For the position of the hydraulic oil supply stop valve, see the chapter Ope
ration/Checks before start-up.
Figure 299 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve closed

u Push lever 1 in direction A.
u Pull lever 2 in direction B.
w Both levers can easily be moved in direction C.
Figure 300 Hydraulic oil supply stop valve open
538 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.19 Emergency devices
5.19.1 Fire extinguishers
Fire extinguishers are subject to national and regional regulations and must be
replaced by the operator.
u Observe the type plates on the fire extinguishers (regarding inspection date).
5.19.2 Abseil rescue equipment
NOTE
To guarantee safe descent in case of emergency:
Ensure that the emergency descent rescue equipment is checked
regularly.
See section 'Operation, Emergency exit'.
1 Cover
2 Storage compartment
3 Emergency descent rescue harness, rope, karabiner
u Have the emergency descent rescue equipment inspected by a specialist.
u Have the result of the inspection entered in the warranty and inspection
card.
5.19.3 Personal protective equipment
The following maintenance points contribute to functioning and thus to personal

safety:
` Observe the manufacturer's guidelines on care and maintenance of the
protective equipment.
` The protective equipment must only be inspected by a specialist.
` Carry out regular visual checks.
` In case of irreparable damage, replace the protective equipment with new
protective equipment immediately.
` Pay attention to the cleanliness of the protective equipment and clean it if
necessary.
LHM 120-280_002 539

141128
Maintenance
5.20 Steel structure
DANGER
Unacceptable repairs
may cause the steel structure to fail.
Repairs to steelwork may only be carried out by the Liebherr service
department.

starting.
u Carry out checks at the intervals indicated in the maintenance schedule

(overall machine).
u Check all weld seams according to the weld seam inspection overview
(contained in the Technical Information) by visually examining for cracks
and rust.
w If no cracks or rust are found, no further action is required.
In case of cracks or rust:
u Remove the painting in this area so that the extent of the damage is clearly
visible.
u Contact the Liebherr service department to enquire about the further action
to be taken (magnetic particle inspection, dye penetrant inspection, etc.).
Components to be checked (according to weld seam inspection overview):

` Undercarriage
` Slewing platform
` Tower
` Boom
` Luffing cylinders
540 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.21 Central lubrication system
The central lubrication systems provide the necessary lubrication to the fol
lowing units:
` Undercarriage
` Slewing platform
` Tower
` Boom
NOTE
Central lubrication system
The number of central lubrication systems depends on the size of the
machine.
Figure 301 Central lubrication system
1 Pump control
2 Refill connection (grease nipple)
3 Supply container
4 Maximum fill level marker
A Rotary control knob for setting the lubrication time in minutes
B Rotary control knob for setting the pause time in hours
CAUTION
Incorrect time settings
are liable to wreck the bearings and units.
Do not change the factory-set times of the central lubrication systems.
LHM 120-280_002 541

141128
Maintenance
5.21.1 Topping up grease
CAUTION
If air and dirt get into the lubrication system,
bleed and clean the lubrication lines. Risk of damage:
Ensure that the central lubrication system is not empty.

starting.
available.
u Check the fill level of the central lubrication system.
u If the fill level is below the maximum fill level marker, fill the central lubrica
tion system with suitable grease according to the lubricant table until the ma
ximum fill level is reached.
542 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22 Ropes and pulleys
Ropes and pulleys are very sensitive to mechanical damage.
The criteria mentioned above are taken from ISO 4309.
u Use ropes of the same type and strength as the original equipment.
5.22.1 Checking ropes

starting.
NOTE
Ropes are more exposed to mechanical damage near the hook.
u Check ropes and pulleys according to the maintenance schedule for all kinds
of damage, deformation, etc.
5.22.2 Rope discard criteria
DANGER
Failure to discard the rope when it has reached the end of its service life!
Load breakaway.
Replace the rope in good time.
The following points are important when determining whether the rope is due for
replacement:
` National or local regulations in the country of use.
` Environmental conditions.
` Use in the first few weeks after a rope has been put on.
` Results of previous inspections.
` Time for which the rope has been used.
NOTE
If the machine has been standing idle for a long time or incidents have
occurred that are liable to cause damage:
Check the rope and end attachments.
LHM 120-280_002 543

141128
Maintenance
5.22.3 Checking the rope diameter
The rope becomes thinner due to use and associated natural wear and tear. If
the rope diameter has reduced by more than 10% relative to the nominal
dimension as a result of internal friction, corrosion etc., the rope must be
changed.

starting.
` A caliper gauge with wide jaws is available.
Figure 302 Rope diameter: (left) correct measurement, (right) incorrect mea
surement
u Measure the rope diameter at two widely separated points on the rope.
w The rope diameter is determined by calculating the average of four mea
surements.
NOTE
Check the rope drive before using new ropes. (See chapter: Maintenance,
Ropes and pulleys, Checking the rope drive)
544 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.4 Rope deformations
DANGER
Non-compliance with safety notes!
Load breakaway.
Replace the rope in case of rope deformations.
Figure 303 Cage formation
The outer layer of wires is loosened or the outer wire braids are longer than the
inner ones.
Figure 304 Loop formation
Single wires or groups of wires emerge from the rope structure.
Figure 305 Necking
The diameter of the rope is reduced over short lengths.
Figure 306 Knots
Deformations of the wire rope. These are formed when a loop in the rope is
pulled straight without the wire rope being able to compensate for the loop by
turning on its axis.
LHM 120-280_002 545

141128
Maintenance
Figure 307 Corkscrew
The axis of the unloaded wire rope becomes helical. This prevents the rope
drive from running smoothly. The resultant damage includes increased abrasion
and wire breaks. The rope must be replaced if the deformation at the thinnest
point of the rope exceeds ⅓ of the nominal rope diameter.
5.22.5 Checking for corrosion
DANGER
Corrosion ignored!
Load breakaway.
In case of corrosion, change the rope.

starting.
u Check ropes for corrosion.

w Corrosion reduces the rope diameter. If the rope diameter has reduced
by 7% or more relative to the nominal dimension, the rope must be
changed regardless of whether or not wire breaks have occurred.
Figure 308 Atmospheric corrosion
occurs in corrosive and salt water atmospheres (e.g. prolonged storage of

ropes in the open air, salt water atmospheres, etc.). In ropes, a distinction is
made between atmospheric corrosion (produces "even" rusting) and local types
of corrosion such as pitting (forms deep holes at points where the protective
layer is missing or damaged).
Figure 309 Atmospheric corrosion
546 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.6 Checking for rope abrasion
DANGER
Rope wear ignored!
Load breakaway.
In case of rope abrasion, change the rope.

starting.
u Check ropes for abrasion.

w If the rope diameter has reduced by 7% or more relative to the nominal
dimension, the rope must be changed regardless of whether or not wire
breaks have occurred.
Figure 310 Rope abrasion
Rope abrasion reduces the static breaking force of the rope due to reduction of
the rope diameter and its fatigue limit due to wear grooves.
LHM 120-280_002 547

141128
Maintenance
5.22.7 Checking for heat damage
DANGER
Impact of heat ignored!
Load breakaway.
In case of heat damage, change the rope.

starting.
u Checking ropes for heat damage.
Figure 311 Heat damage
At temperatures above 300°C, the tensile fibre structure of the wire rope
caused by cold deformation recrystallises. The wire loses around ⅔ of its origi
nal strength.
Figure 312 Heat damage in case of lightning strike
In case of lightning strike the rope is heated locally so that the wire starts to
melt.
548 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.8 Checking the number of permitted wire breaks
NOTE
When putting on a new wire rope:
The rope diameter, breaking load and number of bearing wires in the
outer strands must match those of the original rope.
Contact the Liebherr service department or the rope manufacturer to find
out how many bearing wires there are in the outer strands.
The table below shows the permitted number of wire breaks relative to a de
fined control section of the rope.
Number of bearing wires in the outer strands of the Number of wire breaks at end of service life
wire rope A)
Regular lay over a length of
n 6D 30 D
50 2 4
51 to 75 3 6
76 to 100 4 8
101 to 120 5 10
121 to 140 6 11
141 to 160 6 13
161 to 180 7 14
181 to 200 8 16
201 to 220 9 18
221 to 240 10 19
241 to 260 10 21
261 to 280 11 22
281 to 300 12 24
over 300 B) 0,04 x n 0.08 x n
In the case of ropes that have particularly thick wires in the outer layer of the outer strands, round strand
ropes 6 x 19 Seal to DIN 3058 or round strand ropes 8 x 19 Seal to DIN 3062, the number of visible wire
breaks at the end of the service life is 2 lines lower than the values shown in the table.
D = wire rope diameter
A) Filler wires are not considered to be bearing wires. In the case of wire ropes
with several layers of strand, only the strands in the outermost layer are dee
med to be outer strands. In the case of steel ropes, the steel core functions as
the inner strand.
B) Round up the calculated figures.
Example:
Rope diameter D is 30 mm
Number of wires in the outer strands: 210
This means that over a control section measuring 6 x D = 180 mm [7"] the num
ber of permitted wire breaks may not be higher than 9, or over a control length
of
30 x D = 900 mm [2 12"] it may not be higher than 18.
u Check ropes for the number of wire breaks and compare with the values in
the table.
LHM 120-280_002 549

141128
Maintenance
Crane serial number Date rope

fitted Rope details (see ISO 17893 for rope information)
yy/mm/dd
RCNa Nominal Manufacturer Core b Quality b Alignment and pos

diameter ition b
IWRC
……………………………………… mm
……………………. FC
Right: sZ ZZ Z
…………………………………… WSC
… Left: zS sS S
Type of use …………... …………... Construction Non-galvanised
Date discarded Galvanised, grease
……………………………………… yy/mm/dd ……………………………………
…
End type(s): Permitted reduction

of diameter 10% or 3
………………………. Number of permitted outer wire breaks %
.
……………………………………… ……………. in 6d and ……………… in 30d
Visible wire breaks Wear of outer strands Corrosion Damage and de
formation
Date of in Cumulative
spection Number of visible Position Degree c Current Reduction Position Degree c Position Degree c Position Degree c
overall conditionc
wire breaks (length) on rope diameter below nom. on rope on rope on rope
yy/mm/dd diam. %
6d 30d
Name and signature of tester

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
a RCN (Rope Category Number) - see Table 1 and 2 and Appendix E.
b Mark with a cross as applicable
c Type and extent of damage 20 % = slight; 40 % = moderate; 60 % = high; 80 % = very high; or 100 % due for replacement
NOTE
Determine and state the extent of damage as a percentage of the discard
criterion.
Calculate the cumulative overall condition of the rope by adding the
percentages of the extent of damage previously determined.
If the total reaches 100%, discard the rope.
550 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.9 Storing ropes
DANGER
Ropes stored incorrectly.
Load breakaway.
Only store ropes in dry and well ventilated premises.
Do not store ropes out of doors and protect ropes against the
environment.
Do not store ropes directly on the floor.
If ropes are to be stored for longer than two months, open the packaging
on the underside of the drum to prevent corrosion.
Keep the material inspection certificate in a safe place.
Check that the labelling of ropes matches the material inspection
certificate and the order.
DANGER
If the marking or labelling of the rope drum is missing,
ropes are liable to be confused. The load may break loose and severe damage
may be caused.
Label the affected drums immediately in accordance with the delivery
documentation.
5.22.10 Transporting ropes
Ropes are very susceptible to external damage, therefore great care must be
taken when they are lifted, transported or unloaded.
` Lift drums with soft slings or round slings.
` Insert spindle through the centre of the drum.
` Lift rope drums with a forklift.
Figure 313 Lifting rope drums
LHM 120-280_002 551

141128
Maintenance
5.22.11 Winding ropes
DANGER
If the wire ropes are not handled correctly:
the load may break loose and severe damage may be caused.
Wind ropes according to the instructions.

NOTE
Do not let rope get dirty.
Do not pull the rope along the ground.
u Lay ropes without twisting and without causing damage to the outside.
Figure 314 Winding ropes without brake

A Unwind from the rope drum in the winding direction.
B Unwind ropes from a jacked up drum.
C Unwinding to the side causes the rope to twist and leads to kink
formation.
Figure 315 Winding ropes with brake

A Correct winding with brake
B Incorrect winding with brake
552 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.12 Checking the rope drive
The service life of the rope depends to a large extent on checking of the rope
drive. Any fault on the rope drive will damage the rope. The rope will reach the
end of its service life more quickly due to increased wear.
u Check the grooves of the winching drums and the pulleys for wear using test
templates.
NOTE
Test templates are related to the nominal groove base diameter.
Checking winch drum groove base for wear

starting.
` A test template is available.
Figure 316 Acceptable test result

A Test template
B Winch drum
Test template(1) fits easily into the groove of the winch drum (2). Diameter of
the test template is more or less congruent with the groove base. The groove
diameter of the winch drum is 4 - 8 % larger than the test template diameter.
u Use the test template to check each individual groove on the winch drum.
Figure 317 Unacceptable test result

A Test template
B Winch drum
LHM 120-280_002 553

141128
Maintenance
If the diameter of the test template is not the same as the groove base of the
winch drum, a crescent-shaped gap is visible:
u Remove the rope.
u Smooth the surface of the grooves.
u Contact Liebherr service department.
Rope tensioning pulleys of the winch drums

starting.
u Checking the rope tensioning pulleys for wear

w Rope tensioning pulleys are evenly worn and do not show any extreme
grooving, etc. The result is satisfactory. No further action required.
w Rope tensioning pulleys are unevenly worn. if the rope tensioning pulleys
press down heavily on the rope in the rope guide, the rope drive will not
function properly. The rope tensioning pulleys should be replaced.
Checking pulleys for ease of movement

u Check pulleys for ease of movement.
w Pulleys move easily. No further action required.
w Pulleys do not move easily. Lubricate the pulley bearings (see chapter:
Lubricating the pulleys)
554 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.13 Wear of steel pulleys

starting.
Figure 318 Checking steel pulleys for wear
A Test template
B Steel pulley
A Maximum permissible wear on pulley
u Check the steel pulleys with a test template (see chapter: Checking winch
drum groove base for wear).
w The maximum permitted wear A is 4% of the nominal rope diameter. No
further action required.
w The maximum permitted wear A is greater than 4 % of the nominal rope
diameter. Contact Liebherr service department and change the pulleys.
NOTE
Negative imprint: Rope pulleys
The rope groove exhibits a negative imprint of the rope. Imprints of the
strands are desirable. They result in a larger rope contact area and
increase the service life of the rope. When changing ropes, remove ridges
and smooth sharp edges on the surface of the pulleys.
LHM 120-280_002 555

141128
Maintenance
5.22.14 Wear of plastic pulleys

starting.
A Test template
B Plastic pulley
A Maximum permissible wear on pulley
u Check the plastic pulleys with a test template (see chapter: Checking winch
drum groove base for wear).
w The maximum permitted wear A is 50% of the nominal rope diameter. No
w The maximum permitted wear A is greater than 50% of the nominal rope
diameter. Contact Liebherr service department and change the pulleys.
NOTE
Negative imprint: Rope pulleys
The rope groove exhibits a negative imprint of the rope. Imprints of the
strands are desirable. They result in a larger rope contact area and
increase the service life of the rope. When changing ropes, remove ridges
and smooth sharp edges on the surface of the pulleys.
556 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.15 Checking pulleys for damage
Pulleys are susceptible to external damage.

starting.
u Make sure that pulleys do not chafe anywhere.
u Do not place pulleys on the ground without protective devices.
Figure 319 Damaged pulley
u Check rope pulleys for all kinds of damage (nicks, wobbles, etc.)
w If the rope pulleys are aligned with the direction in which the rope is
running and there is no evidence of wobble or other damage: No further
action required.
w The rope pulleys show signs of damage. Contact Liebherr service de
partment and change the pulleys.
LHM 120-280_002 557

141128
Maintenance
5.22.16 Lubricating pulley bearings

Pulleys must turn easily to provide optimum rope drive. If the pulleys are not
lubricated by the central lubrication system, they must be lubricated manually
with a grease gun.
NOTE
The central lubrication system lubricates the pulley bearings (see chapter:
Operation, Central lubrication system).
u Lay down the boom..

starting.
` A hand lever grease pistol filled with suitable grease according to the
lubricant table (see chapter: Lubricant table) is available.
Lubricating pulleys manually

u Lubricate the pulley bearings on the tower head and boom head via the gre
ase nipples using a hand lever grease pistol.
w Make sure that grease does not not leak from between the pulleys.
5.22.17 Cleaning plastic pulleys

starting.
` Suitable cleaning agent and cleaning cloths are available.
u Cleaning plastic pulleys with suitable cleaning agent and cleaning cloths to
prevent excessive wear of the plastic pulleys.
Plastic pulleys are resistant to:

` Mineral oil
` Petrol
` Kerosene
` Diesel
Plastic pulleys are not resistant or have only limited resistance to:
` Concentrated mineral acids (e.g. sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, nitric
acid)
` Concentrated organic acids (e.g. formic acid)
` Concentrated bases (e.g. sodium, caustic potash solution or corrosive
potassium salts)
` Alcohol other than ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol and propyl alcohol
` Inorganic chlorides (e.g. calcium, lithium chloride, magnesium chloride
and zinc chloride)
558 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.22.18 Luffing ropes
NOTE
Observe the reeving plan according to the technical information.
NOTE
Rope lay direction on a single layer drum
The lay direction of the rope is opposite to the lay direction of the drum.
Right-hand drum - rope with left-hand lay direction and vice versa.
When luffing the rope, pay attention to the following points:

` Use exclusively ropes recommended by the manufacturer.
` Make sure that the rope does not become untwined or twisted.
` If an auxiliary rope is used, make sure the permitted tensile force is app
lied (at least the weight of the rope).
u Luff the new rope with the help of the old rope or an auxiliary rope.
CAUTION
Rope deflection angle greater than 4°:
Material damage.
Position the pulley as far away as possible and without any lateral
deflection.
u Lay down the boom..

starting.
` Wear suitable protective clothing.
u Check rope for damage due to improper handling or storage.
CAUTION
Sudden movement as rope end comes off drum!
Unwind the rope from the rope drum carefully and as slowly as possible.
Welding rope eyes
CAUTION
Butt-welded ropes!
Weld eyes between two connections (ropes).
A rope stocking may be used (the rope stocking manufacturer's
instructions must be followed).
LHM 120-280_002 559

141128
Maintenance
u Luff the ropes in such a way that the ends of all ropes are at the same
height when loaded (at least the load on the swing gear or the hook cross
bar).
w If the difference between the rope ends is no more than +/- 20 mm: No
w If the difference between the rope ends is more than +/- 20 mm: Equalize
the rope lengths at the winch fixing.
u Check that the new wire rope is laid correctly in the grooves of the rope
drums or pulleys.
u Have the limit switches checked and adjusted by by personnel authorised by

Liebherr.
u Hoist a light load (not more than 10% of full load) and check the winding of
the wire rope onto the winch drum.
5.22.19 Lubricate ropes
Regular rope maintenance ensures safe operation of the crane and increases
the service life of the rope.

` A cleaning brush is available.
` Suitable lubricant is available (see following table)
Manufacturer Make
Agip Precis
Amity UK Ltd. PCL
Amity UK Ltd. IKV Ramca 250 Spray
BP Stemkor 171
Bremer & Leguil Rivolta S.K.M 17
ELASKON UNOLIT 130
EUROL TW FLUID
Exxon-Mobil Mobiltac 375 NC
Fuchs Cedracon
Fuchs Ceplattyn KG 10
Fuchs Ceplattyn KG 10 HMF-C
Nyrosten Nyrosten N 113
Shell Enesis R Type: RB0015
Shell Enesis RX Type: RB003
Total Osyris DWX 9000
Van Meeuwen Bel-Ray Wire rope Lubricant
u Apply extra lubrication in the areas where the ropes bend around the winch
drums and the pulleys.
u Apply grease with a brush. In special cases a high-pressure lubricating de

vice is used (Follow the manufacturer's instructions). An alternative is to use
solvent-based lubricants that can be sprayed on the rope.
560 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
u Observe maintenance intervals (See chapter: Maintenance, Maintenance

schedule).
NOTE
Third-party ropes
Select lubricants according to the recommendations of the rope
manufacturer concerned or contact the Liebherr service department.
CAUTION
Broken wires and damaged spots on rope.
Danger of injury when cleaning.
Wear protective clothing (especially protective gloves).
Use a brush for cleaning.
LHM 120-280_002 561

141128
Maintenance
5.23 Boom
CAUTION
Non-observance of safety notes!
Serious injury.
Boom access is only permitted for maintenance personnel and for
inspections.
When climbing the boom, make sure the maintenance ladder is firmly
attached.
Fasten the safety belt.
Before starting up, make sure there are no parts such as tools etc. on the
boom which could fall down.
starting.
` The boom is lowered, the boom head lying on the ground.
` The oil is at normal operating temperature.
` A suitable funnel is available for topping up oil.
` Suitable gear oil according to the lubricant table is available.
5.23.1 Check the oil level of the boom cable drum.
Figure 320 Checking the oil of the boom cable drum

1 Vent screw
2 Hose
3 Sight glass for checking oil level with boom laid down
4 Sight glass for checking oil level with boom in horizontal position
(not laid down)
5 Oil drain screw
562 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
u Check oil level with sight glass (3) on the boom cable drum.
w Oil halfway up sight glass - no further action required.
w No oil visible in sight glass - top up with suitable oil according to lubricant
table and instructions (see chapter: Maintenance, Boom, Topping up
boom cable drum oil).
5.23.2 Topping up boom cable drum oil

u Remove the venting screw (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Insert a suitable funnel in the hole for the venting screw which you have
removed.
u Detach the hose (2) at one end.
u Slowly top up via the funnel with suitable oil according to the lubricant table
and wait for the oil to settle.
u Check the oil level level in the sight glass (3 or 4) after 5 minutes.
w Oil halfway up sight glass.
w Oil less than halfway up sight glass - Top up oil according to lubricant ta
ble.
u Remove the funnel.
u Reattach the venting screw and hose.
u Start up the machine and operate the boom cable drum in both directions
(raise/lower).
u Turn off the machine, after 5 minutes check the oil level of the boom cable
drum and top up if necessary.
Disposal
regulations.
LHM 120-280_002 563

141128
Maintenance
5.23.3 Draining the boom cable drum oil
u Put a suitable and sufficiently large collecting container in position.
u Open the venting screw (1).
CAUTION
Damage to gearbox.
u Open the oil drain screw (5).

w Oil drains out.
Disposal
regulations.
564 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.24 Cleaning
To guarantee an even surface quality, clean the machine regularly with a steam
cleaner. Especially following work with highly corrosive materials.
CAUTION
Unsuitable cleaning agents!
Avoid the use of aggressive and abrasive cleaning agents.
Avoid phosphate cleaners.
Avoid solvents or cleaning against containing solvents.
Use only cleaning agents with a pH below 12.

` The boom is laid down.
starting.
` The machine has cooled down.
u Clean the machine using a steam cleaner.
w Maximum pressure 150 bar, minimum distance 40cm.
w If necessary use a mild cleaning agent (tenside cleaner).
u After cleaning, preserve the machine (see chapter: Maintenance, Anti-corro
sion coating)
CAUTION
Spraying sensitive units with water under high pressure.
Do not spray water on the hydraulic, water and air coolers.
Do not spray water on any interior spaces (slewing platform, cab, etc.).
Do not spray water on any electrical units (on the undercarriage, tower,
etc.).
Disposal
regulations.
Hydraulic, water and air coolers
Type of dirt Method:

Dry dust Clean with compressed air (maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
Wet dust Clean with steam jet (maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
Oily dust Clean with steam jet, adding a mild cleaning agent (maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
LHM 120-280_002 565

141128
141128
Maintenance
5.25 Slewing platform filter mats*
CAUTION
Overheating of the turning platform
Air circulation in the machinery house is no longer ensured if filter mats are dirty
Check the filter mats as specified in the maintenance plan.
Figure 321 Slewing platform filter mat*

1 wingnut
2 fixing eye
3 grating
4 filter mats
LHM 120-280_002 566

141128
Maintenance
5.25.1 Replacing slewing platform filter mats

starting.
u Unfasten the wingnut by hand and remove it.
u Remove the fixing eye.
u Remove the gratings.
u Replace the old filter mats with a new original Liebherr filter mats.
w Filter mat replaced.
Disposal
regulations.
567 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.26 Checking the Nemag shackle
As the link between the rope and the lifting device, the Nemag shackle is ex
posed to particularly heavy stresses.
DANGER
Incorrect maintenance of the Nemag shackle!
Load breakaway.
Observe maintenance intervals and safety notices.
In case of visible damage, replace the Nemag shackle immediately.

starting.
u Carry out checks at the intervals indicated in the maintenance schedule (lif
ting device + rotator).
u Secure the ropes.
u Detach the relevant lifting device according to the operation manual.
u Detach the Nemag shackle from the rope.
u Check the Nemag shackle for cracks by MPI (magnetic powder inspection).
Figure 322 Nemag shackle - areas to be inspected
1 Areas to be inspected
LHM 120-280_002 568

141128
Maintenance
5.27 Ventilation, heating and air conditioning
CAUTION
Incorrect maintenance of ventilation, heating and air conditioning system.
Damage to property and health risks.
Work on the ventilation, heating and air conditioning system must only be
carried out by authorised Liebherr service personnel.
NOTE
Observe the documentation supplied by the manufacturer of the system
concerned.
u Check systems to ensure they are in good working order, free from leaks,
clean and securely seated.
u Check the functioning of ventilation flaps and outlets to ensure they are
clean and in good working order.
569 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.28 Corrosion protection
Preservation of the machine is very important to avoid premature wear. To gua

rantee a long service life for the machine, whatever the environmental con
ditions, pay close attention to the corrosion protection (particularly when hand
ling loads with aggressive chemicals or fertilisers or where used near salt water)
Carry out regular inspections. Visual checks of the corrosion protection should
include:
` Checking for dirt
` Looking for damaged paintwork
` Checking the preservation
NOTE
Any defects found during the inspection must be rectified immediately.
Painting and repair systems and corrosion protection intervals are shown
in the tables below.
WARNING
Handling anti-corrosion agents can be hazardous for the machine and for
personnel.
Observe national and regional legal requirements.
Wear suitable work and safety apparel (overall, safety goggles, working
gloves and face mask). Change dirtily clothing.
Ensure an adequate supply of fresh air when working with anti-corrosion
agents.
Do not eat, drink or smoke while working with anti-corrosion agents.
When preserving switch cabinets or termination boxes, turn off the
electrics.
Keep containers of anti-corrosion agents away from naked flames, sparks
and other ignition sources.
Do not spray anti-corrosion agents onto naked flames or hot parts such
turbochargers, exhaust pipes, etc.
In the event of fire, use CO2 extinguishers, foam or a chemical
extinguisher. Never use water! (See also chapter: Safety, Procedure in
the event of fire.)
Store all anti-corrosion agents in a cool, dry place (storage temperature
15 - 20°C)
NOTE
Observe national and regional safety requirements when carrying out
repairs.
LHM 120-280_002 570

141128
Maintenance
NOTE
Repairs must only be carried out by persons with technical knowledge /
technical qualifications for corrosion protection.
Liebherr will not accept warranty claims for damage to the machine
(electrical, hydraulic components, etc.) or to the corrosion protection caused
by unqualified personnel.
The operator is obliged to ascertain the technical qualifications of the
maintenance personnel and demand corresponding proof.
FIRST AID
In case of injuries due to anti-corrosion agent, observe the following:
Skin contact:
u Rinse with plenty of soap and water
Eye contact:
u Rinse out the anti-corrosion agent immediately with plenty of water and con
tinue to rinse for several minutes.
u Alert the emergency services, or seek medical advice as quickly as possible.
Swallowing:
u Drink plenty of milk or water.
u Do not induce vomiting!
If high concentrations of anti-corrosive agent have been inhaled:
u Take the affected person outside immediately.
Disposal
Use sand or a suitable binding agent to absorb any spilled fluids.
regulations.
571 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.28.1 Climatic zones
Zone 1:
` Small fluctuations within the climatic zone
` Constant temperature
` Constant, low humidity
` High winds rare
Zone 2:
` Moderate fluctuations within the climatic zone
` Moderate temperature differences
` Relatively constant humidity (moderate fluctuations)
` Occasional high winds
Zone 3:
` Strong fluctuations within the climatic zone
` Strong temperature differences
` Strong fluctuations in humidity and frequently high humidity
` Extreme wind speeds, strongly contaminated wind (saline, aggressive
media such as chemicals, sand, bulk handling, etc.)
` Extreme UV radiation
Anti-corrosion coating inspection intervals in months:
Arctic climate Polar climate Boreal climate Warm tem Subtropical Tropical cli
perate climate climate mate
Zone 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Interval - 4 2 - 4 2 9 6 3 18 12 6 6 4 2 - 4 2
Anti-corrosion coating inspection intervals in months:
Arctic climate Polar climate Boreal climate Warm tem Subtropical Tropical cli
perate climate climate mate
Interval 6 6 9 12 9 6
LHM 120-280_002 572

141128
Maintenance
Figure 323 Arctic climate
Figure 324 Polar climate
573 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
Figure 325 Boreal climate
Figure 326 Warm temperate climate
LHM 120-280_002 574

141128
Maintenance
Figure 327 Subtropical climate
Figure 328 Tropical climate
575 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.28.2 Preservation
Area Hot-galvanised and electro- Hot-galvanised and electro-galvanised components, Screws, nuts, washers,
galvanised components screws, nuts, washers etc., bolts, galvanised hydraulic etc., bolts, galvanised hy
with doublings, joints and tubes, SAE screw fittings draulic tubes, SAE screw
gaps, outside surfaces of fittings
unpainted housings
Pretreatment Wash thoroughly with a steam cleaner (cleaning agent IR808s) and rinse with clear water (not salt water). Clean and
degrease with solvent (be careful of seals, O-rings, etc.).
Dry if necessary with dry, oil-free air.
If necessary, remove Sikaflex where it is torn or corroded.
Remove and sand off loose or flaking paint.
Remove any areas of corrosion with sandpaper (60 ć 80 grit) or a wheel sander.
St 2 according to DIN EN ISO 8501 ć 1 to 4
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through mechanical removal of corrosion.
Caution: Do not polish
For optimum adhesion of the conservative agent, the surfaces to be preserved must provide a solid substrate.
Coating Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD
Dinitrol 3650 30 μm μm DENSO TAPE μm
Pretreatment
Colour: Colour: Colour:
Transparent Brown
Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD Product quality: TFD
Dinitrol 4010 50 μm Dinitrol 4010 50 μm DENSO TAPE μm

Preservation
Transparent Transparent Brown
LHM 120-280_002 576

141128
Maintenance
Area Switch cabinet interior, internal elec Fuel tank: Hydraulic tank:
trical and electronic plug connections Tank inner surfaces (unpainted) Tank inner surfaces (unpainted)
Tank internal components (level Tank internal components (level
sensor, etc.) sensor, etc.)
Pretreatment Clean with a clean, dry cloth. Wash thoroughly with a steam cleaner (cleaning agent IR808s) and rinse with
clear water (not salt water).
Clean and degrease with solvent (be careful of seals, O-rings, etc.).
Remove Sikaflex where it is torn or corroded.
For optimum adhesion of the conservative agent, the surfaces to be preserved must provide a solid substrate.
Only necessary if the crane is shut down for a long period and with partially filled tanks:
μm μm μm
Pretreatment
Transparent
LPS1 approx. 2 μm Fuel approx. 2 μm Hydraulic oil approx. 2 μm
Preservation
Transparent Country-specific Crane-specific
577 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.28.3 Recommended conservative agent

Product name: ID no.: Package: Removal:
Dinitrol 3650 8900 368 14 20 l Remove the protective film of Dinitrol 3650
with mineral turpentine and similar solvent
cleaning agents.
Properties: Note:
The thixotropic viscosity characteristics of Dinitrol 3650 provide an anti-corrosion film in wholly or partially closed hollow bodies in which Dinitrol 3650 can be applied by immersion,
the evaporation of the solvent is delayed or even prevented. brushing or spraying. Dinitrol 3650 is only
Excellent penetration properties in joints and gaps is accompanied by moisture-displacing characteristics. Dinitrol 3650 forms a soft, intended for preservation of layered sheet
colourless protective film. Dinitrol 3650 is not weather resistant. ing. After a drying time of 24 hours the pre
served parts must be sealed with Dinitrol
4010.
Dinitrol 4010 8900 369 14 20 l Within 2 weeks of drying the Dinitrol 4010
protective film can be removed with mineral
turpentine. After complete drying the film
resists washing with a steam cleaner with
alkaline additives.
Properties: Note:
Dinitrol 4010 provides a quick-drying, non-tacky protective film that is hard to remove. Dinitrol 4010 can be applied by brushing or
Dinitrol 4010 is particularly suitable for and resistant to large changes in temperature, e.g. for protecting components in aggregates and by airless or airmix spraying.
drive units (from ć35°C to +210°C) and is suitable for all kinds of plastic and rubber parts. Drying time:
dependent on temperature
e.g.: 1 h touch-dry for 40 mμ 15°C ć 30°C
LPS1 8610 099 14 Spray The protective film dries out and does not
need removal.
Properties: Note:
The grease-free protective film protects electrical and electronic components and does not cause short-circuit. LPS1 is applied with an aerosol can.
It provides a dry, thin protective film which is oil, dust and dirt repellent.
Displaces moisture. Gives easy short-term corrosion protection.
DENSO TAPE 6930 589 14 Roll 100mm x 10m Remove the tape and degrease with cold
cleaning solvent or solvent cleaner.
Properties: Note:
A synthetic fabric tape impregnated with anti-corrosion agent. Tape is wound around the parts to be pro
tected.
DENSO TAPE 6032 319 14 Roll 50mm x 10m Remove the tape and degrease with cold
cleaning solvent or solvent cleaner.
Properties: Note:
A synthetic fabric tape impregnated with anti-corrosion agent. Tape is wound around the parts to be pro
tected.
LHM 120-280_002 578

141128
Maintenance
5.28.4 Coating
Area Welded structures, plates, brack Coated chrome steel and alu Exhaust pipes and silencers
ets, metal panels, etc. Cabin in minium components, galvanised
teriors and exteriors attachments
Pretreatment Wash thoroughly with a steam cleaner (cleaning agent IR808s) and rinse with clear water (not salt water).
Thoroughly clean and degrease with solvent (be careful of seals, O-rings, etc.).
Spot blast areas of corrosion, SA 2 ½ according to DIN EN ISO 8501-1/88.

Roughness must be according to roughness scale, segment 3-4 of the type G comparator as per DIN EN
ISO 8503-1 (peak-to-valley height Ry5: 40 - 85 μm).
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through sand-blasting. Be sure to use the
correct jet pressure and abrasive.
Sand off transitions from paint to steel with an orbital sander (P180 grit).
Sweep-blasting or sanding is required to ensure that paint adheres to all areas to be painted.
Caution: Do not polish.
For optimum adhesion of coatings, the surfaces to be coated must provide a solid substrate.
Amerlock 400AL 80 μm Amercoat 71TC 30 μm Intertherm 50 25 μm

Primer coat, all machine types
Aluminium White Aluminium
Top coat inside, intermediate coat, out Amerlock 400C 80 μm Amerlock 400C 80 μm
side only for marine corrosion protec
tion
RAL 9002 RAL 9002
Amercoat 450E 80 μm Amercoat 450E 80 μm Intertherm 50 25 μm

Top coat outside, all machine types
Light yellow / light grey / RAL 7047* Light yellow / light grey / RAL 7047* Aluminium
Cabin: Cabin:
External RAL 9002 External RAL 9002
Internal RAL 7015*
* Special colours: Ask manufacturer for specification
579 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
Area Welded structures, plates, brack Coated chrome steel and alu Exhaust pipes and silencers
ets, metal panels, etc. Cabin in minium components, galvanised
teriors and exteriors attachments
Spot blast areas of corrosion, SA 2 ½ according to DIN EN ISO 8501-1/88.

Roughness must be according to roughness scale, segment 3-4 of the type G comparator as per DIN EN
ISO 8503-1 (peak-to-valley height Ry5: 40 - 85 μm).
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through sand-blasting. Be sure to use the
correct jet pressure and abrasive.
Coating Signs / labels Anti-slip surface

Use a primer coat only for light colours
on a dark substrate Amerlock 450E 40 μm
RAL 9010 pure white
Amercoat 450E 40 μm Feycomastic PU μm

Non-slip
Top coat
Light yellow / light grey / RAL 7047* RAL 7016

RAL 9003
* Special colours: Ask manufacturer for specification
LHM 120-280_002 580

141128
Maintenance
Area Mechanical, hydraulic and elec Slewing bearings Fuel tank / hydraulic tank intern
trical parts and components ally coated
Remove any areas of corrosion with sandpaper (60 ć 80 grit) or a wheel sander, St 2 according to DIN EN
ISO 8501 ć 1 to 4.
With sheet thicknesses < 5 mm, be careful not to cause damage through mechanical removal of corrosion.
Caution: Do not polish
Amerlock 400AL 80 μm Delta Tone 9000 30 μm Interline 850 100 μm

Primer coat, all machine types
Aluminium Silver Beige
Amerlock 400C 80 μm
Top coat inside, intermediate coat, out
side only for marine corrosion protec Colour: Colour: Colour:
tion
RAL 9002
Amercoat 450E 80 μm Alkydspray 30 μm Interline 850 100 μm

Top coat outside, all machine types
Aluminium White
Cover with Sikaflex 222 black (wherever necessary, joints, corners, etc.).
581 LHM 120-280_002
141128
Maintenance
5.28.5 Recommended coating materials

Thinner
Amercoat 65 (8301 731 14)
Amercoat 920 (1022 6622)

GTA 220 (8301 008 14)
GTA 007 (8301 458 14)

Application:
V 3000 (8900 304 14)

Repairs to the corrosion protection can be applied with a brush, roller, airless spraying, etc.
For application with a flow cup spray gun, it is recommended to add thinner according to the manufacturer's instructions.
IMPORTANT!
Observe the manufacturer's instruction leaflets.
Product name: ID no.: Colour: Package:

Amerlock 400AL 8311 730 14 RAL 9002 (grey white) 10 l
Amerlock 400AL is a high build 2-component epoxy resin coating with aluminium pigmentation.
Amerlock 400AL is used mainly as an anti-corrosion primer.
X
Amerlock 400AL must be treated with a protective coating against environmental influences.
Amercoat 71TC 8301 047 14 Iron oxide red 20 l
Amercoat 71TC is a 2-component epoxy resin coating.
Used as an adhesion agent on galvanised metals, non-ferrous metals, etc. To provide a further build-up of coating, the use of an intermediate coat is (Amer
lock 400C) is recommended.
Amerlock 400C 8311 730 14 RAL 9002 (grey white) 10 l
Amerlock 400C is a high-build 2-component epoxy resin coating. Amerlock 400C is used primarily as an intermediate coat. X
Amerlock 400C must be treated with a protective coating against environmental influences. On all internal surfaces of the crane Amerlock 400C is used as
a top coat and does not have to be protected with any other coating.
Amercoat 450E 8900 526 14 See top coat paint plan 20 l
Amercoat 450E is a 2-component polyurethane top coat that is resistant to environmental influences. X
Amercoat 450E can be used for corrosion protection of category C4 M, C5 I L and C5 M L, only in conjunction with 3 coat systems. Always consult the
manufacturer regarding the finish coat used.
Intertherm 50 8301 120 14 Silver 5l
Intertherm 50 is a silicone-resin-based, single-component, high-temperature coating.
X
Intertherm 50 is abrasion and weather-resistant only after heating up to approx. 200°C.
Interline 850 8301 078 14 Beige 20 l
8301 079 14 White X
Interline 850 is an epoxy-phenol-resin-based 2-component high-build tank internal coating.
Feycomastic Antirutsch 8900 217 14 RAL 7016 (anthracite) 20 l
Feycomastic PU Rutschfest is a 2-component coating with plastic pellets. X
For use on all walkable surfaces. Use only with a flow cup spray gun (spray pressure approx. 1.5 bar). Bare metal surfaces must be pretreated with corro
sion protection (in accordance with the repair instructions above). Roughen hardened top coatings with emery cloth.
Delta Tone 9000 - Silver 1l
Delta Tone is a zinc aluminium gill coating.
Used only for anti-corrosion coating on slewing bearings.
Delta Tone may only be overpainted with nitro-combination paint in order to achieve abrasion and weather resistance.
Aluminium Spray 8900 541 14 RAL 9006 (white aluminium) 400 ml
Aluminium spray is an alkyl-resin-based single-component paint spray.
As protection for Delta Tone,
Repair of standard fastenings (screws, nuts, washers, cotter pins, etc.)
Sikaflex 222 100 996 56 Black 310 ml
1K PUR sealing and adhesive compound with good UV and weather resistance.
Solvent-free.
LHM 120-280_002 582

141128
141128

LHM 280 - 141128 - Op

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LHM 280 - 141128 - Op

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LHM 280 - 141128 - Op

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating manual EN

ORIGINAL 001 - 20.11.2012 / lwnkia0

RADIUS LOAD CURVE 75% NL MOTOR GRAB

ITEM CODE: 11227514

MIN. RADIUS MAX. RADIUS

MIN. RADIUS MAX. RADIUS

LOAD CHART FOR TRAVELLING EQUIPMENT LIKE SPREADER, GRAB

ITEM CODE: 11227514

Work with or on the machine includes:

Compliance with the operation manual by maintenance personnel:

Latest version of the documentation

To ensure the documentation is always complete and up to date:

The operation manual contains:

The technical information contains:

The documentation accompanying the product contains documentation re­

The spare parts catalogue provides information about:

The CD-ROM contains all the machine documentation in digital form.

System requirements for use of the CD

This documentation is protected by copyright. The information and images in

Liebherr-Werk Nenzing Gmbh

Telephone: +43 50809 41-0

1.4 Appropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.5 Inappropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1.6 Technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.8 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

1.9 Litronic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.2 Requirements to personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.3 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.4 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

2.5 Danger zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.6 Safety signs on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

2.7 Safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.9 Danger from electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.10 How to respond in the event of a current transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.11 How to respond in the event of a fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

2.12 Hand signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

3. Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

3.2 Left master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

3.3 Right master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

3.4 Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

3.5 Litronic monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

4.2 Commissioning the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

4.3 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

4.4 Travelling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

4.5 Supporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

4.6 Crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

4.7 Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

4.8 Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

4.9 Boom cable drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

4.10 Cable retainer*, cable duct* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

4.11 Auxiliary supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

4.12 Correcting rope twist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

4.13 Rope length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

4.14 Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

4.15 Rotator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

4.17 Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

4.18 Man riding* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

4.19 Synchronise winches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

The documentation accompanying the product contains documentation re

4.10 Cable retainer, cable duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227